JP7271120B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

As shown in Patent Literature 1, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside.

JP 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007)

In a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Literature 1, it is necessary to optimize control regarding setting of set values.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to optimize control related to setting of set values.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control according to a set value and capable of receiving a signal output from a gaming device,
A game control means for performing variable display of special identification information and controlling the progress of the game;
special display means controlled by the game control means and capable of displaying variable display results of special identification information using a plurality of light emitting elements;
an imparting means capable of imparting a game value based on a signal output from the gaming device;
setting permission state control means capable of controlling a setting permission state for permitting setting of the setting value;
setting confirmation state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value;
A gaming value can be given based on a signal output from the gaming device when being controlled to the setting permission state,
A game value can be given based on a signal output from the gaming device when the setting confirmation state is controlled;
without performing variable display of the special identification information when being controlled to the setting permission state;
not performing variable display of the special identification information when being controlled to the setting confirmation state;
The mode of the plurality of light emitting elements of the special display means when being controlled to the setting permission state is a mode different from the mode showing the variable display result of the special identification information, and all of them are in a mode of emitting light (Paragraph 1033 , Fig. 9-31, etc.).
In addition, the gaming machine of means X1 is
A game machine that can execute control according to the set value among a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit) with different degrees of advantage (jackpot probability) for the player ( A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
A game state control means (for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (high probability state) with a high rate of being controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) in which game media can easily enter the variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) a microcomputer 100);
A state transition lottery execution means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a state transition lottery (probability variable fall determination) for shifting the game state in the special state (high probability state),
Based on the result of the state transition lottery (it is determined that there is a probability variable fall in the probability variable fall determination), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) setting suggestion performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing
According to such a configuration, by executing the setting suggesting effect based on the result of the state transition lottery, the control according to the set value is executed and the amusement of the gaming machine in which the state transition lottery is executed is enhanced. be able to. In particular, even if the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's desire to play by executing the setting suggesting effect.

The gaming machine of means X2 is
A gaming machine of means X1,
The probability of the state transition lottery (probability variable fall determination) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 14-10, regardless of the currently set value, the common probability variable fall determination table is referred to Therefore, the probability of ending the high probability state is common at 1/80 regardless of the setting value)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the probability of the state transition lottery is common regardless of the setting value, when the advantage is set to a high setting value, it becomes easy to continuously control to the advantageous state, and the game can improve the interest of

The game machine of means X3 is
A gaming machine of means X1 or means X2,
The setting suggesting effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) provides a set value suggested in the setting suggesting effect (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) and a set value (currently set setting value) with different ratios of setting suggestion effects (first setting suggestion effect that displays the characters “reach !!” or “REACH”, “full moon background”, “half moon background”, or “crescent background A second setting suggestion effect that displays "" can be executed,
Depending on the timing determined to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (number of times of display when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall in the probability variation fall determination), any of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects The ratio of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect of the type is different (in the first setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (A), if it is 50 times or less, the characters “reach !!” If the number of times is 51 or more, the characters "REACH" are displayed, and in the second setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. If it is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, display a "half moon background", and if it is 61 times or more, display a "crescent background")
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by associating the timing at which the game state is shifted in the state transition lottery with the type of setting suggestion effect.

The game machine of means X4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means X1 to means X3,
One of the multiple production modes (normal mode (low probability base state), battle RUSH mode (high probability high base state or low probability high base state), chance time (low probability high base state)) Equipped with production mode control means (production control CPU 120) that can be controlled in the mode,
The production mode control means (production control CPU 120) can be controlled to a predetermined production mode based on the fact that it is determined to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (variable probability fall determination) (Fig. 14- As shown in 23, control to the battle RUSH mode (high probability high base state) until the 19th variation display after being controlled to the high probability high base state, and the probability variation fall judgment corresponding to the 20th variation display "Probability variation Based on the determination that there is a fall, the battle RUSH mode is terminated at the 20th change display, and the change display after the 21st time (up to the 100th time) is controlled to chance time),
The setting-suggestion effect execution means can execute the setting-suggestion effect based on the decision to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (as shown in FIGS. 14-23, the 20th variation The battle RUSH mode (low probability high base state) is ended with the 20th variation display based on the fact that the probability variable fall judgment corresponding to the display is determined to be "with probability variable fall", and the first setting suggestion production and second setting After the suggestive effect is executed, the variable display after the 21st time (up to the 100th time) is controlled to the chance time)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, by associating the effect mode with the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to improve the interest when the game state is changed. In particular, even if the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's willingness to play.

The game machine of means X5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means X1 to means X4,
The game state control means (game control microcomputer 100) can be controlled to a specific state (high base state), which is a game state in which variable display is likely to be executed, and in the state transition lottery executed in the specific state It is possible to continue the specific state on the condition that it is not decided to shift the game state (as shown in FIGS. 14-19, the 100th fluctuation display after controlling to the high probability high base state When it is executed, if it is not determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in any probability variable fall determination executed in response to the previous variable display including the 100th variable display, the 101st fluctuation Continue the high-accuracy high-base state even after the display),
A continuation suggestion effect that suggests that the specific state (high base state) continues (as shown in FIG. production) is provided with continuous suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120),
If it is determined to shift the game state in the state transition lottery before the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times) in the specific state, the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in the specific state. until the specific state is continued until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed in the specific state, the continuation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed (as shown in FIGS. When the 100th variable display is executed after controlling to the high base state, any probability variable fall determination executed in response to the previous variable display including the 100th variable display If it is determined that there is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect corresponding to the 100th variable display, and also executes the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that both the continuation suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are executed when the variable display is executed the predetermined number of times, the effect corresponding to the predetermined number of variable displays is executed. It is possible to draw particular attention to the production performed by

The game machine of means X6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means X1 to means X5,
The rate at which the specific effect is executed in response to the variable display that is executed when the advantageous state is controlled is the specific effect that is executed in response to the variable display that is executed when the control is not in the advantageous state. (As shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and (B), when the display result is “big hit”, the battle effect is executed more than when the display result is “loss”). high percentage of
When it is determined to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination), the ratio at which the specific effect is executed in response to the variable display. , when it is determined not to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (when it is determined that there is no probability variable fall in the probability variable fall determination), the specific effect is executed in response to the variable display. (As shown in Figure 14-12 (A) to (D), when the probability variable fall judgment is determined to be The rate at which the battle production is executed is higher than when
The setting suggestion effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) can execute the setting suggestion effect during execution of the variable display with the specific effect In response to the 100th variation display, the battle production is executed and the first setting suggestion production and the second setting suggestion production are executed. Setting suggestion production is to be executed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting suggesting effect is also executed while the variable display accompanied by the specific effect is being executed, so it is possible to improve interest when the variable display accompanied by the specific effect is executed. . Further, even if the state transition lottery result is disadvantageous to the player without being controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play by executing the setting suggesting effect.

Further, as shown in JP-A-2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), the pending information expands while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the pending information changes from a normal mode to a special mode. A gaming machine has been proposed. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), there is room for improving the interest of presentation using corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as reserved information. The inventions relating to the means V1 to V5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the interest of the presentation using the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The gaming machine of means V1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
A corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to the variable display when the specific effect display (ready effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is displayed. ,
Action effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing action effects (first change suggesting effect, second change suggesting effect) acting on the corresponding display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the first change suggesting effect is executed As a result, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable body 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a state of being difficult to see)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when the action effect is executed, it is possible to generate unexpectedness and improve interest.

The gaming machine of means V2 is
A gaming machine of means V1,
A change in which the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) targeted by the effect rendering (first change suggesting effect, second change suggesting effect) is changed from the display mode before the effect effect is executed. Equipped with a change production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
When the action effect is executed after reducing the visibility of the specific effect display (when executing the first change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10)), and when the specific effect display is executed When executing the action effect without reducing the visibility (when executing the second change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (15)), the ratio of executing the change effect is Different (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but when the second change suggestion effect is executed In some cases, the display mode of the active display may not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the player will be interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the effect effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means V3 is
A gaming machine of means V1 or means V2,
The specific effect display (ready effect image (image related to battle effect)) is a reproduction display of the effect animation (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7), and battle shown in FIGS. A series of images related to the production),
The reproduction display period of the effect animation is common regardless of whether the effect effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed is It is common to 1 change suggestion production and 2nd change suggestion production),
The execution period of the action effect is shorter than the reproduction display period of the effect animation, and the action effect ends before the end of the reproduction display period of the effect animation (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the first The execution period of the change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect is from T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period from T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed, and the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect are executed before the battle effect ends. (The change-suggestion production ends.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it becomes unnecessary to adjust the reproduction display period of the effect animation and the execution period of the action effect, and the display control of the effect animation can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means V4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means V1 to means V3,
It is possible to execute variable display of production identification information (decorative pattern, small pattern) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special pattern),
The production identification information includes first production identification information (decorative pattern) and second production identification information (small pattern),
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the specific effect display is decreased, and the visibility of the first effect identification information is decreased, while the visibility of the second effect identification information is decreased. Not allowed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestive effect to make the decorative pattern difficult to see, while the small pattern does not reduce the visibility of
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to appropriately understand that the variable display of the special identification information is continued while enhancing the effect by reducing the visibility of the specific effect display. .

The game machine of means V5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means V1 to means V4,
The effect effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) provides an operation prompting display (special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A) that prompts the player to operate at a specific timing (timing T7 after the development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3) and one of a plurality of types of specific effects (first change suggesting effect and second change suggesting effect) according to the player's operation (first change suggesting effect or second change suggesting effect). can be executed as the action production,
At a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (timing T2 immediately after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3), the operation prompting display (normal mode operation prompting display 01TM031) is performed, and a predetermined effect ( Predetermined effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing cut-in notice effect),
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed but the specific effect is not executed (first change suggesting effect Alternatively, when any of the second change suggesting effects is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, neither the first change suggesting effect nor the second change suggesting effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed. The percentage of hitting the jackpot is higher than if it was done)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation in response to the operation prompting display, the player becomes interested in whether the specific performance is executed or the predetermined performance is executed, thereby improving interest. be able to.

Further, as shown in JP-A-2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), the pending information expands while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the pending information changes from a normal mode to a special mode. A gaming machine has been proposed. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), there is room for improving the interest of presentation using corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as reserved information. The inventions relating to means W1 to means W6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the interest of presentation using corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays.

The gaming machine of means W1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
A corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to the variable display when the specific effect display (ready effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is displayed. ,
a change effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding display (effect of changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001);
When executing the change effect, it is possible to make the visibility of the corresponding display targeted for the change effect higher than the visibility of the specific effect display (Fig. 14-7 (18) to (19). , etc., the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is increased by enlarging and displaying the active display 01TM001 in the center of the screen while keeping the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) in a state of being difficult to see due to the blackout effect. (image related to battle effect) is made higher than the visibility of (image related to battle effect), and effect is executed to change the display mode of active display 01TM001 in that state)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the corresponding display targeted for the change effect rather than the specific effect display, thereby improving interest in the change effect.

The gaming machine of means W2 is
A gaming machine of means W1,
An action effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect effect (first change suggesting effect, second change suggesting effect) acting on the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) is provided.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the change production by executing the effect production.

The gaming machine of means W3 is
A gaming machine of means W2,
In the change effect (effect of changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001), the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) targeted by the action effect (first change suggestive effect, second change suggestive effect) is changed from the display mode before the action effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), from the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display) to the red mode Change to active display 01TM001 (red round display)),
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the first change suggesting effect is executed As a result, a blackout effect is executed, and the movable body 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a state of being difficult to see),
When the action effect is executed after reducing the visibility of the specific effect display (when executing the first change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10)), and when the specific effect display is executed When executing the action effect without reducing the visibility (when executing the second change suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (15)), the ratio of executing the change effect is Different (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but when the second change suggestion effect is executed In some cases, the display mode of the active display may not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the player will be interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the effect effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means W4 is
A gaming machine of means W2 or means W3,
The specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is a reproduction display of a effect video (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7), and a battle shown in FIGS. A series of images related to the production),
The reproduction display period of the effect animation is common regardless of whether the effect effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed is It is common to 1 change suggestion production and 2nd change suggestion production),
The execution period of the action effect is shorter than the reproduction display period of the effect animation, and the action effect ends before the end of the reproduction display period of the effect animation (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the first The execution period of the change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect is from T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period from T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed, and the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect are executed before the battle effect ends. (The change-suggestion production ends.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, there is no need to adjust the reproduction display period of the effect animation and the execution period of the action effect, and the display control of the effect animation can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means W5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means W2 to means W4,
It is possible to execute variable display of production identification information (decorative pattern, small pattern) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special pattern),
The production identification information includes first production identification information (decorative pattern) and second production identification information (small pattern),
When executing the action effect, the visibility of the specific effect display is decreased, and the visibility of the first effect identification information is decreased, while the visibility of the second effect identification information is decreased. Not allowed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), a blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestive effect to make the decorative pattern difficult to see, while the small pattern does not change the visibility of
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the visibility of the specific effect display is lowered to enhance the effect of the effect, and at the same time, it is possible for the player to appropriately understand that the variable display of the special identification information is continued. .

The gaming machine of means W6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means W2 to means W5,
The effect effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) provides an operation prompting display (special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A) to prompt the player to operate at a specific timing (timing T7 after the development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3). and one of a plurality of types of specific effects (first change suggesting effect and second change suggesting effect) according to the player's operation (first change suggesting effect or second change suggesting effect). can be executed as the action production,
At a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (timing T2 immediately after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3), the operation prompting display (normal mode operation prompting display 01TM031) is performed, and a predetermined effect ( Predetermined effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing cut-in notice effect),
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed but the specific effect is not executed (first change suggesting effect Alternatively, when any of the second change suggesting effects is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, neither the first change suggesting effect nor the second change suggesting effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed. The percentage of hitting the jackpot is higher than if it was done)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation in response to the operation prompting display, the player becomes interested in whether the specific performance is executed or the predetermined performance is executed, thereby improving interest. be able to.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control regarding the provision of game media when changing the set value. The invention according to means A1 to means A9 has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the provision of game media.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable values (prepaid balance, owned balls, stored balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
Giving means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) for giving game media based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) capable of executing specific control (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) according to set values (step S21TM1690 etc. Game that executes processing a control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of changing the setting value to a setting change mode,
with
When the setting change mode is controlled, the provision of game media based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. When the setting change mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command when it is controlled in the setting change mode, so that the payout control micro 3. When the computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal, 3. When the gaming machine frame open sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. By the game control microcomputer 100 not transmitting the connection confirmation command when being controlled in the setting change mode (by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 not receiving the connection confirmation command), the payout control Even if the microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, it does not turn on the EXS signal.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game media when the setting change mode is set.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main substrate 11, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, control is performed in a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. During the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not carry out ball lending.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine,
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value,
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can give game media when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when it is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 for outputting the connection confirmation signal is the setting change mode). (executed after exiting mode, after exiting configuration confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible not to provide the game medium when the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and based on the input of the first predetermined signal, the gaming device It is possible to provide game media based on the input of a second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
When the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. PRDY signal is not turned on when no connection confirmation signal is input; 2. connection confirmation mode). PRDY signal is not turned on when no command is received),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible not to provide the game medium when the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine,
At least one of the game control means and the provision means (for example, payout control microcomputer 21TM370) includes open state detection means ( A game machine frame equipped with a game machine frame open sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is open and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open. Door frame open sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the application of game media is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by
According to this, when the game machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, it is possible to limit the provision of game media.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The granting means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to input of a grant request signal from the game device (turns on the BRQ signal), and outputs the grant preparation signal. When a grant command signal output from the gaming device in response to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), a game medium is deposited,
When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible not to provide the game medium when the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch ) when 21TM052 is on), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch ) if 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode;
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game state is initialized (the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the setting value on the display monitor 21TM029), the game state is initialized. (display the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the game state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and when the setting confirmation mode command is received "Confirming settings" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when power is turned on),
With the control to the setting change mode, the game state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. Due to the control, the game state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed. is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game parlor can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on signals output from gaming devices when changing set values. The invention according to the means B1 to B7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on signals output from gaming devices.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable values (prepaid balance, owned balls, stored balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) capable of executing specific control (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) according to set values (step S21TM1690 etc. Game that executes processing a control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of changing the setting value to a setting change mode,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, predetermined control based on the signal output from the game device can be executed (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is set to the ON state, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command can be transmitted, and with the connection confirmation signal ON state, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received. For payout control The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether it is a period controlled in the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the game device, and to avoid the control burden when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
When the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (power failure, etc.) during execution of the predetermined control, and then the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is resumed (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts ball lending when a power failure occurs during execution of ball lending, and after resuming power supply When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately restarting the ball lending),
It is characterized by
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
When the predetermined control is executed, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during execution of ball lending). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply is restored after that, the ball lending is not restarted, and the setting is changed. The ball lending will not be resumed even after the end of the mode or setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means is controlled when the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is also ON). case), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state) case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
When the setting change mode is controlled, game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
When the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the setting value (after blinking the setting value on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the game state has been initialized (display display the letter "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the game state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and when the setting confirmation mode command is received display "Confirming settings" on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when power is turned on),
With the control to the setting change mode, the game state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. Due to the control, the game state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed. is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game parlor can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes through a specific area when changing set values. The invention according to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
Specific control (special Special control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing jackpot determination processing in symbol process processing,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of changing the setting value to a setting change mode,
When the setting change mode is being controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the special symbol process processing (jackpot determination processing) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when there is a possibility that the set value will be changed.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means is controlled when the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is also ON). case), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is controlled when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the game machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are established when the power supply to the game machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game state is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the setting value on the display monitor 21TM029), the game state is initialized. (display the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the game state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C3,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and when the setting confirmation mode command is received display "Confirming settings" on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
When the control is in the setting confirmation mode, even if the game medium passes through the specific area, the specific control is not executed (the setting confirmation mode is set before the timer interrupt is set (step S21TM1500). Therefore, during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the special symbol process processing (jackpot determination processing) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed while the set value is being confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
In accordance with the control to the setting change mode, the game state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. The gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized due to the control (if the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the RAM clearing process in step S21TM1410 is performed). is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game parlor can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode the control is to be performed, and can also select whether or not the game state is to be initialized.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute appropriate processing when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means D1 to means D5 has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that executes appropriate processing when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of means D1 is
Specific control means (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) capable of executing specific control (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) according to set values (step S21TM1690 etc. Game that executes processing a control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of changing the setting value to a setting change mode,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode for notifying the setting value in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means for storing setting values (setting value storage area of RAM 102 where setting values are stored),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the first condition is established (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON) and the second condition is established (clear switch ( the setting changeover switch 21TM052 is in the ON state), controlling to the setting change mode;
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON) and the second condition is not satisfied (cleared state) when power supply to the game machine is started. The switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state), controlling to the setting confirmation mode,
The setting value is determined based on a specific operation (an operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) in the setting change mode,
The setting value storage means stores the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode when being controlled in the setting change mode (stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before shifting to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without being changed upon transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the game machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed (the power supply is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and then When the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on). If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before shifting to the setting confirmation mode are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the game arcade clerk or the like can appropriately determine the set value when the power supply is stopped while the setting change mode is being controlled.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (to turn on the clear switch 21TM052) when power supply to the game machine is started. operation) is performed, control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls to the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed and the initialization operation is not performed when power supply to the gaming machine is started.
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can select either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode for control.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game state is initialized (the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029);
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D3,
Game control means (game control microcontroller for executing game control timer interrupt processing) that has the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, and controls the progress of the game in the game machine. computer 100);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that executes control of production,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays "setting changing" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received). display "Confirming settings" on the device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D4,
Timing after the start of power supply to the game machine (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 outputs a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting changeover switch ) When a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "Operation of the lock switch was detected.", "Operation of the setting changeover switch was detected." A warning is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like of the game arcade to grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. Even if the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The inventions relating to means E1 to E8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine in which the status of processing related to changes in set values can be grasped on the external device side. be.

The gaming machine of means E1 is
A game machine capable of executing specific control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
the setting value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode);
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the processing related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means E2 is
The gaming machine of means E1,
capable of outputting the specific signal in response to the start of power supply to the game machine (a security signal is output when the RAM is cleared);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value when power supply to the game machine is started prepared,
When controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal (output the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal at the same time);
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility of being controlled to at least the setting change mode by the specific signal. It is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of being controlled by the mode.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on being controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (the output period of the setting corresponding change signal). The security signal will continue to be output for 30 seconds after the end of the
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal can be used to notify the outside that there is at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode. It is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of being controlled in the change mode.

The gaming machine of means E4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
capable of outputting the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (outputting a setting correspondence change signal while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode);
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means E5 is
The gaming machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the game machine is started, it is possible to control the setting confirmation mode (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. is controlled to the setting confirmation mode based on the
capable of outputting both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (outputting a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal at the same time);
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside by the specific signal that there is at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of being controlled by the mode.

The gaming machine of means E6 is
The gaming machine of means E1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value when power supply to the game machine is started prepared,
Outputting the special signal when controlled to the setting change mode (outputting a setting change corresponding signal when controlled to the setting change mode), and outputting the specific signal when the setting change mode ends (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value when power supply to the game machine is started prepared,
It is possible to output the special signal when controlled to the setting confirmation mode (output a setting change corresponding signal when controlled to the setting confirmation mode), and output the specific signal when the setting confirmation mode is terminated. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E7,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of changing the setting value to a setting change mode,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is made (the effect control CPU 120 determines that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated). When receiving a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the lock switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated from the game control microcomputer 100, "The operation of the lock switch was detected. ”, and “The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like of the game arcade to grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the game machine as described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp information related to the setting value, but JP-A-2014-200506 Even if the signal output technique of the conventional game machine described in the publication (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The inventions relating to means F1 to F11 have been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that allows an external device to grasp information related to set values.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
A game machine capable of executing specific control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
the set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (can be changed based on an operation in a setting change mode);
capable of outputting a special signal (setting change response signal) corresponding to processing related to changing the setting value (transition to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode);
The special signal can be output in a special mode that can specify the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) that can control the setting change mode that can change the setting value,
outputting the special signal of the special mode upon termination of the setting change mode (outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value when the setting change mode is terminated);
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to output from a common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
Outputting a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode) when being controlled in the setting change mode, and following the end of the setting change mode. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after temporarily turning off the setting change correspondence signal upon termination of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value change response signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the outside of the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
outputting the special signal of the special mode upon termination of the setting confirmation mode (outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value when the setting confirmation mode is terminated);
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output from a common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means F5 is
The gaming machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is ON during the period of control in the setting confirmation mode) is output when being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and upon completion of the setting confirmation mode. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after temporarily turning off the setting change corresponding signal upon termination of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value setting change response signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the outside of the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the setting value can be specified by the number of pulses (the setting value can be specified in the external device by setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to be the same as the setting value. be),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to easily specify the setting value in the external device.

The gaming machine of means F7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurred in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change response signal) from a common terminal (for example, outputting from a tenth terminal);
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
The gaming machine of means F7,
outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change response signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting the security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting the setting change response signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F9,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can control the setting change mode that can change the setting value,
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation has been performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output upon termination of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, it is Regardless of whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal.) ,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F10,
Upon completion of the processing related to the change of the set value, the special signal of the special mode is output (at the end of the setting change mode, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output). output a setting change corresponding signal, and output a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 upon termination of the setting confirmation mode), and output the special signal After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) by a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the jackpot game state, etc.) different from the processing related to the change of the set value output a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value that is set),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined trigger, it is possible to increase the chances of enabling the external device to specify the setting value.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control regarding the provision of game media when changing the set value. The invention relating to the means G1 to G10 has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the provision of game media.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising an awarding means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) capable of awarding game value (pachinko balls),
Specific control means (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) capable of executing specific control (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) according to set values (step S21TM1690 etc. Game that executes processing a control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of a game machine frame (game machine frame 3) and a door frame (glass door frame 3a) (for example, game machine frame 3) corresponding to the game machine is opened A game provided with means (a game machine frame open sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the provision of game value is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, thereby not executing the payout of game media in the ball lending process and prize ball process);
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate control regarding the awarding of game value when the setting change mode is being controlled.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) detects the open state detection means (the game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). A payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 equipped with a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state detects the open state. When (a state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open) is detected, it is possible to control the setting change mode (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processing after step S21TM3530 is executed);
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled in a state in which the open state of the game machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) that stores specific information (the value of the setting change flag) that can specify that the setting change mode is controlled,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can bring the game into a stopped state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after power supply to the game machine is restarted (game When the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the control microcomputer 100 indicates that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , on the condition that it is shifted to the setting change mode, and if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, it does not shift to the normal game process, and loops until the power is turned off),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, it is possible to enter the game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
The gaming machine of means G3,
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (the value of the setting changing flag) is erased (based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, YES is determined in step S21TM3530, and the setting change mode is terminated. end, and the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game process after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to G4,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing),
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detection means, and determines whether or not to execute the giving of game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game medium is not paid out, When neither the game machine frame 3 nor the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game medium is paid out),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the granting means for controlling the granting of the game value has the open state detection means, it is easy to determine whether or not to execute the granting of the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
The gaming machine of means G5,
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289)
Based on the reception of information (number of payouts) related to the awarding of game value from the game control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes game control timer interrupt processing), execution of awarding of game value,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (unpaid number) related to game value to be awarded,
The storage means can store the given information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the giving means executes the giving of game value according to the giving information stored in the storage means (if the power is turned off while the game medium is being paid out, the game value is given). If this occurs, the payout of game media is interrupted, and after the power is turned on, the interrupted payout is resumed, and the unpaid number of game media are paid out);
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the imparting information related to the game value to be imparted after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the information is stored after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to give the game value corresponding to the given information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G6,
It can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) gives a game value based on signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the awarding of game value based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (the game machine frame door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout of game media is executed. not),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the giving of game value while the game machine frame or the door frame is open is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles associated with the giving operation while the game machine frame or the door frame is open. Maintenance work or the like can be smoothly performed while the game machine frame or the door frame is open.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G7,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when power is turned on),
The gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized as the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode,
The game state of the game machine is not initialized due to the control in the setting confirmation mode (when the control is in the setting change mode, the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, and in step S21TM3040 If the determination is YES, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3050, or if the determination in step S21TM3140 is YES, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3150. In step S21TM3040, based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, it is judged NO in step S21TM3040, so that the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050. ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a game arcade clerk or the like can select either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode for control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
The gaming machine of means G8,
A storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data of unpaid number) related to game value to be awarded,
The given information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100). Along with this, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed, the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area within the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is unpaid. number data is initialized),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the imparting information regarding the gaming value to be imparted, the management in the gaming parlor can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
The gaming machine of means G8,
A storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data of unpaid number) related to game value to be awarded,
The given information is not initialized regardless of whether the game state of the gaming machine has been initialized (step S21TM3050 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or RAM clear in step S21TM3150 is executed). Also, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area within the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 data is not initialized),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, even when the game state of the gaming machine is initialized, the information regarding the game value to be awarded can be appropriately protected because the award information is not initialized.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the setting value are displayed on the external device side. Although it may be necessary to distinguish and recognize, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize them. The invention according to the means H1 to H5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and distinguishes between the state of occurrence of a predetermined event in the game machine and the state of execution of processing related to change of set values on the external device side. To provide a game machine capable of being separately recognized.

The gaming machine of means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame/door frame open detection, etc.) occurring in the game machine, and processing related to change of set value (setting change mode) can output a specific signal,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the setting value (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode after RAM clear is executed). is output for 30 seconds, and when the RAM is cleared and the setting change mode is controlled, the output is for a period of 30 seconds added to the period during which the setting change mode is controlled),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the processing related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
A game machine of means H1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). is output for a period of 30 seconds added to the specified period, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, is output for a period of 50 ms added to the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A game machine of means H1 or means H2,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, "lock switch operation has been detected.” and “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” are displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H3,
A special signal (signal corresponding to setting change) can be output in response to processing related to setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode),
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change response signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change response signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value, and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value. can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of means H5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H4,
A special signal (setting change response signal) can be output in response to processing related to setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode that can specify the set value (output the number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting changing means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of processing related to the setting value. Even if the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention relating to means I1 to I6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine in which the execution status of processing related to set values can be grasped on the side of an external device. .

The gaming machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
The setting value can be changed,
Start outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value,
Stop outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the setting value is longer than the predetermined period (when the setting change mode is controlled, the security signal output period is 30 seconds or more, and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled) , the output period of the security signal is not less than 50 ms),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the set value.

The gaming machine of means I2 is
A gaming machine of means I1,
capable of outputting a specific signal (security signal) corresponding to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame/door frame open detection, etc.) occurring in the game machine;
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value (the security signal is generated when the RAM is cleared). If the setting change mode is not controlled, it is output for 30 seconds, and if the RAM is cleared and the setting change mode is controlled, it is output for a period of 30 seconds added to the setting change mode control period. ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the processing related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means I3 is
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). output for a period of 30 seconds added to the set period, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, output for a period of 50 ms added to the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means I4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I3,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation to turn on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (an operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, "lock switch operation has been detected.” and “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” are displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means I5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change response signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change response signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change response signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value, and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value. can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I5,
A special signal (signal corresponding to setting change) can be output in response to control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to setting values,
The special signal can be output in a special mode that can specify the set value (output the number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

In addition, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title that informs the type of ready-to-win effect at the start of the ready-to-win effect (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-101428). In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, it is desired to enhance the presentation effect. The inventions relating to means J1 to J8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced presentation effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to means J1
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
A title notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period of time has passed since the suggestive effect was started (eg, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

The gaming machine of means J2 is, in the gaming machine of means J1,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effects,
Among the plurality of types of suggestive effects, at least part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (eg, FIG. 8-2(C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which suggestive effect is to be executed, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means J3 is the gaming machine of means J1 or means J2,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even after the title is announced.

The gaming machine of means J4 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J3,
The suggestive effect executing means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, a ready-to-reach effect of super reach A and super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a ready-to-reach effect of super reach D and super reach E) as the suggestive effect. is possible and
In the second suggestive effect, the title notifying means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestive effect from the start of the second suggestive effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect, so the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J5 is the gaming machine of means J4,
A ratio of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J5,
The suggestive effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestive effect in an effect mode related to the title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J7 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J6,
detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player;
A specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means is
As the specific displays, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047 and a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. is possible and
In the non-effective period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I) )),
During the effective period of detection by the detection means, an action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J7,
As a suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestive display whose display size is the first size (shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12(a) display, etc.) and a second suggestive display whose display size is the second size (the second size reach title image 31AK062, etc. displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120) is further provided,
The display means is
Multiple types of elements with different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) etc.) (such as fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed,
A plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestive display and the second suggestive display when both the first suggestive display and the second suggestive display are displayed in the pattern including the specific image. (the shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12(a) and 8-12(d) may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestive display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the specific image has been displayed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine has been proposed that can display pending icons in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions relating to the means K1 to K7 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means K1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first reservation display 30TM001, second reservation display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, secondary reservation display 30TM004, secondary active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first reserved display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition, in a second information display area (sub-holding display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (secondary pending display 30TM004, secondary active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the aspect of the first information changes differs from the rate at which the aspect of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. The ratio of selecting a mode different from the mode is low, and the display mode of the secondary pending display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first pending display 30TM001)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. and interest in aspects of the first information and the second information.

The gaming machine of means K2 is
A game machine of means K1,
The form of the first information after change is different from the form of the second information after change (as shown in FIG. , the blue mode secondary hold indication 30TM004b is a blue star indication)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information and the second information have different states after change, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means K3 is
A game machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first pending display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (secondary pending display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8(2), the first pending display 30TM001 and active display 30TM003, and the secondary pending display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 can be displayed simultaneously),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the ratio of control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, active The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is gold and the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The expectation of a big hit is higher when is in the red mode)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, thereby enhancing the interest.

The gaming machine of means K4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A first pending display (first pending display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first pending display area 30TM101), and a first corresponding display (active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the first reserved display (Fig. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode first pending display 30TM001c (red circle display) shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the red mode active display 30TM003c (red circle display) of the same display color shifts to the active display area 30TM103. display) is displayed),
A second pending display (secondary pending display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary pending display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105), and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. display the corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second reserved display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second reserved display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode secondary reserved display 30TM004c (red star display) shifts to the secondary active display area 30TM105, the red mode secondary active display 30TM005c (red (star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, so that the information corresponding to the variable display is interesting. can be improved and interest can be given to aspects of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information.

The game machine of means K5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K4,
A notification effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
At least part of the first information display area (first reservation display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area in which the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of hiding the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is displayed even when the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters "reach!" Indication 30TM003 disappears, while secondary pending indication 30TM004 and secondary active indication 30TM005 continue to be displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, the information for the variable display can be confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. can be made possible.

The gaming machine of means K6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reservation display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). display, and display a second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (secondary reserved display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect executed when the state of the first corresponding display changes and the second effect effect executed when the state of the second corresponding display changes (for example, active The active effect effect that changes the display mode of display 30TM003 is a mode in which character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. The side effect effect effect that changes the display mode of secondary active display 30TM005 is the appearance of character a. (This is a mode in which the action of flying a balloon is executed by
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the modes of the first action presentation and the second action presentation different.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first reservation display (first reservation display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first reservation display area 30TM101), and displays the second information Display the second pending display (secondary pending display 30TM004) as the second information display area (secondary pending display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first pending display changes and when the mode of the second pending display changes, the ratio of control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 11-3, active The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 changes than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 changes, and when the display mode of the first pending display 30TM001 changes, the secondary pending display 30TM004 is more expected. If the display mode changes, the expectation of a big hit will be higher.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which aspect of the first suspension display and the second suspension display has changed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine has been proposed that can display pending icons in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions relating to the means L1 to L7 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first reservation display 30TM001, second reservation display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, secondary reservation display 30TM004, secondary active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first reserved display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition, in a second information display area (sub-holding display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (secondary pending display 30TM004, secondary active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the aspect of the first information changes, at least part of the advance notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-11, the aspect of the first pending display 30TM001 is When changed, the secondary reserved display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary reserved display area 30TM104 and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in a game machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as information corresponding to the common variable display, complication of presentation is suppressed and interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
A game machine of means L1,
The form of the first information after change is different from the form of the second information after change (as shown in FIG. , the blue mode secondary hold indication 30TM004b is a blue star indication)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information and the second information have different states after change, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A game machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first pending display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (secondary pending display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8(2), the first pending display 30TM001 and active display 30TM003, and the secondary pending display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 can be displayed simultaneously),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the ratio of control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, active The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is gold and the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The expectation of a big hit is higher when is in the red mode)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, thereby improving the interest.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A first pending display (first pending display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first pending display area 30TM101), and a first corresponding display (active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the first reserved display (Fig. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode first pending display 30TM001c (red circle display) shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the red mode active display 30TM003c (red circle display) of the same display color shifts to the active display area 30TM103. display) is displayed),
A second pending display (secondary pending display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary pending display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105), and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. display the corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second reserved display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second reserved display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode secondary reserved display 30TM004c (red star display) shifts to the secondary active display area 30TM105, the red mode secondary active display 30TM005c (red (star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, so that the information corresponding to the variable display is interesting. It can improve and interest aspects of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L4,
A notification effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
At least part of the first information display area (first reservation display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of hiding the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is displayed even when the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters "reach!" Indication 30TM003 disappears, while secondary pending indication 30TM004 and secondary active indication 30TM005 continue to be displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, the information for the variable display can be confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. can be made possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reservation display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). display, and display a second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (secondary reserved display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect executed when the state of the first corresponding display changes and the second effect effect executed when the state of the second corresponding display changes (for example, active The active effect effect that changes the display mode of display 30TM003 is a mode in which character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. The side effect effect effect that changes the display mode of secondary active display 30TM005 is the appearance of character a. (This is a mode in which the action of flying a balloon is executed by
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the modes of the first action presentation and the second action presentation different.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first reservation display (first reservation display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first reservation display area 30TM101), and displays the second information Display the second pending display (secondary pending display 30TM004) as the second information display area (secondary pending display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first pending display changes and when the mode of the second pending display changes, the ratio of control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 11-3, active The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 changes than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 changes, and when the display mode of the first pending display 30TM001 changes, the secondary pending display 30TM004 is more expected. If the display mode changes, the expectation of a big hit will be higher.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which aspect of the first suspension display and the second suspension display has changed.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time pseudo-continuous variation is performed. It is In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means M1 to M6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display will change;
The change-suggestion effect executing means displays a success mode change-suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. Effect of changing mode) and effect of suggesting change of failure mode (as shown in Figs. ), and
Within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation until the ready-to-win state is established), according to the number of executions of the change-suggestion effect of the success mode, the decorative pattern from the start of fluctuation (re-fluctuation (pseudo continuation) after temporary stop) is performed During the period until the combination of different decorative patterns or pseudo consecutive patterns) is temporarily stopped, and during the period from the start of the fluctuation until any of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns stops for the first time), the next change suggestive effect The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both times were successful, the third change at a rate of 100% If the suggesting effect is executed and the first time is a success mode and the first time is a failure mode, the third change suggesting effect may not be executed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise interest in the number of executions of the change-suggesting presentation by increasing the degree of attention.

The gaming machine of means M2 is
A game machine of means M1,
Depending on the aspect of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio of control to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the final display of the active display The degree of expectation for a big hit varies depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of times the change-suggestion effect of the success mode has continued, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display will be varies (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the change-suggestion effect of the success mode continues The greater the number of , the higher the expectation of a big hit, and even if the active display is the same display color, the greater the number of consecutive performances suggesting a change in the success mode, the higher the expectation of a big hit.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of consecutive performances suggesting a change in the mode of success, and to improve the amusement.

The gaming machine of means M3 is
A game machine of means M1 or means M2,
It is possible to execute variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestive effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols does not change (as shown in FIGS. direction does not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decoration pattern does not change, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the change-indicating effect.

The gaming machine of means M4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M3,
The change-suggestion effect executing means (production control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change-suggestion effects (for example, a change-suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change-suggestion effect in which character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggesting effect, a different type of change suggesting effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), after executing a change suggesting effect in which character A appears , as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), execute a change suggesting effect in which character B appears)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change-suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means M5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M4,
The change-suggestion production executing means (production control CPU 120) provides a plurality of types of change-suggestion productions (for example, a change-suggestion production in which character A appears, a change-suggestion production in which character B appears, a change-indication production in which character C appears, A change-suggestion effect in which character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change-suggestion effect, the ratio of execution of the change-suggestion effect of the success mode differs, and the ratio of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. Character D has a higher rate of execution of the change-suggesting effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of change in the display mode of the active display.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which kind of change suggesting effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means M6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M5,
The change-suggestion production executing means (production control CPU 120) provides a plurality of types of change-suggestion productions (a change-suggestion production with character A appearing, a change-suggestion production with character B appearing, a change-suggestion production with character C appearing, a change-suggestion production with character D is possible to execute a change suggestive production in which
The rate at which the next change-suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change-suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. high percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which kind of change suggesting effect is executed.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time pseudo-continuous variation is performed. It is In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means N1 to N6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to provide a game machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display will change;
The change-suggestion effect executing means executes a change-suggestion effect as a change-suggestion effect in a success mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10), (20), the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is changed. It is possible to execute a production that does not cause
A predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the ready-to-win state, the decorative pattern from the start of fluctuation (a combination of decorative patterns or pseudo-continuous patterns in which re-fluctuation (pseudo-continuous) will be performed after temporary stop) is provisional Within the period until it stops, within the period from the start of the variation to the first stop of any of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns), the number of executions of the change suggestion production of the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion production Accordingly, the ratio of control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), the [execution number of success mode change suggesting effects] with respect to the [execution number of change suggesting effects] The higher the ratio of , the more likely it is to display in a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, when [the number of executions of a change suggesting effect of a success mode/the number of times of executing a change suggesting effect] is 2/3, the display mode is a blue mode. As a result, the display mode when it is 4/5 is a red mode with a higher expectation of a big hit.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise interest in the number of executions of the change-suggesting presentation by increasing the degree of attention.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
A gaming machine of means N1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio of control to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) differs (as shown in FIG. different),
Depending on the number of times the change-suggestion effect of the success mode has continued, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display will be is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the change-suggestion effect of the success mode continues The greater the number of , the higher the expectation of a big hit, and even if the active display is the same display color, the greater the number of times the performance suggesting a change in the success mode continues, the higher the expectation of a big hit.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of consecutive performances suggesting a change in the mode of success, and to improve the amusement.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A game machine of means N1 or means N2,
It is possible to execute variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestive effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols does not change (as shown in FIGS. direction does not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decoration pattern does not change, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the change-indicating effect.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N3,
The change-suggestion effect execution means (production control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change-suggestion effects (for example, a change-suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change-suggestion effect in which character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggesting effect, a different type of change suggesting effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), after executing a change suggesting effect in which character A appears, , as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), execute a change suggesting effect in which character B appears)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change-suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N4,
The change-suggestion production executing means (production control CPU 120) provides a plurality of types of change-suggestion productions (for example, a change-suggestion production in which character A appears, a change-suggestion production in which character B appears, a change-indication production in which character C appears, A change-suggestion effect in which character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change-suggestion effect, the ratio of execution of the change-suggestion effect of the success mode differs, and the ratio of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. Character D has a higher rate of execution of the change-suggesting effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of change in the display mode of the active display.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which kind of change suggesting effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N5,
The change-suggestion production executing means (production control CPU 120) provides a plurality of types of change-suggestion productions (change-suggestion production in which character A appears, change-indication production in which character B appears, change-indication production in which character C appears, character D is possible to execute a change suggestive production in which
The rate at which the next change suggesting effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggesting effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-17, the next change suggesting effect is executed more for character A than character D. high percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which kind of change suggesting effect is executed.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine is proposed in which a "jackpot signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value etc. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
Specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal at step S21TM4560) for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode; ,
setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (security signal timer value) relating to the period in which the specific signal is output;
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (one second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation mode). Upon termination, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was terminated, and upon termination of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the termination of the setting change mode. do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled in the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the setting change mode control (when the setting change mode ends, the setting change mode ends). Continue to output security signals until 30 seconds have passed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output for at least the period corresponding to the predetermined value in both the case where the control in the setting change mode and the case in which the control in the setting confirmation mode are ended. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while the setting processing by the setting means is made common. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without a specific operation (detection of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode. in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on this,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during control of the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the external device of the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). In the specific information storage means (the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing specific information when stopped, a setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is completed. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to send an error command to the effect control means while executing error notification in the display means (send a set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190, and display monitor in the error display of step S21TM4210 21TM029 can display the letter "E"),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to enter the setting change mode. Please allow me to migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the status of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. The inventions relating to the means P1 to P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the status of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), error notification means capable of executing error notification (game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means confirms that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting can be controlled to the setting change mode based on the changeover switch (21TM052 is in the ON state),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are all executed). Based on the determination of YES, the process shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed to the setting change mode without executing the error notification. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) case), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the power is turned on, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140) ), the process proceeds to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
and the specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) case), it is possible to send an error command to the effect control means while executing the error notification in the display means (send a set value abnormal error command in step S21TM4190 and display in the error display of step S21TM4210 It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power and enter the setting change mode. Please allow me to migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set values. The inventions relating to means Q1 to Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) is set), control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON, regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the game state.
The gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the game state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). A game control microcomputer 100 that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
If the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, when power failure occurs during setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. is executed), and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and when being controlled in the setting change mode It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled in the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Erasing the specific information when the setting change mode ends based on (clearing the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends),
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode), and terminate the setting change mode based on the specific operation (end the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). let)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation performed while being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610, change the set value stored in the set value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). based on the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means is configured to change the value in the setting change mode by the change operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (The setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is cleared. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The setting change mode control means stores in the setting value storage area when a change operation is performed under control in the setting change mode and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. changing only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on a specific operation after the change operation; The setting change mode is ended (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area). to confirm it as a valid set value and end the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means stores the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (Even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched OFF, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is stored. is not changed, so if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled by the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

As shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine is disclosed that executes an effect of counting down the remaining time until a ready-to-win effect is started. In a game machine that performs a predetermined action such as a countdown described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room for enhancing the presentation effect. The invention relating to the means R1 to R7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the performance of performing a predetermined action.

The gaming machine of means R1 is
A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (pseudo-continuous effect, expectation level announcement effect) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) is performed to change the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, countup operation for adding a numerical value) corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect. Executable predetermined production execution means (production control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means, as the predetermined effect,
After displaying the effect display ("3" set as the initial value) by the first special mode, the first predetermined effect (Fig. As shown, after displaying "3" as an initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to subtract the numerical value);
A second predetermined effect (FIG. 13-11 (14) to (17) for performing a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display ("70" set as the initial value) by the second special mode , after displaying "70" as an initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, a count-up operation is performed to add a numerical value), and
A predetermined action can be executed in a predetermined display area common to the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 13-11 (14) to As shown in (17), the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 common to the countdown effect and the countup effect can perform the subtraction or addition of the numerical value.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effects executed in the predetermined display area and improve the interest of the effects executed in the predetermined display area.

The gaming machine of means R2 is
A gaming machine of means R1,
As the suggestive effects, there are a first suggestive effect (pseudo-continuous effect) and a second suggestive effect (anticipation level advance effect),
The predetermined production execution means (production control CPU 120)
The first predetermined effect is executed in correspondence with the execution of the first suggestive effect (as shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9, the countdown effect is executed in correspondence with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect) ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in correspondence with the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in (14) to (17) in FIG. Execute)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, it is possible to clarify the correspondence relationship between the predetermined effect and the suggestive effects.

The gaming machine of means R3 is
A gaming machine of means R1 or means R2,
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtraction) and a second predetermined operation (countup operation for addition) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 subtracts a numerical value), and the second predetermined effect is performed. When the effect is executed, the second predetermined action is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, the numerical value is added on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the difference between the first predetermined action and the second predetermined action can be clarified, the player can clearly distinguish between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means R4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area differs between when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) As shown in FIG. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countdown effect is executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and when the countup effect is executed, the numerical value is displayed in white. displayed in blue mode or red mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means R5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R4,
The display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect is executed is different from the display mode of the predetermined display area when the second predetermined effect is executed (Fig. 13-9 (2) and As shown in FIG. 13-11 (14), "3" as the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the countdown effect is executed, and the sub liquid crystal display when the countup effect is executed It is different from "70" as the initial value of the count-up display displayed on the instrument 35TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means R6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R5,
For at least one of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, there are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed (the initial value of the count-up effect is , as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), the initial values for the count-up effect are "50", "60", "70", "80", and Any one of "90" can be determined),
Depending on the display mode of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), the same final value and In that case, when the initial value of the count-up effect is small, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the initial value of the count-up effect is large.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means R7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R6,
In a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area, an effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17). ), the initial value, change pattern, and final value of the numerical value bar 35TM610 shown in the anticipation effect of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial values shown in the count-up effect of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. value, change pattern, and final value)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in the special display area, so that the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced. .

As shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine is disclosed that executes an effect of counting down the remaining time until a ready-to-win effect is started. In a game machine that performs a predetermined action such as a countdown described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room for enhancing the presentation effect. The invention relating to the means S1 to S5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the performance of performing a predetermined action.

The gaming machine of means S1 is
A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (pseudo-continuous effect, expectation level announcement effect) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) is performed to change the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, countup operation for adding a numerical value) corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect. Executable predetermined production execution means (production control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means, as the predetermined effect,
After displaying the effect display ("3" set as the initial value) by the first special mode, the first predetermined effect (Fig. As shown, after displaying "3" set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to subtract the numerical value);
A second predetermined effect (FIG. 13-11 (14) to (17) for performing a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display ("70" set as the initial value) by the second special mode , after displaying "70" as an initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, a count-up operation is performed to add the numerical value. can be,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs between when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), The expectation of a big hit is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means S2 is
A game machine of means S1,
As the suggestive effects, there are a first suggestive effect (pseudo-continuous effect) and a second suggestive effect (anticipation level advance effect),
The predetermined production execution means (production control CPU 120)
The first predetermined effect is executed in correspondence with the execution of the first suggestive effect (as shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9, the countdown effect is executed in correspondence with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect) ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in correspondence with the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in (14) to (17) in FIG. Execute)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, it is possible to clarify the correspondence relationship between the predetermined effect and the suggestive effects.

The gaming machine of means S3 is
A game machine of means S1 or means S2,
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) and a second predetermined operation (addition, countup operation) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 subtracts the numerical value), and the second predetermined effect is performed. is performed, the second predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is performed, the numerical value is added on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the difference between the first predetermined action and the second predetermined action can be clarified, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means S4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means S1 to means S3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area differs between when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) As shown in FIG. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countdown effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and when the countup effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white. displayed in blue mode or red mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means S5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means S1 to means S4,
In a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area, an effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17). ), the initial value, change pattern, and final value of the numerical value bar 35TM610 shown in the anticipation effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial value, change pattern, and final value of the numerical value shown in the count-up effect. , consistent with the final value)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in the special display area, so that the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced. .

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and when the display of the timer effect eventually reaches 0, the battle effect ( Disclosed is a gaming machine from which a result of super reach performance is derived. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A-2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of a suggestive effect (battle effect) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state is performed. There is room for interest. The invention relating to the means T1 to T6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is intended to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of related effects.

The game machine of means T1 is
A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (music ready-to-win effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
A related effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (count display effect) related to the execution status of the suggested effect,
As the execution status of the suggestion effect, the first stage (a period of 1 to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (3)) and the second stage after the first stage (FIG. 13 -15 (4), a period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds in the Music Reach production);
When the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of the first stage is executed but the suggestive effect of the second stage is not executed (Fig. 13). As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the expectation of a big hit is higher when the music ready-to-win effect is executed up to the second stage than when the music ready-to-win effect ends in the first stage.) ,
It is easier to recognize the related effect when the suggestive effect is at the second stage than when the suggestive effect is at the first stage (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), music reach When the effect is in the first stage, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered, and the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. While the visibility is lowered, when the Music Reach production is in the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position, so the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. However, the visibility of the count display effect on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is in the first stage, it is difficult to recognize the related effect compared to when the suggestive effect is in the second stage.

The game machine of means T2 is
A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (music ready-to-win effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
A related effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (count display effect) related to the execution status of the suggested effect,
As the execution status of the suggestion effect, the first stage (a period of 1 to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)) and the second stage after the first stage (FIG. 13 -19 (4), a period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds in Music Reach production),
When the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of the first stage is executed but the suggestive effect of the second stage is not executed (Fig. 13). As shown in -13 (C) and (D), the expectation of a big hit is higher when the music ready-to-win effect is executed up to the second stage than when the music ready-to-win effect ends in the first stage.) ,
The ratio of execution of the related effects is higher when the suggestive effect is in the second stage than when the suggestive effect is in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the music reach effect The ratio of executing the count display effect is higher when the Music Reach effect is in the second stage than when is in the first stage)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is in the first stage, the execution ratio of the related effect is lower than when the suggestive effect is in the second stage, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

The game machine of means T3 is
A game machine of means T1,
The related effect (count display effect) is a effect of performing a predetermined action (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
By changing the visibility of the predetermined display area, it is possible to change the visibility of the related effect (as shown in FIGS. At this time, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered, and the visibility of the count display effect on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. On the other hand, when the Music Reach production is in the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position, so the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed. The visibility of the count display effect in
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the visibility of the related effects while achieving commonality of the effect information to be displayed in the predetermined display area.

The game machine of means T4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means T1 to means T3,
The related effect is a effect for updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. It matches the execution period (period from T3 to T7B) from the start of the ready-to-win effect to the end of the music ready-to-win effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the period during which the suggestive effect is being executed.

The game machine of means T5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means T1 to means T4,
The related effect (count display effect) is a effect of performing a predetermined action (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
A predetermined effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) that performs a specific action (timer subtraction) different from the predetermined action as a effect different from the related effect,
When the related effect is executed, the ratio of execution of the predetermined effect is lower than when the related effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 13-13 (E), when the count display effect is executed , the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect is lower than when the count display effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect and the execution ratio of the timer effect match, so the count display effect is executed. If it is, the execution ratio of the timer effect is lower than when the count display effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects such as a related effect and a predetermined effect as effects for performing actions, and it is possible to suppress complication of the effects while diversifying the effects.

The game machine of means T6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means T1 to means T5,
The related effect (count display effect) is a effect of performing a predetermined action (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestive effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo Continuous performance) can be executed,
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of the suggestive performance to the second stage is higher than when the special performance is not executed (when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the pseudo-continuous performance is not executed. The ratio of the second stage of the music reach production is higher than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the special effect is to be executed, thereby improving interest.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and when the display of the timer effect eventually reaches 0, the battle effect ( Disclosed is a gaming machine from which a result of super reach performance is derived. In a gaming machine such as that described in JP-A-2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of a suggestive effect (battle effect) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state is performed. There is room for interest. The inventions relating to the means U1 to U6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of related effects.

The gaming machine of means U1 is
A game machine controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (music ready-to-win effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
A related effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (count display effect) related to the execution status of the suggested effect,
As an effect different from the related effect, a predetermined effect executing means (for effect control CPU 120) and
Depending on the execution status of the suggestive effect, the ratio at which the related effect is executed differs (as shown in FIG. In the case of the second stage, the ratio of execution of the count display effect is higher),
Depending on whether or not the related effect is executed, the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (H), when the count display effect is executed, the count display The execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect is higher than when the effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect and the execution ratio of the timer effect match, so the count display effect is executed. If there is, the execution ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the count display effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by providing a relationship between the related performance and the predetermined performance.

The gaming machine of means U2 is
A gaming machine of means U1,
As the execution status of the suggestion effect (Music Reach effect), the first stage (a period of 1 to 15 seconds of the Music Reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)) and the second stage after the first stage. There are two stages (a period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds of music reach production as shown in Fig. 13-19 (4)),
When the second-stage suggestive effect is executed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the first-stage suggestive effect is executed but the second-stage suggestive effect is not executed (Fig. 13). As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the expectation of a big hit is higher when the music ready-to-win effect is executed up to the second stage than when the music ready-to-win effect ends in the first stage.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, thereby enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of means U3 is
A gaming machine of means U2,
The ratio of execution of the related effects is higher when the suggestive effect is in the second stage than when the suggestive effect is in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the music reach effect The count display effect is executed at a higher rate when the Music Reach effect is the second stage than when is the first stage.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is in the first stage, the execution ratio of the related effect is lower than when the suggestive effect is in the second stage, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means U4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means U1 to means U3,
The related effect is a effect for updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. It matches the execution period (period from T3 to T14B) from the start of the ready-to-win effect to the end of the music ready-to-win effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the period during which the suggestive effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of means U5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means U1 to means U4,
The related effect (count display effect) is a effect of performing a predetermined action (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
The predetermined effect (timer effect) is a effect in which an action different from the predetermined action is performed as the specific action (the timer effect is an effect in which timer subtraction is performed, which is different from updating the effect execution period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the entertainment.

The gaming machine of means U6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means U1 to means U5,
The related effect (count display effect) is a effect of performing a predetermined action (update of effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestive effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo Continuous performance) can be executed,
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of the suggestive performance to the second stage is higher than when the special performance is not executed (when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the pseudo-continuous performance is not executed. The ratio of the second stage of the music reach production is higher than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the special effect is to be executed, thereby improving interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in an advance notice production|presentation determination process. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is a simplified front view of a main board, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a display monitor. It is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a part of the storage area in the RAM of the main substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board. It is the figure which showed the RAM area|region corresponding to the storage area of main board|substrate RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor; (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in display contents of the display monitor; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer; It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change mode; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting confirmation mode; (1) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. It is a diagram. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of the setting suggesting effect, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to a payout control board from a game control board. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of the control command transmitted and received between the game control board and the payout control board. 3 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands; FIG. It is a sequence diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by a payout control CPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption processing which CPU for payout|payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the ball lending limitation method in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining communication between the card unit and the pachinko gaming machine; It is a timing chart showing the first ball lending limit method. It is a timing chart showing a second ball lending limit method. It is a timing chart showing a third ball lending limit method. It is a timing chart showing a fourth ball lending limit method. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of not restricting ball lending during the setting change mode; It is a timing chart showing an example of resuming the payout after the end of the setting change mode. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of forcibly terminating a payout upon transition to a setting change mode; It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a timing chart showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during a period in which the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. It is a figure which shows a warning screen when setting change operation is performed during a game. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of signals output from each output terminal; 4 is a timing chart showing output periods of a security signal and a setting change response signal; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between a set value and an output mode of a setting change response signal; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal; It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the setting value is not the normal value, (2) A diagram showing the value displayed on the display monitor when the setting value is the normal value. . FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method of restricting ball lending based on detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming ball lending after detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed; It is a timing chart showing a method of resuming ball rental without shifting to the setting change mode after the power is turned off. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method of forcibly terminating ball lending by shifting to a setting change mode after power failure; It is a timing chart showing a method of moving to the setting change mode after power off and restarting ball lending. It is a timing chart showing a method of limiting the payout of prize balls based on the detection of the open state of the frame for the gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method of restarting prize ball payout after completion of detection of the open state of the frame for gaming machine; It is a timing chart showing a method of restarting prize ball payout without shifting to the setting change mode after the power is turned off. It is a timing chart showing a method of forcibly terminating the prize ball payout by shifting to the setting change mode after the power is turned off. It is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power off and restarting prize ball payout. 4 is a timing chart showing output periods of a security signal and a setting change response signal; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing output periods of a security signal and a setting change response signal; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of pending display and active display; 10 is a flow chart showing change effect determination processing. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the holding|maintenance change pattern in 1st change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the holding|maintenance change pattern in 1st change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the holding|maintenance change pattern in 2nd change production|presentation. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production|presentation in a 1st change production|presentation and a 2nd change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production|presentation and a 2nd change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production|presentation and a 2nd change production|presentation. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production|presentation in a 1st change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding 1st change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding 1st change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production|presentation and a 2nd change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production|presentation and a 2nd change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production|presentation and a 2nd change production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a change pattern of active display; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the type of change suggesting effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode of a change-suggestion presentation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode of a change-suggestion presentation; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode of a change-suggestion presentation; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting changing flag is set when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. 13A is a front view of the logo panel driving mechanism, and FIG. 13B is a view in the direction of arrow P in FIG. 13-2(a). FIG. FIG. 13-2(a) is a view along arrow Q. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which both the first logo panel and the second logo panel are moved to positions overlapping the main liquid crystal display device in front and back when viewed from the front; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern determination table, (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the execution ratio determination table of the expectation level notice effect, and (E) is an expectation level notice FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for effects, and (F) and (G) are explanatory diagrams showing display mode change pattern determination tables for the expectation degree announcement effect; (H) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not a count-up effect is to be executed, and (I) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not a count-down effect is to be executed. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a countdown effect and a countup effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding countdown production|presentation and countup production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding countdown production|presentation and countup production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding countdown production|presentation and countup production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern determination table, (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the final stage determination table of the music reach effect, and (E) is a cut-in notice effect. (F) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio determination table of , and (F) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode determination table of cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a count display effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding count display production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a modification of the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start; FIG. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution start stage determination table for the count display effect, and (H) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio determination table for the cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the count display effect and the timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding count display production|presentation and timer production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding count display production|presentation and timer production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for active display; (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for active display; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect determination table, and (F) is an explanatory diagram showing a cut-in advance notice effect determination table; 9 is a time chart showing execution timings of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a first change suggesting effect, a second change suggesting effect, and a third change suggesting effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a 3rd change suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a rendering mode regarding the third change suggesting rendering; It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of non-probability variation (at the time of low probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of probability variation (at the time of high probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows a probability variation fall determination table. (A) An explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the case of a probability variable fall within 100 rotations after the end of the jackpot game state, and (B) an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the case of a probability variable fall after 101 rotations after the end of the jackpot game state. be. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern determination table in the high-probability-high base state (within 99 rotations), and (C) and (D) are variation patterns at the time of probability variation fall winning (within 99 rotations) It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table, (E), (F) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table in the low probability height base state (within 99 rotations), (G), (H) is the 100th rotation FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for (I) and (J) are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern determination table for the 100th rotation, and (K) and (L) are explanations showing the variation pattern determination table for the high probability high base state (after 101 rotations) It is a figure, and (M) and (N) are explanatory drawings which show the variation pattern determination table at the time of probability variable fall winning (after 101 rotations). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart showing an example of the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of the probability variable fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect in the case of falling within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect in the case of falling within 100 rotations. It is a time chart showing an example of the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of the probability variable fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect in the case of a probability variable fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect in the case of a probability variable fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a game flow in the case of falling within 100 rotations. It is a time chart showing a modification regarding the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of the probability variable fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production|presentation aspect in the case of falling within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production|presentation aspect in the case of falling within 100 rotations.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the display result is "losing". are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1(B), in the present embodiment, ready-to-win effects such as normal reach and super-to-reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is also referred to as a suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (jackpot reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach < super reach E < super reach D < super reach C < super, as represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B) The reach B is higher than the super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which confirms that it will become a big hit.

In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. Further, during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach, there is a case where a developing effect to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach is executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8-1(A) are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8-1(A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops to super reach, which is one level higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops by two levels or more is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is announced at a predetermined timing after establishment of the reach. As shown in FIG. 8-1(B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, for the super reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super reach, the title of the reach is notified only by display, and for the other super reach, the title is notified by display and sound. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices for reach with a high degree of reliability than for reach with a low degree of reliability. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation, thereby improving the performance effect. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or not depending on the reliability. Also, even in the same ready-to-win effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (linear script, square script, etc.) of title characters may be changed according to the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of an effect operation in this embodiment will be described. The following production operations are executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 . FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super ready-to-win in this embodiment. FIG. 8-2(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the "left" and "right" stop and enter the ready-to-win state. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as when the introductory part of the ready-to-reach effect (also referred to as super ready-to-win effect) ends, the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and a voice corresponding to the Reach title name (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. The succeeding part of the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach A is executed. A production in which characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if an ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

It should be noted that when the lines are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super ready-to-win effect, a sound corresponding to the lines may be output from the speaker 8 . In addition, the words are not limited to being displayed in balloons as shown in FIG.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as when the introductory portion of the super ready-to-win effect ends, the title 31AK005 of super ready-to-win B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2(F). (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the sound corresponding to the reach title name (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is displayed. be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. The succeeding part of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win B in which .

In this way, in super ready-to-win A and super ready-to-win B, the title of ready-to-win is reported when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introductory part until the title is announced, the super ready-to-win effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach will be achieved after the start of the super reach effect and which title will be announced. In super reach A and super reach B, it is not limited to making the production mode until the title is announced completely common, but at least one You may make it make the part into a common production mode. For example, in the introductory portion of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a Super Reach production (for example, a production that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified after that. can be By doing so, the performance effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the performance. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach is to be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the characters "SP reach D") are displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach from the speaker 8 (here, "Kill the enemy"). In this way, in super reach D, the title is announced at the start of the super reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the level of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2(H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation for a big hit, but it does not have to be completely consistent with the degree of reliability of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D is not to notify the title name as it is, but to notify the contents of Reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of title notification by sound is varied depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is announced in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach performance. Incidentally, FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same effect content as FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. may

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2(J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the characters "SP reach E") are displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not announced by voice. Along with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is performed. executed. In this way, in Super Ready-to-Wear E, titles are announced together with the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In super reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach effect.

In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win E with low reliability of big hit, the title is notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (Fig. 8-2 (D), (F) , (H)). By doing so, the title notification can be executed in accordance with the super ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach even in the super reach performance such as the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win with high reliability of big win, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win, the progress of the ready-to-win performance may be stopped and the title may be announced.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in super ready-to-reach A and super ready-to-reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, and in super ready-to-win D and super ready-to-e E, the super ready-to-win effect is announced. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of super reach performance, and super reach D and super reach D with low reliability of big hit are announced. In E, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low reliability of big hit, super. The title may be announced after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-win effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in super reach D and super reach E, the image display device 5 A title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen of . By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, when the hit reliability is high, title notification is performed in a wider display area than when the reliability is low, so effective title notification is possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title may be displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. In addition, the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach A and super reach B, and the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach D and super reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for title notification according to the ready-to-win effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the hit reliability is high, the title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than when the reliability is low. Further, when the display area for title notification is changed according to the ready-to-win effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display location may be changed.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the title announcement in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, super reach D with lower reliability of big hit than super reach A and super reach B is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in , the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming repetitive. In addition, in the title notification of the super reach E, which has a lower reliability of the big hit than the super reach D, the expectation suggestive display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his sense of anticipation due to the display of the expectation suggesting display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with the low reliability. At least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E may display the expectation level suggestion display.

The indication of the level of expectation is not limited to the number of black stars as shown in Fig. 8-2 (H). You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to . In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), etc., in the case of showing by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectations may be increased by enabling display of black stars equivalent to half (half). .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Also, in super reach D and super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a final effect, which will be described later, is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach performance. Further, by doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily because the effect can be improved regardless of the timing.

In addition, although the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification and expectation suggestive display according to the reliability of the big hit may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each ready-to-win performance is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (final stage of the variable display), a decision performance for informing whether or not the display result will be a ``jackpot'' is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3(B), an effect of displaying an image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3(C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3(D), A fixed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the friendly character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the ready-to-win effect, the title notification is finished before the final effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decided effect, and to perform a well-balanced title notification.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the ready-to-win production of super reach, the decoration pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display. , How to display the decorative pattern during the ready-to-win production may be arbitrary. For example, the decoration pattern may not be displayed during the ready-to-win effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of ready-to-win effect.

In addition, when displaying characters permanently displayed during pending display, active display, variable display, and display related to cellphone interlocking on the image display device 5, they are not displayed appropriately during the ready-to-win effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the ready-to-win effect. may be At that time, during low-reliability ready-to-win effects such as super ready-to-win E, these displays may remain displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the low-reliability ready-to-win effect, and to make the player pay attention to the ready-to-win effect in the highly-reliable ready-to-win effect.

(development production)
Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed when the ready-to-reach effect of super reach D is being executed (title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), the ready-to-win effect is interrupted and an effect is executed in which the screen is torn. After that, when it develops to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), the title of super reach A is announced, and the reach performance of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4(D), the title of super reach B is announced, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the development target reach title notification, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the destination reach is a reach in which title notification is performed by display and sound, the title notification is performed again by display and sound.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4(B). You may make it display. By setting it as such production|presentation, an unexpected production|presentation can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a fake development production such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion performance)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the degree of expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and the stage It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect in which an expectation level is suggested by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation suggestive display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect is executed to fit in one of the white stars of the degree suggestive display 31AK021. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, tone quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). At the stage where the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation level is contained in the expectation level indication display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted by shining as shown in FIG. 8-5(F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation level suggesting effect has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is raised one step at a time, but two black stars are displayed. One or more may be displayed so that the degree of expectation is raised by two or more levels. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the expectation level by half. In this case, different sounds or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars displayed (the number of levels of rising expectations). For example, the same sound may be output when half black stars are displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Moreover, there may be a case where the sound is not output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggesting effects are diversified, and the effects of the effects are improved. In addition, the same black star image will be displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectations that increase at once, and the black stars will increase according to the number of stages of expectations that will increase. You may make it perform the production|presentation which does.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each production mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, etc. may be different. The production mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

FIGS. 8-5(G) to (L) show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggesting effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and expectation suggesting effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F). In the special mode, the ready-to-reach performance based on the variation pattern of super ready-to-reach D is the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach D2 that is different from the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-win D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5(G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of READY is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from that in the normal mode (for example, a sound with a different tone) is output. Also, the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 in super reach D2 is not star-shaped but diamond-shaped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5(H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect is executed to fit in one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024. At this time, a sound "pong" is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the expectation suggestive display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted by shining as shown in FIG. 8-5(L). In this way, by varying the notification mode of the title according to the effect mode (state when the ready-to-win effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified and the effect is enhanced. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of Super Reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) (including suggestive effects) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the ready-to-win effect is executed), whether or not to report the title of ready-to-win, and the execution ratio of the title to be reported may be varied. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the title of ready-to-win may not be announced. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the taste of the player, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the expectation level is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level suggestion effect is executed to gradually increase the number of black stars. It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect in which the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation level suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation level suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Another example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggesting effect in which the display indicating the degree of expectation of the expectation degree suggesting display is increased in stages, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the degree of expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed all at once instead of step by step. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after completing the effect of gradually increasing black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), the image display A development effect is executed in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 . Here, when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. , Super Reach C titles are announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the development target reach title notification, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. Under the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestive display 31AK033 with three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that after the movable body 32 has moved, it is also possible to execute a development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestive display are changed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, a title advance notice for giving notice of the degree of reliability of a big hit is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach A is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. is announced, the title announcement is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red as shown in FIG. 8-7(B). Thus, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not performed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is performed. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in colors other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in colors other than black from the start of display of the title.

Further, when a title announcement is executed in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound corresponding to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Also, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance effect and the development effect, which increases the expectation of being controlled to the big hit advantage state. By doing so, once the title is announced, an effect that raises the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not the announcement effect is to be executed and the mode of effect. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not to execute a title announcement) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super ready-to-win title is determined according to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "losing", for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(A). As shown in Figure 8-9 (A), the display colors of the Super Reach titles are "black", "red", "black" to "red", and "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the reliability of the big hit increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the title. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the presentation effect will be improved.

In addition, the "fruit pattern" may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, it is sufficient that the display color changes after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-7. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. Also, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach that has a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of change timings may be provided and one of the change timings may be determined. In the case of super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than in super reach with a long title display period.

If there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. Determines the display color of the title at a rate different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by varying the manner of execution of the title announcement (display color and display color change timing) depending on the presentation mode, the presentation is diversified and the presentation effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, the advance notice of the big hit reliability is executed according to the display mode of the character's words (for example, the display color of the words, etc.) in the ready-to-win effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of super ready-to-win, the display color of the character's words in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win (whether or not to execute advance notice of the words) is decided (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is "big win" or "losing", the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect is determined, for example, by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(C). As shown in FIG. 8-9(C), the display colors of the lines in the ready-to-win effect are "white", "red", and those that change from "white" to "red". ), the reliability of the big win is high. In other words, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the words. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the words, and the production effect will be improved. As for the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Also, the reliability of the big win may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the same effect mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the dialogue notice, the reliability of the big win may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on the combination of the change timings of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big win reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big win reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

If there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, the special mode may determine the display color of the words at a rate different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that, in place of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit may be executed by a change in the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the reliability of the big win differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not super-ready-to-win (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other advance notice effects and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the decision results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect decision processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the title notice and the dialogue notice in the case of super reach. and at least one of the speech announcement may be made executable. Also, the title notice and dialogue notice are explained as being determined by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the decision ratio is arbitrary. good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of ready-to-win, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice differ in the number of executable rendering modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed). By doing so, the presentation becomes diverse and the presentation effect is enhanced. In the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the number of executable effects may be changed arbitrarily, and the number and types of executable effects may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and the player can easily grasp the reliability of the big win.

(Action production)
When the effect mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode will change may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an effect effect in which the image affects at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. After the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or lines may be changed. The effect mode of effect effect (effect effect image, etc.) may be common to both the title and the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or lines does not change even though the action effect is executed. When the action effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the effect effect, the execution timing, and the mode of effect may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, depending on the presentation mode of the action presentation, the rate at which the presentation mode of at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the action presentation) may be different. It is possible to make the ratio of the dialogue notice and the change of which production mode (the ratio of which effect is applied) different, or the ratio of what color (how many stages) the change is made to be. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title or the words will be affected when the action effect image is displayed, thereby improving the effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of production modes, whether or not to execute the action production and the production mode may be determined at different ratios according to the production modes. By doing so, it is possible to execute an action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect of the effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either the title or the dialogue is selected according to the effect content of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the action of the character, the effect content in the battle effect, etc.). may change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the contents of the ready-to-win effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5 , a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 . Although expressed as a sub-liquid crystal here, the sub-display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot-matrix LED. The sub-liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. The sub-liquid crystal executes various effects such as a notice effect and display of a pending display. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub-liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the title notification as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. In this case, after announcing the title on the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. By doing so, the title and the expectation level suggesting display can be displayed without interfering with the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation level suggesting display become easy to understand.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of the title of the ready-to-win effect as a suggestive effect has been described. may For example, as a preview effect (for example, a pre-read preview effect), when executing a pre-read zone effect that shifts to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) with different background images and effect modes on the image display device 5, the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. In the case of presenting a mission ("reach with 7", "annihilate the enemy using a stick controller", etc.) and executing a mission effect that gives the player an advantage when the mission is accomplished, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when the timing for deriving the display result comes, a decided effect is executed to notify whether or not the display result will be a "big hit", and then the display result is shown ( Figure 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and if a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super ready-to-win effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), after the image display device 5 enters the reach state, for example, as shown in FIG. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10(C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11(G) to (I), a ready-to-win effect is executed in which characters 31AK041 and 31AK042 face each other.

As shown in FIG. 8-10(C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 along with the ready-to-win effect. As a result, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example, a plurality of types of operation effect images are prepared to indicate that an operation effect is to be executed. The reliability of the big win differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect will be executed during the ready-to-win effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11(H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. Effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, an action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. It should be noted that the operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

8-11(J), the restriction line 31AK044 is erased, and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed at the center portion as shown in FIG. 8-11(K). , and a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation valid period during which the operation to the stick controller 31A is valid.

Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11(L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), the determined decorative symbols that will be the big winning combination are derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11(L) is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The reliability of the jackpot is high. Even when an operation performance image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation performance image with high reliability during ready-to-win performance, so that the performance effect is improved and the expectation of the player is increased. can be maintained.

In addition, in the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation level suggestion display are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 or in parallel with the operation effect. Decisions related to operation effects and operation effect images (whether there is an operation effect, whether to display an operation effect image, whether there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestive display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestive display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the start of the variable display. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect, after the ready-to-win effect, an effect to display a ready-to-win title indicating the development destination of the ready-to-win effect is executed. A specific image may be included and displayed when either the shutter display or the reach title display is displayed. The ready-to-win title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

A specific image is an image with a high degree of reliability of a big hit that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image as element E1, a melon image as element E2, an apple image as element E3, a watermelon image as element E4, and a strawberry image as element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Also, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Also, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit within the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter performance is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the ready-to-win title is displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. It should be noted that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as the image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the ready-to-win title effect are executed. For example, white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in order of the degree of reliability of the big hit (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display results in a big win.

When performing the shutter display and the ready-to-win title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light to notify. The common sound and light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for fruit patterns is executed. Also, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the common sound and the specific sound may be partially overlapped in their output periods.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12(a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. The shutter image 31AK061 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of decorative patterns is started as shown in FIG. 8-12(b). Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left pattern and the right pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 8-12(c), the reach state is entered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12(d), the super ready-to-win effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as a reach title display. The ready-to-win title image 31AK062 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Also, in the ready-to-win title image 31AK062, characters of "battle ready-to-win" are displayed to indicate that a ready-to-win effect accompanied by a battle effect is to be executed.

Further, when the ready-to-win title effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. Furthermore, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "Hot", which indicates that the reliability of the big win is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestive display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in the ready-to-win title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the common sound and the specific sound have been explained in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, a battle ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-12(e). An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" are displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production ends, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number patterns. As shown in FIG. 8-12(f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12(a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 forming the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the ready-to-win title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high degree of reliability for big wins has been displayed.

Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d). Therefore, attention can be paid to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination of the shutter effect (whether or not to use the shutter effect and the mode of effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8. In that case, the shutter performance may be determined based on the determination result of the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be executed more easily. Further, the determination relating to the ready-to-win title effect may also be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination relating to the shutter effect.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 9-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting switch 22A and a second starting switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various parts are connected, and the effect control board 12 is connected to various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R and game effect lamps 9, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting random numbers used in the special game, a function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a control board on the sub side consisting of the effect control board 12 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various types of information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, thereby performing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. and control the variable display of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 20 to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 20 It also has control functions.

In addition, the main board 11, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, the display monitor 21TM029 , It also has a function to display various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as various signals such as a power off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5(A). 11, a display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower central portion of the back surface of the main board 11. FIG. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entering area" The number of game balls entered into the game ball is counted, and various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, setting values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. When the power supply switch 21TM055 is operated by a game hall clerk or the like in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, predetermined of operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It is possible to operate only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if force is not applied by the staff of the game arcade or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game arcade clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent it from getting lost.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a mechanism for discharging the game balls that have entered the respective winning openings and the game balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (ejection port) is provided, and an ejection port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball ejected from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above, as shown in FIG.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as payout control board 21TM037 and ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer containing at least a RAM. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, and an I/O port constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is implemented by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Also, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full-tank switch 21TM048 and the payout count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main substrate 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and a game machine frame opening sensor that can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the door frame 3a is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the game machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light-emitting element (LED) and a light-receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect jamming of game balls, that is, so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates that the ball is out, and the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full. , the ball delivery process is stopped.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a low level signal to the ball launching board 21TM090 to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. Output a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full tank signal from the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094 A signal serving to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. For confirmation, signals (prize request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prizing ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals through the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and payout control microcomputer 21TM370. , when receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (receiving ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data between For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing the predetermined bits of the prize ball request signal, A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with this setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100 . In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball rental, full tank, or ball out error) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 . Incidentally, specific signal exchanges by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail in FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 9-36.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a lent ball number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal boards (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board) via the output port 21TM372b. and) output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted in FIG. 9B.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 of the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/lighting-out is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. The input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 receives a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ready-to-use display lamp, a connecting stand direction display, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . A card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendable display signal are supplied from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. A connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operating signal ( PRDY signal) is sent and received via input port 21TM372f and output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and upon detecting the trailing edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to deliver a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIGS. 9-4A to 9-4F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display , the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" It is designed to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a big win (big win A to big win F) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Provided separately, the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. good too.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

Here, the display of the total number of game balls, the ratio of the role items, etc. on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, there is information about the winning of the game, for example, the number of winning balls in the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the big winning opening. The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls to (attacker) are input, and the number of shot balls is totaled. Consecutive ratio (%), which is the percentage of total number of prize balls, the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second start prize gate (denchu) and the number of prize balls from the big prize gate (attacker). A certain role ratio (%) and a base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls described below) to the total number of prize balls (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls won in the second start prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls won in the big prize mouth (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (number of winning balls below) is the ratio occupied by The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls won in the big prize hole (attacker), the number of prize balls won in the second start prize hole (electric chew), and the number of prize balls won in the big prize hole. (attacker) and the number of winning balls by winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (electric chew). In addition, the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball changes due to the change in the passable width of the game ball. be. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. , and the assumed winning ratio of game balls is a fixed accessory.

As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, regarding the consecutive ratio and the role ratio, the prize balls by winning the first start prize hole (navel) and the general prize hole (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls number (general number of prize balls), the number of prize balls for the second start prize mouth (electric chew), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric prize balls), and the number of prizes for the big prize mouth (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is counted. The total is regarded as one set, and the consecutive ratio (%) and role ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric The number of prize balls (attacker's prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, which has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored, and the cumulative consecutive ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls hit with respect to the number of 60,000 prize balls is counted. The tally is regarded as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls hit is calculated.

The display monitor 21TM029 displays the consecutive ratio (%), the role ratio (%) for 6,000, the cumulative consecutive ratio (%), the role ratio (%), and the base calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60,000 winning balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display everything, but as the game progresses, the number of winning balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the number of winning balls to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) The number of prize balls due to the prize winning and the number of prize balls due to the prize winning to the big prize opening (attacker) are changed. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after 6000 consecutive ratios (%) are displayed is reflected in the 60000 consecutive ratios (%) displayed after that, 6000 consecutive ratios (%) will be displayed. There is a risk that a discrepancy will occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls for winning the first start prize opening (navel), the number of prize balls for winning the second start prize opening (electric chew), the number of prize balls for winning the big prize opening (attacker), the prize balls Such discrepancies can be prevented by inputting the total number and performing totalization at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, timing for displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces).

In this embodiment, the storage area for storing the information about the winning of the game is provided for each set value. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set values. Therefore, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base in this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning the second start prize opening (denchu) and the number of prize balls due to winning the big prize opening (attacker) are as follows. A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of obtained balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total accumulated number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, the number of winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of game media by the attacker and the electric chew. Also, the number of consecutive accessory winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning game media to the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit into the pachinko game machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be calculated by the following formula (1). Also, the role ratio can be obtained by the following formula (2). Also, the base can be obtained by the following formula (3).

Consecutive ratio = [number of balls acquired in succession / total number acquired] x 100 (1)

Role ratio = [(number of balls acquired in a row + number of balls acquired in a row) / total number acquired] x 100 (2)

Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hit] x 100 (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the role ratio is obtained by dividing 42,000 by 60,000 to obtain 0.70 (rounded down to three decimal places). However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, the following method of calculation is required.

First, the first calculation method will be explained. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4,200,000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60000. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain the operation result up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, to obtain the operation result up to three digits below the decimal point, it is necessary to multiply by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be explained. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. In other words, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, division by 1000 is sufficient to obtain a calculation result up to three digits below the decimal point.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the role product ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in a 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can only perform calculations between maximum 2-byte values. Therefore, the lower 1 byte may be truncated for ease of calculation.

A third calculation method, which is a simplified version of the second calculation method, will now be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1, 60h of the lower 1 byte is discarded from the total number of prize balls 00EA60h, and the total number of prize balls is reduced to 00EAh. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is truncated from 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). 156 is then divided by 2 to obtain 78 as the quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the role product ratio is obtained as 78%.

In the third calculation method, calculations by the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 are facilitated, but an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are 10 times. In other words, the longer the period for calculating the character ratio, the smaller the error, and the closer to the original value.

Further, the board case 21TM201 is made of a translucent material so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 21TM201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted, and a heat radiation hole for releasing heat from the electrical components of the main substrate 11. FIG. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not obstructed by the heat dissipation holes. Here, the term “right in front” means a straight front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who is trying to visually recognize the main board 11 .
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can only perform calculations between maximum 2-byte values. Therefore, the lower 1 byte may be truncated for ease of calculation.

A third calculation method, which is a simplified version of the second calculation method, will now be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1, 60h of the lower 1 byte is discarded from the total number of prize balls 00EA60h, and the total number of prize balls is reduced to 00EAh. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is truncated from 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). 156 is then divided by 2 to obtain 78 as the quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the role product ratio is obtained as 78%.

In addition, a storage area for storing information on game wins (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total of information on game wins stored in 10 ring buffers with maximum 2-byte counters), prize balls The total number buffer) may continue to be stored without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further explained later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the memory area that stores information about the winning of the game, such as when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive winning balls is greater than the number of winning balls processing may be performed. Also, the error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while performing the error display or warning display or after performing the initialization process. Error display and warning display will be further described later.

Assuming that the total number of winning balls is 34,321 and the number of winning balls is 19,876, the role ratio (%) is calculated by dividing 19,876 by 34,321 as a divisor. 19876/34321=0.57912 . When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations with decimal points must be avoided, so the following formulas are substituted. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is discarded, resulting in 19876/343=57.9475. Since the decimal point is rounded down, a role ratio (%) of 57% is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. There will be no

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 for values other than the most significant bit), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, which is an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by truncating the decimal point, for example, if the correct value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is 1 at 69% → 70%. Although it is conceivable that an error of 1% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the consecutive ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even on the display of 1% error.

Also, when using the above calculation method, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so if the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Furthermore, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1% and may become even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, the role ratio (%) and consecutive ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls above a certain number (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is totaled by the counter. Alternatively, the fact that the error may be large even if it is displayed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

The display monitor 21TM029 displays the role ratio (%), the consecutive ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). displayed. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker. %), there is a risk that the value of the role ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive role (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are displayed sequentially.

Also, if the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, if two 7 segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100%. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5(A) can display numeric values in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numeric values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

In this embodiment, the sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electronic chew detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, the number of prize balls for each is individually counted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but uses a sensor provided after the ejection path for ejecting the winning game media of the attacker and the winning game media of the electric chew merges, and the detection result is used. Based on this, the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive winning balls may be totaled.

Display of the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base will be described in more detail below. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12 are also provided.

The RAM 102 on the main substrate 11 stores a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth A general winning number counter and a big winning number counter are provided. In this embodiment, the number of prizes won in the big prize gate (attacker) is counted by the number of big prizes counter, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first big prizes are counted. A first big prize winning number counter for tallying the number of prizes to be won to the mouth and a second big prize number counter to tally the number of prizes to the second big winning mouth are separately provided, and the number of prizes to the first big winning mouth is provided. and the number of prizes won to the second big prize hole may be tallied individually, and these respective numbers of prizes won may be totaled to be the number of prizes won by the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21 . The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to fourth general winning opening switch. The big winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 .

A clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply substrate shown in FIG. 9-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, data used for consecutive ratios and role ratios stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is 21TM052, a switch that is operated when there is no choice but to redo the calculation of the consecutive ratios and role ratios, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the consecutive ratios and role ratios. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when data is being collected for performing normal continuous ratio and role ratio calculations. Further, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the current time can be detected by the RTC 106. FIG. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, etc. by performing initial settings, and in this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the operating hours of the game arcade.

The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A). A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pin 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and tampering with the main board 11 is prevented. The board case 21TM201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter also referred to as "crimped board case").

Also, the display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11 . A seal 21TM011S is attached to the board case 21TM201 to prove that the main board 11 is enclosed. The sealing seal 21TM011S is pasted over, for example, the detachable portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is arranged at a position away from the main substrate 11, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029, which is different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed. Thus, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal 21TM011S.

The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display section 21TM029A, a second display section 21TM029B, a third display section 21TM029C, a fourth display section 21TM029D and a fifth display section 21TM029E. Each of the first display portion 21TM029A to the fifth display portion 21TM029E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 21TM029A to fifth display section 21TM029E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, it is possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

The display monitor 21TM029 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5(B). The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit displays the totalized setting values (1 to 6) and a RAM clearing notification (“C”) indicating that the RAM clearing executed by the CPU 103 after the processing in the setting change mode has been completed. ) is displayed, the aggregation period is displayed in the second display portion 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display portion 21TM029C of the third digit, and the fourth display portion 21TM029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion of the fifth digit are displayed. 21TM029E shows numerical values as percentages. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. be done.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big prize opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls entering the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls entering the large prize opening during the big win game state to the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B and the third display portion 21TM029C. "y7." is displayed on the display section 21TM029B and the third display section 21TM029C. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." "A7." is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B and the third display portion 21TM029C. Further, when the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E, and the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (percentage display) on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B and third display section 21TM029C. "B6." is displayed on 21TM029B and the third display portion 21TM029C. Further, when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E.

The main board 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the big winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio and the base. The number of game balls entered and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 operates the gate switch 21, the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general prize winning port switches and the discharge port switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal).

In this switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When detection signals are output from the second general winning port switch, the third general winning port switch, and the fourth general winning port switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number counter By adding the value of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter, and when a detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 21TM070, the value of the hitting number counter is added, thereby allowing the game ball to enter each entry area. The number (the number of winning game balls into each winning hole) is counted. Note that the values of each counter are stored in the RAM 102 .

In this way, the step for tallying the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together with a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). By including it in the switch processing), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be tallied without executing a separate tallying program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of programs to be executed. It has become.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls into each winning hole based on the tallied number of winning balls into each winning hole, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning hole. Let The number of winning game balls is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one winning to a winning opening by the number of winning times to the winning opening. The number of winning game balls is determined in advance for each winning opening.

As shown in Figure 9-6, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is as shown in Figure 9-6. ), 1st start prize mouth prize ball (prize ball for winning the 1st start prize mouth (navel)), normal electric prize ball (prize ball for winning electric chew), special electric prize ball (to attacker It is the number of prize balls for winning prizes). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In addition, the CPU 103 individually counts the number of game balls winning the general winning opening and the number of game balls winning the first start winning opening. The number of winning game balls into the winning opening may be totaled together. In addition, although the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately, the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately. The number of prize balls and the number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer has 10 first to tenth storage areas each consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). In addition, the active buffer has a 0th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning hole, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin.

In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with storage areas for the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, the sum of the number of hits, and the total cumulative total for each winning hole. there is The 10 sets of total sum and total cumulative storage area consist of a maximum 3-byte counter. I can remember.

In addition, the RAM 102 has a continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and total cumulative ratios and consecutive ratios, a base (base 2) for 10 sets, and a base (base 1) for the previous 10 sets. and a base storage area for storing the The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role ratio and the consecutive ratio for the 10 sets and the total cumulative number of winning balls based on the winning number of the game balls into each winning opening for the 10 sets and the total cumulative total. and stored in a continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and continuous ratio. The continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the 10 sets and the cumulative total ratio and continuous ratio is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. If the role ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total total are stored as integers, for example, a maximum 1-byte counter can be stored with a margin.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates a base for 10 sets based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of game balls into each winning opening for 10 sets, and calculates the base for the 10 sets (base 2) and the previous game. A base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits of game balls into each winning hole for 10 sets (base 1) is stored in the base storage area. If base 1 and base 2 are stored as integers, for example, a maximum 1-byte counter can be stored with a margin.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 will be explained. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number in this embodiment). 0000H to 2FBFH and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area to read data from the ROM 101 . In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area starts from 0000H.

The address/data signal lines of the built-in registers are assigned to register areas (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) in the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in registers and transfers them to the registers via this register area. data is written.

The address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or transfer data to the RAM 102. Write data. Other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are unused areas.

In addition, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, the 16 Kbyte area from 0000H to 2FFFH) consists of a RAM control area, unused area, RAM data area and other areas, as shown in FIG. consists of In a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to this RAM control area, instruction data (opcodes) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the control program is stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

Data used to display the consecutive ratio and the role ratio are temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of winning balls for each winning hole and a storage area for the total cumulative consecutive ratio role ratio. In addition, the storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas include an active buffer with a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer with a 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). minutes), and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data with different start addresses of subroutines.

In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the RAM area. , management data) is data of a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), it is divided into 1-byte storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of continuous addresses in the RAM control area and stored. are doing.

Further, the main substrate 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Here, the main substrate 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9(A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the character ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed first. The short-term continuous ratio display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed in the first display section 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed in the second display section 21TM029B. is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 21TM029C. Short-term continuous ratios are displayed on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed in the first display section 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed in the second display section 21TM029B. is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display portion 21TM029C. Short-term role ratios are displayed on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display section 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display section 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. Display No. 3 of the total cumulative ratio is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative consecutive ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display portion 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the display No. 4 total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and the characters "7." are displayed on the third display portion 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative role ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. A character is displayed, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display portion 21TM029C. Also, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. A character is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 21TM029C. In addition, in the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E,
Base 2 calculated based on 60,000 prize balls immediately before is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 2 to the base 2 of display No. 5 are red. In this manner, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 every 5 seconds.

Furthermore, the display of these short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 is shown in FIGS. Based on the operation of , when the set value is "1", the short-term success ratio, short-term success ratio, total cumulative success ratio, total cumulative success ratio, base 1, base 2 are displayed, and when the setting value is "2", Short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 display, short-term consecutive ratio when the setting value is "3", short-term consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio It is possible to sequentially change the display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2. It should be noted that if the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the second The numerical value displayed in the first display portion 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, and the total cumulative winnings displayed in the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "2".

Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the second The numerical value displayed in the first display portion 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning combination displayed in the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "3".

Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the second The numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A is updated to "4", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "4".

Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is "4", the second The numerical value displayed on the 1st display portion 21TM029A is updated to "5", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winnings ratio, total cumulative winnings ratio, and total cumulative winnings displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "5".

Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, base 2 are displayed when the set value is "5", the second The numerical value displayed in the first display portion 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed in the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "6".

Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is "6", the second The numerical value displayed in the first display portion 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed in the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "1".

The display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form capable of displaying the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 In , it may be possible to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base.

Further, in this embodiment, the consecutive ratio, the role ratio and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and these consecutive ratios, the role ratio and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. .

In this embodiment, only the short-term consecutive ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed in green. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the role ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th memory area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the memory in the 0th memory area to the 10th memory area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage area for the total sum and the total total for 10 sets, and the storage area for the continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the role ratios and continuous ratios for the 10 sets and the total total are updated.

Updates in the active buffer and ring buffer move the number stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Also, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the number of general prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87". Suppose that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is changed to "27", "81", and " 120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0" and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the number of prize balls stored may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process which is a process for confirming whether or not the content of the program is valid, and then executes the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Then, wait until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

Then, CPU 103 initializes built-in devices (such as initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050). The accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 receives the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input via the input port. ) is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

When the ON state is detected in checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. control the processing state to the configuration change mode.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change support signal and a security signal (step S21TM1130). As a result, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change response signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that it is controlled in a mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to identifiably notify the game machine (for example, machine number) that is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting change mode command which designates having been controlled by setting change mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays them on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, it waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, every time a setting change operation is received, the displayed setting value is incremented by 1, and after reaching 6, display control is executed to return it to 1.

When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, by overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed setting value, the setting value is determined. Then, the determined setting value (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

In step S21TM1160, if the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF without operating the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (without a YES determination in step S21TM1160), is determined), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match. The settings stored in the area are not changed.

When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS. 9-13 to be described later.

When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed in step S21TM1120 described above, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 sets the setting value so that it can be confirmed. Go to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change response signal and a security signal (step S21TM1210). As a result, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change support signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that it is controlled in mode or setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to identifiably notify the game machine (for example, machine number) that is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command which designates having been controlled by setting confirmation mode as a production|presentation control command with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays them on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned OFF (step S21TM1240).

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 executes the operation shown in FIG. 13 of step S21TM1320 to determine whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed.

If it is determined in step S21TM1110 that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103, as shown in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of (the setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

When confirming the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executed the power failure detection process (see FIG. 9-14). is determined based on whether check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

In this example, the processing of step S21TM1320 is executed in the following cases: (1) when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF; (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on; There is a case where the setting confirmation mode is entered based on what happened, and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

If backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated by the same process as the power failure detection process and stored. If the power supply is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) will be normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped. determined and proceeds to step S21TM1410).

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs game state recovery processing (processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply was stopped. Specifically, the head address of the setting table for backup stored in ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the setting table for backup are sequentially set in the work area (area in RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is executed. (step S21TM1350). The working area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set in the backup time setting table. By the processing in steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, storage retention, regulation member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output These include an area (output port buffer) where the output state of the port is stored, and a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set. A set value storage area (an area in which fixed set values are stored) is also included in the portion that should not be initialized. Also included in the area that should not be initialized is an area in which total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases are stored for each set value.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM1370). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command (restoration command), it recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example, are restored from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply was stopped. It is possible to notify that Next, the CPU 103 executes setting command transmission processing in step S21TM1470.

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON at step S21TM1310 (step S21TM1310; YES), or if backup data is not stored at step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), then at step S21TM1330 If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), initialization processing is executed (step S21TM1410).

In this example, the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is performed as a case where (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is executed; is OFF, and on the condition that either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 is determined as NO, the initialization of step S21TM1410 is performed immediately without transitioning to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the process is executed, and (3) when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the mode ends, and (4) when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed under the condition that the confirmation mode is entered and that either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 determines NO after the setting confirmation mode ends.

In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs RAM clearing (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) is cleared, and the initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining per normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized to In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is. Also, the head address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 is set in the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the table set at initialization are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

In addition, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for judging a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, a special symbol process flag, etc., for selectively performing processing according to the control state. An initial value is set for the flag.

In this embodiment, the configuration is exemplified in which the transition to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is performed under the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, under the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300), the setting change mode; It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 can notify that the game state and the like have been initialized. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes setting command transmission processing in step S21TM1470.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value.

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not to be a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit. Random number update processing is processing for updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number for A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as a performance display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself). processing, or processing of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the normal per symbol determination random number is one cycle (normal per symbol determination random number After stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum possible values, an initial value is set in the counter.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the setting change mode is set, the CPU 103 sends the setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then the initialization command at power-on. (Step S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (Step S21TM1470). Further, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits the backup command at power failure restoration or the initialization command at power on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can identify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by a performance device such as the lamp 9 or the like. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R , the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow charts of FIGS. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power failure detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on the condition that a game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), by executing a predetermined switch process, the switch The states of the detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 are determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and the game is stopped as a result.

For example, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). Magnetism at a level to be determined is detected, vibration at a level determined to be abnormal by a vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and a level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by a radio wave sensor (not shown) Based on the fact that radio waves are detected, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A , 2nd start switch 22B, count switch 23, 1st general winning opening switch to 4th general winning opening switch, when there is an input of a detection signal, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 performs winning information processing (step S21TM1640) for calculating winning information such as role ratio, consecutive ratio, base, etc., and displays the winning information such as role ratio, consecutive ratio, base, etc. calculated by the winning information processing. 21TM029 performs winning information display control processing (step S21TM1650). After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. It should be noted that, in step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by various sensors described in the explanation of step S1615, and when an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set, and the step in the next timer interrupt In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (the switch process may not be executed). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, is output. (Step S21TM1670).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting section is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are performed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B, set the opening and closing operation of the big winning hole in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S21TM1700). CPU103, by executing the normal symbol process processing, controls the display operation of the normal symbol display device 20 (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED), the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B Allows setting of tilting operation of one piece, etc.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control boards such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the performance control command to the control board 12, predetermined control data is set to the output port of the performance control INT signal, and the performance control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, by turning it off, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt permission state.

In addition, in the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is completed. By including the information of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the existing command such as , and transmitting it, the effect control board 12 may be periodically notified of the setting value. Furthermore, the production control board 12 (the production control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11, and executes the production suggesting the set value at various timings such as during variable display and during the jackpot game. may

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is set. This is because, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, the random number for judging a big hit extracted at the time of starting winning before changing the setting is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before change, but it is judged to be a failure in relation to the setting value after change. , Conversely, an event may occur in which a win is determined in relation to the set value before change, but is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the start winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process processing is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the reserved memory (special design reserved memory, ordinary design reserved memory) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the reserved memory number is set to the initial value (0). there is

In addition, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interrupt permission of step S21TM1540 not being performed, the switch processing (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed, and the start winning and Passing through the gate is disabled. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like are not yet executed during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, and the random number is not updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the random number will be the same regardless of the timing of the start winning, and the game will be played based on such a random number. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the starting prize and gate passage are invalidated.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and RAM clearing (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15(A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15(B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the store clerk or the like of the amusement center operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) 21TM052 is operated and the power is turned on (Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value is "1") is displayed (step S21TM1150).

In this state in which the setting values are displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, as shown in FIG. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed from 1→2→3→ The display is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→ . . . Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value "1") itself is not changed. When the lock switch 21TM051, which will be described later, is turned OFF, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (set value "1" in this example) is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A. is changed (overwritten) to the numerical value (in this example, the setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15(D), the CPU 103 detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned OFF by a store clerk or the like (YES in step S21TM1180). The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed to the numerical value displayed in the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ), and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “2”) is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display section 21TM029A to inform the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade that the new setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF once, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area is The stored setting value "2") and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the setting value "2" in this example) are not changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display portion 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is determined, there is a risk that the user may misunderstand that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in this embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A is not changed.

Then, the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) is ended, and the CPU 103 executes RAM clear processing (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state at the time of power failure stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) is cleared, and the initial value is set, the game state is initialized, but the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed from before the RAM clear processing. Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the store clerk of the game arcade that the RAM clearing process has been executed (RAM clearing notification). (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade knows that the setting change mode has ended (the set values have been finalized) and the initialization process has been executed. By executing the processing from step S21TM1430 onwards, a game becomes possible, that is, a state where variation display results, jackpot types, lotteries for determination of variation patterns, payout of prize balls, etc. can be performed.

Incidentally, in the setting change mode of this embodiment, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are exemplified. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode may be the most advantageous setting value for the player ("6" in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

In addition, upon completion of the setting change mode, the CPU 103 displays the continuous ratio and role corresponding to the determined setting values (the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029 after informing the RAM clear. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. Also, for each setting value, the total values such as the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base corresponding to each setting value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the setting values).

When the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned OFF while the setting change mode is being controlled, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned OFF, the set value of the RAM 102 will be changed. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16(A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is turned on. 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16B, under the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF. (N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value (in this example, set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1230).

Note that unlike when the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the first display section The numerical value displayed in 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value "1" stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like while the control is in the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, Then, if the setting value "1" stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, there is a risk that the user may misunderstand that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the setting confirmation mode is set, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value "1" stored in the information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed.

When the CPU 103 detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned OFF by the store clerk or the like (YES in step S21TM1240), the CPU 103 terminates the setting confirmation mode. By executing the processing from step S21TM1320 onwards, a state in which the game can be played, that is, a state in which the variation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determination of the variation pattern, and the payout of prize balls can be performed. That is, when executing the setting confirmation mode process, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to RAM clearing, except when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information The set value "1" stored in the temporary storage area) and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (set value "1" in this example) are not changed.

As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is established, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) is turned on. ) 21TM052 is in the OFF state, when the condition for controlling to the setting confirmation mode is established, the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

In order to change or display the setting value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the store clerk or the like at the game hall turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. In order to shift to the mode, an operation for executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. do not operate. In this manner, the game arcade clerk or the like can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode the game machine is to be controlled in (or whether to be controlled in either mode) when the power is turned on, and the initialization process can be performed. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute it.

In addition, in this embodiment, initialization processing is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clearing is not executed except when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). For this reason, when a game arcade clerk or the like wants to check the setting values while the player is playing a game, the game state is not changed even if the power is turned off once and then the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the game arcade side, it is possible to check the setting value without any trouble by using the setting check mode.

In addition, upon completion of the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 displays the continuous ratio, role ratio, base, etc. corresponding to the displayed setting values (the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029. may be displayed. Also, for each setting value, the total values such as the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base corresponding to each setting value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the setting values).

9-17, when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the setting change mode and This shows an example of notifying that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. FIG. 9-17(1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode is controlled, and FIG. 9-17(2) is an image display when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown respectively.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1) (B), based on having received the setting change mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1140 in the main process, for effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has transitioned to the setting change mode, and notify that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "Settings are being changed", and outputs a sound (for example, "Settings are being changed") from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has changed to the setting change mode, and the game is played. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white flashing mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko game machine 1 can notify that the mode is changed to the setting change mode. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it is controlled by the mode. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect symbols, small symbols, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 are not displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, if the VDP (Video Display Processor) is not in a state where the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, the display control unit 123 When the image display device 5 is not controllable), until the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound notifying that the setting change mode has been entered (for example, a sound "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking white). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters "setting change in progress".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1) (C), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 at step S21TM1470 in the main process (or at step S21TM1460 the CPU 103 Based on the reception of the initialization command at the time of power-on transmitted from to the production control board 12), the production control CPU 120 specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting change mode, It is possible to notify that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "setting change finished", and the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R notifying that the mode has changed to the setting change mode (for example, the voice "setting change is in progress"). The end of the setting change mode is notified by stopping the output and stopping the game effect lamp 9 from emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode). According to such a configuration, the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko game machine 1 can notify that the setting change mode has ended. It becomes possible to clearly grasp the end.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and the game becomes ready (the timer interrupt processing for game control is executed). Execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen, and the effect control CPU 120 having received this displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (2), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2) (B), based on having received the setting confirmation mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1220 in the main process, for effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and notify that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "setting check in progress", outputs a voice (for example, "setting check in progress") from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the setting check mode has been entered, and the game is played. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko game machine 1 can notify that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it is controlled by the mode. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbols, small symbols, fourth symbols, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 are not displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, if the VDP (Video Display Processor) is not in a state where the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, the display control unit 123 When the image display device 5 is not controllable), until the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode (for example, the sound "The setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking white). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters "Confirming setting".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2) (C), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or step S21TM1370 or step Based on the reception of the backup command at the time of power failure recovery or the initialization command at the time of power on transmitted from the CPU 103 to the performance control board 12 at S21TM1460), the performance control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has been terminated and notify the fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "setting confirmation finished", and the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R notifying that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode (for example, the voice "setting confirmation is in progress"). By stopping the output and stopping the game effect lamp 9 from emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode), the end of the setting confirmation mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the setting confirmation mode is terminated. It becomes possible to clearly grasp the end.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, indicating that the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is executed). Execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen, and the effect control CPU 120 having received this displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends according to the specified set value. FIGS. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Fig. 9-18 (1) is an example in which a "sunny" mode ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and Fig. 9-18 (2) is an example in which a "cloudy" mode ending screen is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-18(3) shows an example in which an ending image of "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Also, FIG. 9-18(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting values specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command specifying a setting value to the effect control CPU 120 in step S21TM1470 of the main processing. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120 when the jackpot game state is ended. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting commands in the RAM 102 . For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state is over, the image display device 5 is stored together with characters (“BONUS end” characters) for notifying that the jackpot game state is over. It is possible to display the ending image in the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

The table shown in FIG. 9-18(4) shows the cases where the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when determining the mode of setting suggestion effect to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), when determining to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 18 (3) is assigned a determination value for determining the "rain" mode.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the production (ending production), and at a medium rate (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion production (ending production) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2), and the medium (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, the effect control CPU120, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", at a low rate (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) Determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high percentage (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by varying the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends. I would expect it to be done.

Next, the prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, the payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

9-19 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts game control processing), and the main board 11 for the payout control board 21TM037. is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that the has risen. Also, the connection confirmation signal indicates that prize ball payout is possible. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I/O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and via the input circuit 21TM373A and the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 payout control. input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line. The connection confirmation signal becomes ready to be output when the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of output port 0 is set to an initial value by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when power is turned on (specifically, is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

As described above, the winning ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (8-digit binary data), and output as a control command indicating a predetermined content according to the content of the set 8-bit data. be done.

The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to confirm whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. Control command to be sent. The data content of the connection confirmation command is "A0(H)", that is, "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of The data content of the connection OK command is "8x(H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error (abnormal state in which the prize ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending and payout operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the 1st bit "x" is set to "1". Also, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the second bit. Further, when a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the third bit. Also, when a door open error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, during the confirmation of the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls to be paid out, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of winning. . The content of the data of the number-of-balls command is "5x(H)", that is, "0101xxxx". In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B, three prize balls are dispensed, and the game ball is detected by the winner switch corresponding to the general winner 10. When detected, 10 prize balls are put out, and when game balls are detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are put out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, a prize ball number command "01010011" for notifying the number of prize balls of 3 is transmitted to the general prize winning port 10. When game balls are detected by the corresponding winning hole switch, a prize ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of prize balls of 10 is transmitted, and when game balls are detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls is sent. A prize ball number command "01011110" for notifying 14 is transmitted. Either the connection confirmation command or the number-of-balls command is transmitted as the prize-ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fulfillment of the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning, etc.). In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits while the upper 4 bits are common. You may do so.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is sent only once when the prize ball operation is finished, so even if the error information is not sent at that timing, data indicating the error information is set in the next connection OK command and sent. because it is possible to Data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not ended. It is a control command to be sent based on the action. The data content of the connection OK command is "8x(H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the first bit. Also, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the second bit. Further, when a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the third bit. Also, when a door open error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during execution of the prize ball motion and the prize ball motion has not ended. It is also possible to notify the game control microcomputer 100 of the content of the error. Like the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits (predetermined bits are changed) according to the error state. In addition, the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command are configured such that any one of the commands is transmitted as the reception ACK signal. In addition, the prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state in which an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state in which the prize ball operation is being executed.

In addition, the prize ball preparation command is sent instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is sent based on the state where the prize ball operation cannot be performed due to an error. be.

9-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signals shown in FIG. 9-19 and the control commands shown in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. In addition, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. be. Of the control commands, the connection OK command, prize ball end command, and prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit built in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505. Note that FIG. 9-21 shows two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) as signal lines for serial communication. However, actually, the ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received through one signal line.

Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal consists of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the reception ACK signal consists of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 is connected to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 through the serial communication circuit 21TM505 in order to confirm whether or not the signal line is disconnected. , a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it transmits the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flow chart showing the main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Also, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the counter for the number of undistributed prize balls (step S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the internal device register setting processing of step S21TM1840 and the processing of step S21TM1850, register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for enabling interrupt generation, and interrupt vector setting are performed. register setting is performed. Then, an interrupt by that channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

The interrupt vector set in the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interrupt process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal relating to payout of prize balls from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request) may include a process to perform.) is executed.

In this embodiment, the interrupt mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, interrupt processing based on the built-in CTC count-up can be used. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU counts down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. .

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs RAM clear processing (step S21TM1880). Also, initial values are set to flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the counter for the number of unpaid prize balls to the counter for the number of unpaid prize balls.

Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes serial communication circuit setting processing for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make settings for

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing to be executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing according to the same processing as the priority initialization processing performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 .

Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupts periodically (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. Since interrupts are prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initialization process, interrupts are permitted before the initialization process is finished (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate timer interrupts. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following processing as payout control processing. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs input determination processing (step S21TM2010). The input determination process detects the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, and reflects the detection results in a predetermined byte of RAM (called an input state flag). be. In the payout control process, when performing control based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked, but the input state Check flag status.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 should be driven, the process for outputting the payout motor φ1 to φ4 patterns to the output port 0 is performed.

In addition, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes prepaid card unit control processing for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing control to pay out the balls in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and to perform control to pay out the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls command from the main board. is executed (step S21TM2040).

Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Also, information output processing for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information to be output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, according to the result of the error processing, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374, and display control processing for lighting the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the dead ball LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

In this embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, bulb out error, prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in error processing to be described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, based on the fact that the error bit is set, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374. Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for lighting the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out in the display control process. Also, when the prize ball payout is completed, control is performed to turn off the prize ball LED 21TM053.

In addition, in this embodiment, RAM areas (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port are provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output ports (step S760: output processing). Output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). and updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of transmitting and receiving various commands by the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to receive the prize ball number command shown in FIGS. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. Further, when receiving the prize ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to transmit the prize ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal.

In addition, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while it is in the interrupt enabled state, and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, it executes the receiving interrupt process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the reception data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interruption flag in the reception interruption process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read reception data is the winning ball number command in the reception interrupt process. Further, when the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process to be described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is the number of prize balls command based on the fact that the interrupt flag is set at the time of reception, and the number of prize balls is determined. It becomes unnecessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

FIG. 9-25 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), payout motor 21TM289, and card unit 21TM050 for ball lending. 2 is a block diagram for explaining communication processing of the; FIG. Here, as will be described later, there are the following first ball lending restriction method to fourth ball lending restriction method as methods for restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289.

First, (1) the first ball lending limit method, during the period when it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) payout control board 21TM037 (payout control micro This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). In addition, (2) the second ball lending restriction method, PRDY to the card unit 21TM050 from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 equipped with the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The period is a method of stopping the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289. In addition, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method, during the period when it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 This is a method of stopping signal output.

The transition to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the game machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that the appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in such a situation, in the following embodiments, the lending of balls is restricted in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Hereinafter, these first ball lending limit method to fourth ball lending limit method will be specifically described.

FIG. 9-26 is a timing chart for explaining communication among the main board 11 of the game machine, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. When power supply to the game machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned ON by the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When the power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as the connection signal.

When the card unit 21TM050 accepts the card and operates the ball lending switch to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both ON, and the card unit 21TM050 When the fall (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 causes the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 to fall. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending limit method in setting change mode)
There are the above-described first ball lending limit method to fourth ball lending limit method as methods for restricting ball lending during the period controlled in the setting change mode. First, the first ball lending limit method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-27.

9-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout 21 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. FIG. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIGS. The connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF while the mode or setting confirmation mode processing is being executed.

While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF, so the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON but turns it OFF even when the VL signal is ON, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and keeps it in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During execution of processing, ball lending (distribution of game media) is not performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the payout of game media. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (that the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal does not turn ON.

When the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. to output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns ON the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the ON state of both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

In addition, during the game (in a state where game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. Even in this case, the first ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. prevent it from happening.

(Second ball lending limit method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending limit method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-28. In the example shown in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is ON during the period of control in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is ON during the period of control in the setting confirmation mode. shall be That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled in the setting change mode, and is maintained in the ON state even during the setting change mode period. shall be Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and is maintained in the ON state even during the setting confirmation mode period. shall be

9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout 10 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. FIG. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is ON even while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, as described above.

Based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not received the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the PRDY signal is not turned ON. Also, when the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) and the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (that is, the game control microcomputer 100), the PRDY signal is turned ON while the CPU 103 is executing processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). state, and set to OFF state.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and maintains the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, ball lending (payout of game media) is not performed.

Thus, during the period when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command , the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the game media payout control. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (that the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal does not turn ON.

When the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing, it resumes transmission of the connection confirmation command. Based on restarting reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. to output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns ON the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the ON state of both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

In addition, during the game (in a state where game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. Even in this case, the second ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. Also, regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state), it is possible to output the PRDY signal (to be in the ON state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 that is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the PRDY signal that is in the ON state. to the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to prevent ball lending from being performed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Third ball lending limit method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending limit method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-29. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and do not open the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game machine frame 3 must be released. That is, normally, the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. That is, during the period when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the game machine frame 3. Become. Thus, the period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period during which the setting change mode is controlled and the period during which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

FIG. 9-29 shows the main board when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIG. 9-29, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. Also, when the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) and the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (that is, the game control microcomputer 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is turned off instead of being turned on.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and keeps it in the OFF state. That is, when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal and EXS signal are both in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated by the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the game media payout control. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (that the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal does not turn ON.

The CPU 103 terminates the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the game arcade clerk or the like turns off the lock switch 21TM051. Furthermore, when a game hall clerk or the like closes the game machine frame 3 to put the pachinko game machine 1 in a playable state, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated. 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. When the game machine frame 3 is closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. to output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns ON the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the ON state of both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

In addition, during the game (in a state where game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. Even in this case, the third ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. In addition, regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state), it is possible to output the PRDY signal (to be in the ON state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending limit method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. That is, during the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to the game machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned ON based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it is possible to prevent ball lending from being performed during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (an open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main substrate 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. to stop outputting the connection confirmation signal (switch from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. prevent it from happening.

(Fourth ball lending limit method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending limit method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-30. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is ON during the period of control in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is ON during the period of control in the setting confirmation mode. shall be That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled in the setting change mode, and is maintained in the ON state even during the setting change mode period. shall be Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and is maintained in the ON state even during the setting confirmation mode period. shall be

9-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout 10 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. FIG. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is ON even while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, as described above.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON based on the ON state of the connection confirmation signal. Further, when the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) and the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (that is, the game control microcomputer 100), the PRDY signal is turned ON regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

When a card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball rental switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Here, the payout control board 21TM037 has not received the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 although the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state. Therefore, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 is not turned ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) and the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (that is, the game control microcomputer 100), the PRDY signal is ON (that is, the state in which the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the BRQ signal is in the ON state (i.e., a state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON), the CPU 103 sets While executing the processing of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the EXS signal is not turned ON, but turned OFF. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are ON, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, ball lending (payout of game media) is not performed.

Thus, during the period when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned ON. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the game media payout control. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (that the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal does not turn ON.

After the BRQ signal is turned on, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal remains in the OFF state (when the timer set to the predetermined value times out). do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal when the BRQ signal is turned OFF. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

When the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing, it resumes transmission of the connection confirmation command. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the PRDY signal ON.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. to output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the card The EXS signal to the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

In addition, during the game (in a state where game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending limit method shown in FIGS. 9-30 can be applied. Also, regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state), it is possible to output the PRDY signal (to be in the ON state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending limit method shown in FIGS. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent ball lending from being performed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Further, in FIG. 9-30, after the BRQ signal turns ON and the EXS signal remains OFF for a predetermined period of time (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 returns the BRQ signal to the OFF state, and also returns the BRDY signal to the OFF state. The BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state and the BRDY signal may also be maintained in the ON state even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed), and BRDY signal and BRQ signal are both ON, the EXS signal may be turned ON. Here, when the EXS signal is turned ON, (1) the BRQ signal is turned OFF and ball lending is automatically executed without the ball lending switch 21TM062 being operated again (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending process corresponding to the ball lending operation accepted within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed); Triggered by the switch 21TM062 being operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(Method not to execute ball lending restriction during setting change mode)
Next, the method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-31. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is ON during the period of control in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is ON during the period of control in the setting confirmation mode. shall be That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled in the setting change mode, and is maintained in the ON state even during the setting change mode period. shall be Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned ON at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and is maintained in the ON state even during the setting confirmation mode period. shall be

9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout 10 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. FIG. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is ON even while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues transmission of the connection confirmation command even during the period when it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, as described above.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON based on the ON state of the connection confirmation signal and the reception of the connection confirmation command. Further, when the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (that is, in the state of being connected to the game control microcomputer 100). is electrically connected) and the connection confirmation command is being received, the PRDY signal is is turned on.

When a card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball rental switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 outputs the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all ON and that the connection confirmation command is being received. is turned on, and when the trailing edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

Thus, even during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, it is possible to cause the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the game medium payout control even during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is possible to reduce the control burden for not executing the payout control during the controlled period. In addition, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko game machine 1 can be inspected, and workability can be improved. can.

The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after finishing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on the continuous reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

In addition, when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Also, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(Method of resuming ball lending after exiting setting change mode)
Next, referring to Fig. 9-32, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power outage during ball lending, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on after that. will be described in detail. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout of game media is interrupted based on the fact that the power is interrupted during the payout of game media, and after the power is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. To resume the payout that has been interrupted after the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished.

9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout control 21 is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the payout control board 21TM037 is performing payout of game media, if the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. be. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of game media is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), and the payout number count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIGS. The connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF while the mode or setting confirmation mode processing is being executed.

While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF, so the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON and turns it OFF even when the VL signal is ON, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and maintains the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. No game media are paid out while the process is being executed.

When the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

Then, when the power supply is restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of power-on is completed (the connection confirmation signal is turned ON and the PRDY signal is turned ON), payout control is performed. The payout microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0, one at a time. Payout operation is performed. As a result, the payout of game media that has been interrupted due to the power-off and subsequent transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed. In this way, when power is cut off during execution of ball lending and the payout of game media is interrupted, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is subsequently restored, the setting After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspended game media payout and complete the ball lending.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to a power failure during the payout process, and when the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. , the interrupted payout process is restarted after the end of , but this power cut is caused by the game arcade clerk turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the setting value. It may be a power cut that occurred, or it could be a power cut that occurred when the power switch 21TM055 was turned off following the end of business of the game arcade. In addition, not only when power failure occurs, but during payout processing, the opening state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, or the opening of the glass door frame 3a In response to the detection of the state, the payout process being executed is interrupted, then the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the interrupted payout process is executed. It may be restarted.

(Method for forcibly terminating ball lending due to power outage)
Next, referring to Fig. 9-33, we will use Fig. 9-33 to describe the process when payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) when power is cut off while ball lending is in progress, and payout is not restarted after power is restored. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when a power failure occurs during payout of game media, the payout in progress is stopped, and after the power is restored, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished.

FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout control 21 is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, if power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. be. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. When the EXS signal is turned OFF, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and forcibly terminates (stops) the payout of game media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as will be described below, game media equivalent to the unpaid number are not paid out after the power is restored.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIGS. The connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF while the mode or setting confirmation mode processing is being executed.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON but turns it OFF even when the VL signal is ON, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. No game media are paid out while the process is being executed.

When the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. In addition, since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, the predetermined number of balls to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode due to the power restoration) Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid game media that has not been paid out due to the cancellation of the payout (forced termination) is not paid out. Not done. In this way, if a power outage occurs during the execution of ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and after that, when the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting change mode or the setting By not executing the payout of the number of unpaid balls after the end of the confirmation mode, the control of backing up the data of the number of unpaid balls and resuming the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when a power failure occurs during a payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (cancelled) by not backing up the data of the unpaid number. Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power is cut off, the data of the unpaid number is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode Under the condition that no control is performed, game media equivalent to the number of unpaid game media are paid out based on the backed up data of the number of unpaid game media (payout is restarted based on the backup data), and after the power is restored. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game media equivalent to the number of unpaid game media are not paid out (payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, The payout of game media corresponding to the number of payouts may not be executed.

In addition, during the game (in a state where game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. Even in this case, it is possible to apply the method of forcibly terminating the ball rental accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33. In addition, regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state), it is possible to output the PRDY signal (to be in the ON state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to apply the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 9-34 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Receives a connection OK command as When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

When the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), if there is a prize, the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in a prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 . When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception.

Although not shown, during execution of communication processing for connection confirmation (between transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal and reception of a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal), there is a prize. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 . During execution of the payout of prize balls (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 as a received ACK signal.

(No winning during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process.

As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. The switch processing (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state of each switch of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 (the presence or absence of the detection signal) is not executed, and the special symbol process including the big hit determination processing etc. Processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are not executed either. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it does not detect the detection signal output from each switch, and does not execute the jackpot determination process or the like. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, winning is invalidated even if the game medium passes through each winning hole. Furthermore, since the switch process is not executed, the game ball is not detected by the outlet switch 21TM070, and the counting of the base is not executed. That is, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to tally each item such as the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. , the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

During the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the game media passing through each winning hole. and In other words, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the prize ball number command, and does not execute the big hit determination process or the like. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100 is not received. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the game medium passes through each winning hole, the payout control of prize balls is not executed.

When the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23 It becomes possible to execute switch processing to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal), detect that game media have passed through each prize winning opening, and transmit the number of prize balls command (and connection confirmation command). Become. Moreover, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process including a big hit determination process.

The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 . At this time, when the game medium passes through one of the winning holes (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal. Pay out game media. After paying out a predetermined number of game media, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If, during the setting change mode period in which there is a possibility that the setting value is changed, the switch process is executed to extract a big hit determination random number, and the big hit determination is performed based on the big hit determination random number. If the setting value before change is a big hit, but the setting value after change (setting value after confirmation) is not a big hit. The set value does not result in a big hit, but the set value after change (the set value after determination) results in a big win. In other words, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value is complicated, and there is a possibility that the player or the gaming facility suffers a disadvantage.

In this embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the payout of prize balls based on the passage of the game balls through each winning hole is not executed, and the big hit determination process is not executed. This prevents the relationship between the execution timing and the set value from becoming complicated, and also prevents the disadvantage of the player or the game parlor.

In addition, in this embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, winning is similarly invalidated so that the big hit determination process is not executed. I have to. Temporarily, regarding the setting confirmation mode, unlike the setting change mode, it can be controlled when executing the game control timer interrupt process instead of when the power is turned on, and the period during which the setting confirmation mode is controlled is also switch processing And if the special symbol process processing can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, and a problem arises that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the setting confirmation mode, as in the setting change mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on, and the jackpot determination is performed without executing the payout of the game balls based on the game balls passing through each winning hole. By not executing the process, the process is standardized and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, by not executing the game control timer interrupt process itself, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. has been disabled. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, etc., is the game stop error generated during the period in which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? It is determined whether or not (step S21TM1615), and when it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690) is not executed, so winning is invalidated. Thus, the method of invalidating winning (stopping the game) differs between when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the game stop error occurs.

In addition, during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal By not transmitting the number-of-balls command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing game media payout control. Thus, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute payout control, Winning can be invalidated.

It should be noted that during the game (in a state in which game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), it may be configured to be controllable to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. . Even when adopting such a configuration, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 can be applied, and based on being controlled in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 , It is better not to execute the switch process and the special symbol process process.

In addition, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 is configured to execute switch processing (a configuration that allows detection itself that the game medium has passed through each winning hole) It is good as When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, by stopping the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command, the payout control The microcomputer 21TM370 is not caused to execute payout control, invalidating the prize winning, and the special symbol process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the number-of-balls command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state in which the switch process can be executed, and the special symbol process is executed.

(Method of restricting payouts during game machine frame/door frame open detection)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during detection of the opening of the game machine frame/door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, during normal operation, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is received. Receive the connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a game hall clerk opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

When the game machine frame 3 is open (and when the glass door frame 3a and the upper tray are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is open), the prize balls to be paid out. Since the path through which the ball flows down is not physically connected to the upper tray in which the falling prize balls are stored, if the prize balls are dispensed in this state, the game medium will reach the upper tray. fall without Here, with the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a opened, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening , the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has detected the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of game media, and sends the game control microcomputer 100 a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal. Send to The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, until the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the closed state is reached.

In this way, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the payout motor 21TM289 even if the game medium passes through each prize winning opening and the winning is detected. Do not execute prize ball payout control without driving . Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. Drive to execute payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the frame 3 for the game machine or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . After paying out a predetermined number of game media, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

In addition, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of prize balls, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize balls and The data of the unpaid number among the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 . When the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven, and payout control of game media corresponding to the number of unpaid game media is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

In addition, during the game (in a state where game control timer interrupt processing can be executed), by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, a configuration is adopted in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. Even in this case, it is possible to apply the payout restriction method during detection of opening of the game machine frame/door frame shown in FIG. 9-36. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and are operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game machine frame 3 must be released, and the period during which the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode It is normal for the machine frame 3 to be open. During the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls is restricted during the period of control in the setting change mode and the period of control in the setting confirmation mode.

Next, control when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

Figures 9-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to power failure in separate charts based on the difference in the situation when the power failure occurs. The pattern related to power failure shown in Fig. 9-37 (1) shows the control when power failure occurs in the situation where "setting value is being changed" is not performed, and power failure recovery is performed. The set value at the time is the set value at the previous power-on. In addition, the pattern related to power failure shown in Fig. 9-37 (2) shows the control when power failure occurs in the situation where "setting value confirmation" is performed while "setting value is being changed". The set value at the time of power failure recovery is the set value at the time of power failure.

That is, FIG. 9-37 (1) shows the setting when the power failure occurs in a state in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF and there is no "set value confirmation" operation (the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON). FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control related to the set value when the power supply is cut off after the operation of "set value confirmation" which turns off the lock switch 21TM051. showing.

In addition, Figures 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from top to bottom in the order of occurrence (see "Order" and "Status" columns). ). In addition, in FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2), the ON/OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (order 1 to 8) is shown in the "lock switch" column. The column of "set value" shows set value data (set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation. In addition, the column of "set value display" in the drawing shows the display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation. there is

When the setting change work is performed, as shown in the top row of the "status" column in FIG. As shown in the "lock switch" column, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is the ON state. In FIG. 9-37(1), the "set value" at the time of "power on" in turn 1 is "1" because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is "1". , "1".

The reason why the display contents of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display section 21TM029A) shown in the column of "set value display" is blank is that the power supply has just been turned on at this stage, and the RAM 102 This indicates that the display of the setting values has not started since the process of reading and displaying the setting values stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not performed.

After the "power on" situation, the situation becomes the "setting change mode start" situation (order 2). Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. is "1" based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the set value storage area has not been changed. , and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the setting value is "1".

Subsequently, when the state of "setting value being changed" (order 3) is reached, the column of "lock switch" remains "ON", and if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, , as shown in FIG. 9-37(1), the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not changed, so the "setting value" column remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from "1" to "2", the "setting value display" column (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is It changes to "2" which is the new value selected.

Furthermore, when the state of "setting value being changed" (order 4) is reached, the column of "lock switch" remains "ON", and if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are not changed, the "setting value" column remains "1", but the setting information temporary storage area is changed from "2" to "3". changes to "3", which is the new value

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when a power failure occurs during "setting value changing" (order 5), the operation to confirm the setting value is not performed, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for confirming the setting value) to overwrite the setting value stored in . In other words, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are erased due to the occurrence of power failure.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power is turned on while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (order 6), then In the "setting change mode start" situation (order 7), the setting value ("1" in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. , is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1" and the "set value display" column is also "1". It should be noted that the same applies when the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in order 7.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered, and if the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is cut off, the setting value of the RAM 102 is changed. Since the setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set after the power is restored are It becomes the set value that was stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time (before the power was turned off). In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

Next, the control when the power is turned off after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37(2). A description of the processing that is common to the case where the power is turned off before the set value is fixed will be omitted. In the case where the power is turned off after the set values are fixed, it is assumed that after the 4th step of "changing the set value", the 5th step of "set value fixation" is performed. Here, immediately before the operation for confirming the setting value is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1", and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". The "lock switch" column is "OFF" because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF during the setting change mode.

That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF during the setting change mode (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value "1" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is transferred to the setting information temporary storage area. The stored setting value (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten with "3", thereby confirming the setting value (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as the setting value.

Then, when a power failure occurs in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for confirming the set values) is executed. The column of "set value" is "3". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from when the power is turned on. Here, the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are erased due to the occurrence of power failure.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (sequence 7), the subsequent "setting change mode start" situation ( In order 8), the setting value ("3" in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), the "set value" field is "3", and the "set value display" field is also "3". It should be noted that the same applies when the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in order 8.

As described above, if power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. , the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted. Therefore, if a game arcade clerk or the like accidentally shifts the game machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and then performs a setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, the change of the setting value can be canceled and the state before shifting to the setting change mode can be restored.

Transition to the setting change mode and transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. In the event of a disconnection, the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not changed from the time the power is turned on, so that the set values can be determined appropriately and control instability related to the set values can be prevented. It is possible to avoid scalding and perform appropriate control on set values.

FIG. 9-38 shows an effect device of the pachinko game machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9) notifies that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

FIG. 9-38(1) shows a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 5 during a game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol) (game control (step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game control), and a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of timer interrupt process for game control ), when it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated A command is transmitted to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) (step S21TM1710 of game control timer interrupt processing). That is, a lock switch operation command and/or a setting changeover switch operation command are transmitted in order to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command, the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting confirmation modes, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected."

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 receives both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command, and as the abnormal operation warning notification, "The operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected." is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the abnormal operation warning notification has a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. Even during the variable display of the symbols, the store clerk or the like of the amusement arcade knows that the operation for changing the set value has been performed although neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is possible to clearly grasp and confirm whether or not fraudulent activities have been carried out. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound notifying that an operation for changing the set value is detected (for example, a sound saying "Operation of the lock switch and setting switch is detected") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is activated. may be emitted in a predetermined light emission manner (for example, red blinking manner) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

In this embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), it has a configuration that can be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed The operation for doing (lock switch 21TM051, operation of clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within the period in which game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. Therefore, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is performed within the period during which the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is executed, or within the period during which the variable display of the normal symbols is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the setting values are being changed illegally.

In this embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, , the image display device 5, which is the largest display device provided in the pachinko game machine 1, notifies that an operation for changing the setting value or an operation for confirming the setting value has been performed, thereby preventing fraud. I am trying to suppress it.

Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the game machine frame 3 is normally in an open state, so that the game machine frame/door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is reported. In addition, as described above, the ball lending is interrupted or stopped, and the prize ball payout is also interrupted or stopped. However, regarding the pachinko game machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the game island, the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the game island is in an open state. By doing so, it is possible to see the back side of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from a position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch ( setting switch) 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even if the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 and the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position / Or it may be possible to operate the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is activated. When the operation is performed, it is notified that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value have been performed, thereby strengthening fraud prevention.

(Setting change response signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminals of the main substrate 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with 10 information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and a signal corresponding to each information output terminal is output. be done.

In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the winning ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 second. A game machine frame/door frame open signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame/door frame open signal is turned ON when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will also be in the ON state when it is on.

The third terminal outputs an all-symbols fixed count signal. The signal for the number of times of determination of all symbols is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when it is determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-shaped signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. An all-start signal is output from the fourth terminal. The all-starting hole signal is a pulse signal that is output when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, and is also outputted when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole. , and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

A jackpot 1 signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned ON when the jackpot game state is controlled. A jackpot 2 signal is output from the sixth terminal. The big win 2 signal is turned ON when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and is also turned ON when the game is controlled to the high base state. That is, the period in which the jackpot 1 signal is in the OFF state and the jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state can be identified as a high base state.

A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is ON during the period of control in the setting change mode and is also in the ON state during the period of control in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, as will be described later, the setting change response signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the setting value can be specified by the external device according to the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls launched into the game area and led to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. .1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. The winning signal is generated every time a game ball wins in each winning port (1st starting winning port, 2nd starting winning port, big winning port, 1st general winning port to 4th general winning port) (corresponding to each winning port) It is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a winning is detected by a switch, and is output each time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that remains ON for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, it is turned ON for 4 minutes when a fraudulent act is detected. Cases where fraudulent activity is detected include, for example, the case where abnormal winning occurs, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball enters the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). When the game ball wins, etc.), it is determined as abnormal winning. In addition, including the case where switch abnormality detection occurs, the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more in a row in the game control timer interrupt process) 1 starter switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality is detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is canceled), it is in the ON state for 4 minutes.

Furthermore, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is ON while being controlled in the setting change mode, and is also ON while being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

In this way, the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal, and the setting change response signal can be output from the seventh terminal. It is possible to externally notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that processing related to setting change has been executed). When the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-shaped setting change response signals corresponding to the current setting value is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, the tenth terminal A security signal is output. Then, based on the RAM clearing, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF upon termination of the setting change mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a signal corresponding to setting change is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. is output. Since the RAM is not cleared, the setting change signal and the security signal are turned OFF at the same time when the setting confirmation mode ends. Here, when the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (1) Similarly, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds after the setting change response signal is turned OFF upon termination of the setting confirmation mode.

If the RAM is cleared without transitioning to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal remains ON for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. does not turn ON.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume input of the setting change response signal and is configured not to execute processing based on the input of the setting change response signal, at least based on the input of the security signal Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The setting change support signal turns off when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal turns off parity in the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of RAM clearing. If the result of the check is not normal) is completed, it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned ON for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Therefore, on the side of the external device to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it can be recognized that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal input period has reached 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the management of the hall computer or the like may indicate that the RAM may have been cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the device can recognize and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that it may have been temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal input If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that it may have been controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

Therefore, even if the external device does not assume input of the setting change response signal and is configured not to execute processing based on the input of the setting change response signal, at least based on the input of the security signal Therefore, it is possible to distinguish between the possibility of RAM clearing and the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), it may be configured such that the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This configuration includes a configuration in which the security signal is output during the period of control in the setting change mode, but no security signal is output during the period of control in the setting confirmation mode, and a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period of control in the setting change mode. does not output a security signal, and does not output a security signal even during the period when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change response signal is turned off upon termination of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is kept off because the RAM is not cleared. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

In this way, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output while the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, as shown in FIG. If so (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned ON for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (the setting change response signal is OFF).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-40(4), a configuration may be adopted in which the security signal is not output during the period of control in the setting change mode. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds after the setting change response signal is turned OFF due to the RAM being cleared upon termination of the setting change mode. In addition, in a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. , the security signal is ON for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change response signal is not ON.

Thus, during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON while the security signal is turned OFF. By keeping the security signal ON for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF), when one signal is ON, the other signal is OFF. relationship. Such a relationship simplifies the signal output control (simplifies the output control because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the external device clearly defines the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed with the termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode as a trigger.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame/door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even after the machine frame/door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

Here, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the setting change response signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. , it may be difficult to allocate an output terminal dedicated to a signal corresponding to a setting change. An example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39(2) shows an example in which a setting change response signal is also output from the tenth terminal to which the security signal is output.

In pattern 2, the assignment of signals to the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal is the same as in pattern 1. FIG. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is ON when controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that remains ON for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, it is turned ON for 4 minutes when a fraudulent act is detected. Cases where fraudulent activity is detected include, for example, the case where abnormal winning occurs, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball enters the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). When the game ball wins, etc.), it is determined as abnormal winning. In addition, including the case where switch abnormality detection occurs, the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more in a row in the game control timer interrupt process) 1 starter switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality is detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is canceled), it is in the ON state for 4 minutes.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 9-39(2), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is ON during the period of control in the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state during the period of control in the setting confirmation mode. Also, as will be described later, the setting change response signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value can be specified by the external device according to the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from the common terminal.

Since the tenth terminal can output the security signal and the setting change response signal in this way, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that a fraudulent act has been carried out, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change response signal is provided. It is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (the possibility that a process related to the setting change has been executed). In addition, when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM is cleared, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is turned off). 30 seconds after the end, the signal output from the 10th terminal turns off), and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since a setting change response signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Since the game machine number (machine number) and the setting change response signal are transmitted to the management device via the relay device provided on the game machine island, the management device determines the setting value based on the machine number and the setting change response signal. , and the predetermined set value are displayed in association with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying them so that they can be compared with each other. As a result, the manager of the game parlor can easily manage the actual setting values of a plurality of game machines via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the manager and the settings changed in the setting change work can be easily managed. The administrator can grasp the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, the setting of the gaming machine can be checked or the setting of the gaming machine can be changed again, thereby optimizing the management of the settings of the multiple gaming machines at the gaming parlor. can.

As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF upon completion of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as the setting change response signal for the special mode. In this example, the same number of pulses as the set value are output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 seconds. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse with a width of 0.1 seconds is output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, intervals of 0.5 seconds). This makes it possible to easily specify the setting values of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

As shown in FIG. 9-42(1), when the power is turned on, the setting change correspondence signal is turned on as the setting change mode is set. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 was 1 when the power was turned on. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is terminated without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. A pulse of 1 is output as

In this way, it is possible to externally notify whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and also to notify the setting value at the end of the setting change mode (if the setting value is changed, A setting value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled and a signal notifying the setting value are output from a common information output terminal. becomes possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode at a predetermined trigger, not limited to when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated. be. Specifically, events related to the game state, such as being controlled to the big win game state, ending the big win game state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid out prize balls by 1000. , detection of opening of the frame 3 for the game machine, detection of opening of the glass door frame 3a, detection of magnetic abnormality, etc. A setting change corresponding signal in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), a pulse of 1 is output as a signal corresponding to a setting change in a special mode, triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

This makes it possible for the external device to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each game machine. Even if the setting value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the setting value at a predetermined opportunity after that, and it is possible to strengthen the prevention of fraud such as changing the setting value by an inappropriate method.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(2), the signal corresponding to setting change is turned ON as the setting change mode is set when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 was 1 when the power was turned on. Assume that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of changing the setting value in the setting change mode. In this case, when the setting change mode ends, the setting change support signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becoming 3, the setting change support signal is turned off. 3 pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), with the occurrence of a big hit as a trigger, a pulse of 3 is output as a setting change correspondence signal of a special mode.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the operation to change the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting value was not changed. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), an operation to change the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting value is changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. there is In this way, when the setting change mode is controlled, regardless of whether or not the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed, the common signal output processing is executed upon termination of the setting change mode. , the signal output processing can be simplified.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(3), when the power is turned on, the setting change correspondence signal is turned on as the setting confirmation mode is set. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 was 1 when the power was turned on. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1 and is not changed. In this case, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 1, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. A pulse of 1 is output as Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), a pulse of 1 is output as a setting change correspondence signal of a special mode, triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

In this way, it is possible to externally notify whether or not the setting confirmation mode is being controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and also to notify the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on). (the set value stored in the area and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside. can be output from a common information output terminal.

In addition, in the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. , 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it turns OFF, and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode ) is output.

(Modified example of game control main processing)
Next, another form relating to the game control main processing of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed. As shown in 43 and FIGS. 9-44, after the initialization processing (RAM clearing) is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be entered.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to an accessible state (step S21TM1060), and proceeds to step S21TM2110 in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

When checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if the ON state is detected (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating the operation is set (step S21TM2210), and initialization processing is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processes accompanying the initialization process (processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is checked in step S21TM2110, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing from step S21TM2120. do. The processing shown in steps S21TM2120 to S2170 is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1320 to S21TM1370 shown in FIG. 9-13, and the description thereof is omitted.

After transmitting the backup command for recovery from power failure in step S21TM2170, or after transmitting the initialization command for power-on in step S21TM2270, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (step S21TM2310 in FIG. 9-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated when the power is turned on. (Step S21TM2320).

When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 enters a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed. (Steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. control the processing state to the configuration change mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. 9-12, and description thereof will be omitted. After executing the processing of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 confirms the setting value. mode (steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. 9-12, and the description thereof is omitted. When it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on, it is assumed that step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. process) is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the setting change mode is not entered. Thus, even when the initialization process (initialization of the gaming state by clearing the RAM) is executed, if the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied, is not controlled in configuration change mode.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the series of processes relating to steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, so the description is omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the initialization command (step S21TM2270) at power-on, and then the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) and a setting command (step S21TM2550). Further, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command at the time of power failure recovery or an initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270), and then transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM2270). S21TM2520) and a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on receiving the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. 9 or the like can notify the end of the setting change mode. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. 9 or the like can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command, without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for specifying that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since it is possible to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended on the effect control CPU 120 side, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Another Modification of Characteristic Portion 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing (clearing the RAM) the gaming machine. The switch for changing is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) can be With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) is reduced compared to the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. becomes closer, when changing the setting value, confirmation of the setting value and switching operation according to the confirmation of the setting value become easy, and workability can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display section 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 where game information such as aggregated bases is displayed. A display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the aggregated game state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, provided on the main substrate 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, since the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped individually and more clearly, the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information is facilitated. and workability can be improved.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clearing) is provided, but a switch for changing the setting value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when being controlled in the setting change mode (for example, 1→2→3→4→5→6 every 5 seconds), and when the lock switch 21TM051 turns from ON to OFF, the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) displays (The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is stored in the setting value storage area (The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting information temporary storage area.) The setting value may be determined by overwriting the setting value with the existing setting value. At the timing when the set value to be confirmed is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the game hall clerk switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state. It is possible to fix the setting value as the setting value of the gaming machine.

In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of game media to the upper tray or the lower tray based on the occurrence of winning. The game machine may be an enclosed type game machine in which a game medium is enclosed in the game machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of winning. In this enclosed game machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, being controlled in the setting change mode, being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, being within the period being controlled in the setting change mode, being within the period being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, setting value , the setting change mode has ended, the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit the information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each game machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

In the above-described embodiment, by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, it is within the period controlled in the setting change mode, within the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, etc. is shown, but not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100, based on being controlled in the setting change mode, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special By the symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc., it may be notified that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display may be caused to emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode , the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, etc. notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (for example, 7 The segment indicator may be caused to emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. In addition, a display (round number display) for displaying the number of rounds during the jackpot game on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and instructing the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display device (right-handed display device) is provided, these displays indicate that the setting change mode processing is being performed, and that the setting confirmation mode processing is being performed. You may make it light-emit in a mode.

In the above-described embodiment, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the security signal is turned ON. An example has been shown in which the security signal remains ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal turning OFF. Or when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the security signal is turned ON, and after that, if the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Along with this, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By using such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled in an external device such as a hall computer, and to clearly indicate that the RAM has been cleared. can be specified.

With regard to the expectation degree suggesting effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star number) may be changed. For example, even if the big hit expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), if the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is low (for example, 1 or 2), the expectation level suggesting effect with the number of black stars of 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. By adopting such a performance structure, even when the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is high by executing the expectation-suggesting performance with three or more black stars. can be expected by the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation degree suggesting effect is executed. In addition, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit is low, an expectation-suggesting performance with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is executed along with this, so that the player can enjoy the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the set value can be expected to be high, interest can be improved even when the degree of expectation for a big win is low.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the game is played. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button by a player, and when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols (for example, a big coin). The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine in the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine in the setting confirmation mode. Confirmation is possible.

[Details and Other Forms of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, details and other aspects of the characteristic portion 21TM described above will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a game machine frame. The game machine frame includes a game machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). In addition, the game machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism (not shown) on one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side as seen from the player), and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each have the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum. , the other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side as seen from the player) is connected so as to be rotatable in a direction away from the outer frame. The inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened by rotating the glass door frame 3a about the hinge mechanism like a door. A lock mechanism for fixing the other ends to the outer frame is provided on the other ends of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a (for example, the right side as seen from the player).

Also, the outer frame is made of metal and is a frame that forms the outer shell of the pachinko game machine 1 . The game machine frame 3 is a frame body made of synthetic resin to which the game board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape that is penetrated at the center when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the game machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off the game machine frame 3. - 特許庁The game machine frame 3 is a frame in which speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, stick controllers 31A, push buttons 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a protects the game board surface and includes a glass plate (corresponding to a window) as a see-through window through which the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

When a game arcade clerk performs maintenance on the game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate jammed balls, etc.), the glass door frame 3a is moved from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, and then hinged. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism portion (one end side) toward the front side like a door. In order for the game arcade clerk to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. , the game machine frame 3 is rotated from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, with the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum, to the front side like a door, The other end needs to be in an open state away from the outer frame.

When the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, it sends a detection signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to identify that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of specifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Processing at power-on)
FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and This processing corresponds to the processing shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, some of the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is similar to the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 9-43, and parity check is performed as data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting changing flag is set (step S21TM3510) when shifting to setting change/confirmation processing described later, and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM3710).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 determines that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value different from the normal value (for example, 0) is stored in the setting value storage area. There may be Also, if the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is checked whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, pending memory, etc.) indicating the game state before power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of RAM 102 is cleared. , the initial values are set, but the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed from before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. The initialization of the game state is notified by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029. Note that the notification that the game state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends You can let it happen.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 can notify that the game state and the like have been initialized. It is possible.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM3045), The process proceeds to step S21TM3060. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command (restoration command), it recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example, are restored from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply was stopped. It is possible to notify that

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been detected to be open, and a detection signal that indicates that the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game controlling microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side , the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been opened to the game control microcomputer 100, and the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to steps S21TM3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. When shifting to the setting change mode, it becomes possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it becomes possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, when the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), no power interruption occurred during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM3020). YES at S21TM3030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM3070). Confirmation becomes possible, and if the game machine frame 3 is in a closed state (NO at step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in an OFF state (NO at step S21TM3070), the process shifts to normal game processing. .

In this embodiment, although changing the setting value is not permitted, in order to set the setting value to a state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, ( 2) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM3060 and S21TM3070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) in step S21TM3040, it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode).

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. can't If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that there is some kind of illegality. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of setting value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is placed in the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Control is possible, but not limited to such a form, even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode may be controlled by none of the above.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, it shifts to normal game processing. Further, when it is confirmed at step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO at step S21TM3070), the normal game process is started. With the transition to the normal game process, the process corresponding to steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 shown in FIG. The shown game control timer interrupt processing can be executed (special symbol process processing etc. can be executed).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if normal values (1 to 6) are stored in the setting value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed to It is recognized by the CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

Further, in step S21TM3020, when it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a set value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110 ).

Further, in step S21TM3030, if the normal values (1 to 6) are not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), the CPU 103 stores 0 in the setting value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), a set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010) (YES in step S21TM3010), if the normal values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area, , 0 is set as the set value, and a set value abnormality error command is transmitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal (for example, displays a message "The set value is abnormal." do). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting value should be changed in the image display device 5 (for example, displays a message "Please change the setting value"). The speaker 8L, 8R may notify the possibility that the setting value is abnormal (for example, outputting a voice saying "The setting value is abnormal"), and the setting value may be changed. It is also possible to notify that it is in the appropriate state (for example, output a voice saying "Please change the setting value").

After transmitting the setting value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM3140).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, pending memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. , the initial value is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the setting value storage area. On the other hand, an area storing total values (gaming information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases for each set value is not cleared. The aggregate value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized.

Then, after executing RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and processes after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. transition to It should be noted that the backup command (step S21TM3045) when power is restored and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) when power is turned on are commands that are transmitted only once when power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, the CPU 103 sets a command transmission flag that can identify that the power-on command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the command transmission flag may be cleared when shifting to normal game processing (step S21TM1470-). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command (step S21TM3045) when power is restored and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) when power is turned on may be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed at step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). Also, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

That is, if the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), if the power is interrupted during the setting change (that is, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on), If it is determined as YES in step S21TM3020) or if the set value is not the normal value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing, it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by RAM clear (step S21TM3150), and the setting change mode is entered.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value in the setting value storage area cannot be fixed to the normal value because the change of the setting value is not permitted. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, the power is once turned off, and (1) to (3) are performed when the power is turned on next time. All the conditions of (1) are satisfied, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to the regular value.

It should be noted that the CPU 103, if any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You can make it work. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, characters "Please turn off the power") prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. . In addition, when any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B to a predetermined It is also possible to prompt the user to turn off the power by emitting light in the power-off instruction mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10B. In the process of FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change response signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set values stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 enters a setting confirmation mode designating that the setting confirmation mode is set. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 sets the control to the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

Here, it is possible to output a security signal (step S21TM3540), display the current setting value (step S3550), and transmit a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580). ) and updating of the setting value (step S21TM3600) corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO at step S21TM3530) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO at step S21TM3040, RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to output a security signal (step S21TM3540) and display the current set value (step S3550), as well as transmit a setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) and update the set value (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO at step S21TM3530) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES at step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, RAM clear flag is set to 1).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM3530, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740) means that the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and that the power has been cut off during the setting change. (NO in step S21TM3020) and the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030). NO), since the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) has not been executed, normal processing at the time of power restoration should be executed, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. When it is confirmed that this is the case (NO in step S21TM3060), the normal game process may be started.

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that the RAM was cleared in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150. If the normal setting values (1 to 6) were not stored in the setting value storage area before (before the determination of YES in step S21TM3530) If an operation to change the set value has not been performed, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the normal set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again, and executes the processes after step S21TM3010.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to switch the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode. In addition, it is possible to initialize the game state, etc. (execute RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state, etc. is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, and RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like. there is

In addition, in the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned OFF (NO in step S21TM3530) while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. When all of the glass door frames 3a are closed, a determination of NO is made in step S21TM3520 to wait for the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a to be opened. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a command to notify that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting mode or confirm the setting. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be terminated may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Then, the effect control CPU 120, which has received these commands, notifies that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened by the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc., and operates the lock switch 21TM051. It notifies that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be terminated by operating. For example, the image display device 5 may display a message "Open the gaming machine frame 3, turn off the lock switch 21TM051, and terminate the setting change mode."

Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated. is operated (turned from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch ( Clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (turned from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed and notify that fact, although neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, the store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade clearly grasps that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, It is possible to check whether the

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (timer interrupt process for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 .

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the setting change mode is entered, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 are displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the setting value storage area, as shown in FIG. is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the store clerk of the amusement arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs a setting change operation), knowing at least that the normal value is not stored in the setting value storage area.

Each time the game arcade clerk operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). For the sake of explanation, this example shows an example in which the normal setting value ranges from 1 to 3. In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to 0 for each setting change operation. →1→2→3→1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E→1→2→3→1.

In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a normal value, information (alphabet E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding to this. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize that a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, and prompt the setting change operation. If a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the setting value storage area, and that value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as well, the manager of the game hall There is a possibility that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 may be misunderstood as one of the normal values, and the lock switch 21TM051 may be turned off without changing the setting. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. , to prevent such misunderstanding and ensure that the setting change operation is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area, , the character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period when the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value cannot be updated within the normal setting value range. A value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is never stored in the set value storage area, and information different from the normal value (character E in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. ) is never displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is set, step S21TM3550 is executed. , the normal set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the normal setting value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. →3→1→2→3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2→3→1→2→3.

That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is the normal value at the beginning, the setting value is changed no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the set value is updated within the range of the normal set value, and the set value storage area is stored with the normal value. A different value (0 in this example) is never stored, and information different from the normal value (character E in this example) is never displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

For example, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. After that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game parlor side does not change the setting value to a regular value through the setting change mode, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be performed without fail, and the set value can be fixed to the regular value.

In addition, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine 1 can be set in the setting change mode after that. Unless the set value is changed to the regular value and the setting change mode is ended, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be performed without fail, and the set value can be fixed to the regular value.

(Ball lending restrictions based on the detection of the open state of the frame for the game machine or the glass door frame)
Next, when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the method of restricting the lending of balls when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 shows that when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the main board 11, It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn on the PRDY signal. Also, when the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) and the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (that is, the game control microcomputer 100), the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal ON but turns it OFF while the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

As a result, the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Also, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball rental switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and maintains the OFF state. That is, when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, , and EXS signals are both in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

In this way, the PRDY signal is turned ON while the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is designed not to. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the game media payout control.

Then, a store clerk or the like of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko game machine 1 into a playable state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball rental switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. to output That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the BRDY signal. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns ON the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the ON state of both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by operating a predetermined key. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, normally, the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, the period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period during which the setting change mode is controlled and the period during which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, the appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request will be paid out. may not. In order to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine that is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to grasp the control status of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and judgment processing for that are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes

Therefore, in this embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute ball lending processing and prize ball processing. As a result, payout control is not executed regardless of whether the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or whether it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the ball lending process and prize ball process during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode are restricted. be. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized with respect to the ball lending process and the prize ball process.

In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By restricting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. is in the open state, the maintenance work of the game machine can be carried out smoothly.

(Resuming ball lending after completion of open state detection)
Next, while the ball is being rented, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, thereby interrupting the payout, and then the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. 10-5, a specific description will be given of the processing in the case of . In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open during the payout of game media. , the payout of game media is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the fact that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in an open state (becomes in a closed state).

FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout control 21 is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. switches the PRDY signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on detection of the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of game media is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), and the payout number count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

While the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. is not turned ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON but turns it OFF even when the VL signal is ON, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, while the gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 detects that the PRDY signal is OFF. Therefore, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and maintains the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, which of the PRDY, BRDY, BRQ, and EXS signals is detected? is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the payout of game media is not executed.

When the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the game machine frame 3 or the glass door Upon detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

When both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the PRDY signal is turned ON), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the payout of game media that has been interrupted by the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

Therefore, out of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power failure occurred (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), Since the payout is executed for the number of unpaid coins that have not been paid out, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

(Bullet rental processing when power failure occurs (without shifting to setting change mode))
Next, referring to FIG. 10-6, the specific processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power outage during ball lending and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not performed after the power is restored. explained in detail. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of game media is interrupted based on the occurrence of a power failure during the payout of game media, and after the power is turned on, the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Instead, the interrupted payout is resumed after the connection confirmation signal is turned on.

FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), payout control board 21TM037 (payout control 21 is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the payout control board 21TM037 is performing payout of game media, if the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. be. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of game media is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, when the pachinko game machine 1 is to be initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. shall be Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON but turns it OFF even when the VL signal is ON, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and maintains the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the period in which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, game media are not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 starts the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 turning ON. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. On the condition that the PRDY signal is not in the ON state.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. , The period during which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No game media are paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball rental processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the PRDY signal is OFF during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game hall clerk normally removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is established, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be open even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal will be in the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. .

When the game arcade clerk closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 indicates that the connection confirmation signal is ON and the game machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the game machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300 as being open, the PRDY signal is turned ON. When the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is calculated. Payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the game media, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when power is cut off during execution of ball lending and game medium payout is interrupted, it is possible to detect that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state when the power is subsequently restored. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended game media payout and complete the ball lending.

(Bullet rental processing when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of RAM clear signal lines in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is the game control micro It is input to the I/O 105 of the computer 100 and the I/O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the game parlor clerk operates one clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to clear the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and to initialize the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. RAM clearing to restore and clearing the RAM are both executed.

Next, FIG. 10-7 (2) regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure during ball lending and the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when a power failure occurs while paying out game media, the payout in progress is stopped, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Sometimes, the payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout is restarted based on the RAM clearing of the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. do not.

FIG. 10-7(2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of game media. (Payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the payout control board 21TM037 is performing payout of game media, if the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. be. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game media based on the EXS signal being turned OFF. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the pachinko game machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and , the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON but turns it OFF even when the VL signal is ON, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the execution of the process, the game media are not paid out even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10B are executed. Note that when the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear has been executed is notified. Also, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, since the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 starts the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 turning ON. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. On the condition that the PRDY signal is not in the ON state.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. , The period during which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No game media are paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball rental processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the PRDY signal is OFF during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. is in the closed state, even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

When the game hall clerk closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the connection confirmation signal is ON (processing in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode). is completed) and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects neither the game machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is open, so the PRDY signal is turned ON. and

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control The microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). When the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the data of the unpaid number is displayed. The payout operation is performed one by one until the number becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, subsequent control to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a payment is completed. In this way, when power is cut off during execution of ball lending and the payout of game media is interrupted, when the power is restored after that, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared, the set On the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted game medium payout is resumed to complete the ball lending. is possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when RAM clear for RAM 21TM302 in payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when power is turned on, clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated case), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 has been cleared (the remaining number of coins to be paid out is (because there is no game medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed even when the PRDY signal is turned ON.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, in accordance with this, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the backup area in the RAM21TM302. The data of the unpaid number stored in the payout number storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Before), out of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25) in the ball lending process executed before No payout is performed for the payout number.

Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) targeting the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid number stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, it is possible to simplify the data management of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or prize ball process.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure during execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the number of unpaid balls formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. When the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the number of unpaid coins. That is, when the power is restored, during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid number of coins will not be paid out.

(Modified example regarding ball rental processing (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of RAM clear signal lines in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 described above corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037. A clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with separate and independent clear switches.

When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal outputted from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is inputted to the I/O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I/O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

If the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not initialized, the game arcade clerk turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. 21TM052a is turned off. Conversely, if the game control microcomputer 100 is not initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned OFF when the power is turned on, and clearing is performed. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned ON and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned ON when the power is turned on. and

Next, FIG. 10-8 (2) regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure during ball lending, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when a power failure occurs while paying out game media, the payout in progress is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not cleared. .

FIG. 10-8(2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of game media. (Payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of game media, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the payout control board 21TM037 is performing payout of game media, if the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. be. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game media based on the EXS signal being turned OFF. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned ON, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON but turns it OFF even when the VL signal is ON, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even after a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this time point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn ON the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, and maintains the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the execution of the process, the game media are not paid out even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10B are executed. In addition, when the RAM clear processing in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is reported that the RAM clear has been executed. Also, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 starts the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 turning ON. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. On the condition that the PRDY signal is not in the ON state.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. , The period during which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No game media are paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball rental processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the PRDY signal is OFF during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. is in the closed state, even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

When the game arcade clerk closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 indicates that the connection confirmation signal is ON and the game machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the game machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300 as being open, the PRDY signal is turned on.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on ), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) targeting the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (remaining game to be paid out). (due to the presence of the medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. , payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, subsequent control to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a payment is completed. In this way, when power is cut off during execution of ball lending and the payout of game media is interrupted, when the power is restored after that, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared, the set On the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted game medium payout is resumed to complete the ball lending. is possible.

On the other hand, when the RAM 21TM302 is cleared in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned ON because the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (because there are no game media remaining to be paid out). Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed by operating the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11, the payout If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed ), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items will not be initialized, and will be executed before the power failure occurs (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode due to power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the unpaid number that has not been paid out , the payout will be executed.

Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) targeting the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the number of unpaid balls stored in the RAM 21TM302 is not initialized. Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in processing or winning ball processing can be appropriately protected.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure during execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the number of unpaid balls formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the interrupted payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power supply is restored, the period of control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid number of coins are paid out.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (an open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main substrate 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. to stop outputting the connection confirmation signal (switch from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. prevent it from happening.

(Restriction on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the method of limiting the prize ball payout when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-9. FIG. 10-9 shows that when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control microcomputer 21TM370 It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Receives a connection OK command as When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

At this time, when a game hall clerk opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. When the game machine frame 3 is open (and when the glass door frame 3a and the upper tray are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is open), the prize balls to be paid out. is not physically connected to the upper tray in which the falling prize balls are stored. fall without

In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control The microcomputer 100 for the game detects the passage of the game medium related to any one of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening. , the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the game control microcomputer 100 is sent a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal without executing game medium payout control. The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, until the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the closed state is reached.

In this way, during the period in which the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game medium is supplied to each winning opening. , the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute prize ball payout control. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the game media payout control. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 .

Then, a store clerk or the like of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko game machine 1 into a playable state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. After paying out a predetermined number of game media, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Resume prize ball delivery after open state detection ends)
Next, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is put into an open state while the prize balls are being paid out, so that the payout is interrupted. Processing when the closed state is set will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open during the payout of game media. , the payout of game media is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the fact that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in an open state (becomes in a closed state).

As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Receives a connection OK command as When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

When the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), if there is a prize, the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in a prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. During the period during which the number of prize balls specified by the number of prize balls command is being paid out, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, and the game machine frame/door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is opened. When the open sensor 21TM300 detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 to interrupt the payout of game media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), and the payout number count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and outputs the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal for game control. Send to microcomputer 100 . The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, until the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the closed state is reached.

Thus, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of game media. Payout of game media is not executed. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the game machine frame 3 or the glass door When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being closed. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid number storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the payout of game media that has been interrupted by the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (without shifting to setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 10-11 will be used for processing when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure during the payout of prize balls and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not controlled after the power is restored. will be explained in detail. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-11, the payout of game media is interrupted based on the occurrence of a power failure during the payout of game media, and after the power is turned on, the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the game machine frame 3 is closed, the interrupted payout is resumed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Receives a connection OK command as When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

When the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), if there is a prize, the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in a prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. During the period during which the number of prize balls specified by the number of prize balls command is being paid out, if power failure occurs, power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Suspend media dispensing. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, when the pachinko game machine 1 is to be initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. shall be Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is the power-on process after the power is turned on (after the power is turned on, the serial During the period until the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) is executed, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the payout of game media is kept interrupted.

As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the period until S21TM1480) is executed, game media are not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 starts the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 turning ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. conduct. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. On the condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, the payout operation is performed.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. , The period during which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No game media are paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game hall clerk normally removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is established, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be open even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the fact that the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. state, and the payout of game media is not executed.

When the game arcade clerk closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 indicates that the connection confirmation signal is ON and the game machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300 as being open, the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game media, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when the power supply is interrupted during the payout of prize balls and the payout of game media is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On this condition, it is possible to restart the interrupted game medium payout and complete the payout of prize balls.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 10-12 shows the processing when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during the payout of prize balls, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. shall be sent. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-12, when a power failure occurs during payout of game media, the payout in progress is stopped, and after the power is restored, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Receives a connection OK command as When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

When the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), if there is a prize, the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in a prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. During the period during which the prize balls of the number specified by the prize number command are being paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, Suspend media dispensing. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the pachinko game machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and , the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is OFF. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is the power-on process, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480 ) is executed, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared, the state in which the payout of the game media is interrupted is maintained. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10B are executed. Note that when the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear has been executed is notified. Also, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, since the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 starts the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 turning ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. On the condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, the payout operation is performed.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. , The period during which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No game media are paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is turned ON, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is not executed. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the fact that the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. state.

When the game hall clerk closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the connection confirmation signal is ON (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). is completed), and the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of either the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Let

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control The microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, subsequent control to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a payment is completed. In this way, when the power is interrupted during the payout of prize balls and the payout of game media is interrupted, when the power is restored after that, based on the fact that the data of the number of unpaid balls is not cleared, , on the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted game medium payout is resumed, and prize ball payout is resumed. can be completed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on) Because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out is does not exist), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, in accordance with this, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the backup area in the RAM21TM302. The data of the unpaid number stored in the payout number storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Before), out of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14) in the prize ball processing executed before), No payout is performed for the payout number.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (discontinued) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid number of coins will not be paid out.

(Modified example regarding prize ball processing (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
Next, FIG. 10-13 will be described with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during the payout of prize balls, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-13, when a power failure occurs during payout of game media, the payout in progress is stopped, and after the power is restored, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without restarting the payout, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not cleared.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Receives a connection OK command as When receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above as long as the connection state is normal.

When the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), if there is a prize, the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in a prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. During the period during which the prize balls of the number specified by the prize number command are being paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, Suspend media dispensing. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned ON, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is the power-on process, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480 ) is executed, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared, the state in which the payout of the game media is interrupted is maintained. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10B are executed. In addition, when the RAM clear processing in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is reported that the RAM clear has been executed. Also, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 starts the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 turning ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. On the condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, the payout operation is performed.

As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. , The period during which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No game media are paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main substrate 11 is turned ON, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, execution of prize ball processing is prevented. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. is in the closed state, even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. As a result, the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

When the game arcade clerk closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 indicates that the connection confirmation signal is ON and the game machine frame/door frame is opened. When the sensor 21TM300 detects neither the game machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a in the open state, the payout motor 21TM289 is started to be driven.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on ), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) targeting the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (remaining game to be paid out). (due to the existence of the medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. Payout operation is performed one by one. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, subsequent control to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a payment is completed. In this way, when the power is interrupted during the payout of prize balls and the payout of game media is interrupted, when the power is restored after that, based on the fact that the data of the number of unpaid balls is not cleared, , on the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted game medium payout is resumed, and prize ball payout is resumed. can be completed.

On the other hand, when the RAM 21TM302 is cleared in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no game media remaining to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is made. take no action.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed by operating the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11, the payout If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed ), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items will not be initialized, and will be executed before the power failure occurs (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode due to power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14) in the prize ball processing that has been performed, the unpaid number that has not been paid out , the payout will be executed.

As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the interrupted payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power supply is restored, the period of control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid number of coins are paid out.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (an open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main substrate 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. Therefore, even if winning is detected, the command for the number of prize balls is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is no longer received, thereby preventing the payout of prize balls.

(Output period of security signal and setting change response signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. With this security signal, as described above, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clearing), detection of fraudulent activity, detection of game stop target error, and the like have been performed. In addition, the security signal is transmitted from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and transition to normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. 10-2, from step S21TM3510 until step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 determines NO and the normal game process is executed).

In addition, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change response signal is transmitted from the start of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing to the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing and transition to normal game processing (for example, FIGS. 10-1 and 10-1). 10-2, from step S21TM3510 until NO is determined in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and normal game processing is executed). With this setting change response signal, it is possible to externally notify that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (that the process related to the change or confirmation of the setting value has been executed). Also, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (when the normal game process is started), the setting change correspondence signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then the same seventh terminal outputs to the RAM 102. Since the number of pulse-shaped setting change response signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when the power is turned on, when the setting change mode is entered with RAM clearing (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1), A setting change response signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clearing (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode is terminated and the normal game process is started. In addition, when the setting change mode ends (exactly at the timing when 50 ms have passed since the setting change mode ended and the normal game processing is started), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, a pulse of 2 is output as the signal corresponding to the setting change in the special mode.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), although the RAM was cleared when the power was turned on (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1), the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is ON for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change response signal is not ON.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume input of the setting change response signal and is configured not to execute processing based on the input of the setting change response signal, at least based on the input of the security signal Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change support signal turns ON when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is started, and turns ON when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. (Precisely, 50 ms after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started), the OFF state is set. The security signal also turns ON when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is started, but as shown in FIG. Therefore, the ON state is continued for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode is ended, instead of turning OFF immediately after the setting change mode is ended. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (more precisely, the setting confirmation mode ends After 50 ms have elapsed since the normal game processing was started, the state is turned OFF.

In addition, in both cases of FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF (more precisely, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is performed, and the setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after 50 ms have elapsed). Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the area is 2, a pulse of 2 is output as the setting change correspondence signal for the special mode. This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the setting change mode is not entered, the security signal is issued when the power is turned on (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds after the execution of clearing.

Therefore, on the side of the external device to which the security signal is input, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), but the setting change mode is not entered. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (especially, it is highly likely that the mode has changed to the setting change mode that involves RAM clearing). ), and if the security signal input period did not reach 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) was not executed and the setting confirmation mode was entered. It is possible to recognize that (it is possible that only confirmation was performed without being able to change the setting value).

In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the hall computer or the like may not have entered the setting change mode although the RAM was cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode was entered without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) being executed. If the management device can recognize that (it is possible that only confirmation was performed without being able to change the setting value), and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds , the possibility of shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, the possibility of shifting to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clearing is high) can be recognized by the management device. In this way, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

Therefore, even if the external device does not assume input of the setting change response signal and is configured not to execute processing based on the input of the setting change response signal, at least based on the input of the security signal Therefore, it is possible to distinguish between the possibility that RAM clearing (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so the RAM is always cleared (step S21TM3050). or step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about 30 seconds plus the period of control in the setting change mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear flag is in the state of 0 (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal becomes the period during which the setting confirmation mode is controlled (more precisely, the period during which the setting confirmation mode is controlled +50 ms).

In this way, when the game machine is controlled in the setting change mode and when the game machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the output period of the security signal is different. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change support signal turns ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (more precisely, the setting change mode Or at the timing when 50ms have passed since the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the normal game processing is started, the state is turned OFF. Therefore, on the external device side, it is possible to specify the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. Also, when the input period of the security signal is longer than the input period of the signal corresponding to setting change by about 30 seconds, it recognizes that it is controlled to the setting change mode and that the RAM is cleared accordingly. It is possible, and if the input period of the setting change support signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without clearing the RAM.

In this way, the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from different output terminals, so that the external device receiving these signals receives a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the game machine. occurrence and that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and specified. Then, it becomes possible to clearly specify the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and it becomes possible to specify which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode was controlled based on the input period of the security signal.

Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the setting is confirmed without clearing the RAM (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). mode, and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off within 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode starts (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510), and the setting confirmation mode ends. Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing has started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. is output. Then, even if the setting confirmation mode is terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off) and the normal game process is started within 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started, the period is at least 50 ms or longer. The setting change response signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change response signal and the security signal are turned ON, they are kept ON for at least 50 ms.

Assuming that the period during which the setting change response signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the side of an external device such as a hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that it has shifted to the mode. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change support signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example). The external device side can recognize that each pachinko game machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

As for the setting change response signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change response signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine can be operated on the side of an external device such as a hall computer. The setting values of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after turning ON, and then the setting value When the number of 100 ms width pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is configured to be output, the period (less than 50 ms) during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode , and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output after that, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is incorrectly set. There is a risk that you will recognize it. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), by turning the setting change correspondence signal ON, the external device side , the setting value of each pachinko game machine 1 can be specified accurately.

FIGS. 10-16 are diagrams showing other examples of the rendering device provided in the rendering control board 12. FIG. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, the lamp control board 14 includes, in addition to the game effect lamps 9, a first out-of-screen suspension display 21TM101, a second out-of-screen suspension display 21TM102, and a fourth symbol display. 21TM103 and a setting change status indicator 21TM104 are connected, and both of these are composed of light emitting devices such as LEDs. Moreover, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5 . The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14 . In this example, it is assumed that these light emitting devices all emit light in a common emission color.

The out-of-screen first holding display 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120, when there is a change in the first reserved memory number, that is, when the winning to the first start winning opening occurs (when the first reserved memory number is increased), and the first special symbol When the display result is determined after the fluctuation display is completed (when the number of first reserved memories is reduced), the number of first reserved memories that specifies the number of first reserved memories after updating from the game control microcomputer 100 When the designated command is received, the out-of-screen first reserved display 21TM101 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command.

For example, when the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command is 2, both light-emitting devices are turned on. Further, when the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is set in a blinking state and the other light emitting device is set in a lighting state. Then, when the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are brought into a blinking state.

The out-of-screen second holding display 21TM102 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120, when there is a change in the second reserved memory number, that is, when the winning to the second start winning opening occurs (when the second reserved memory number is increased), and the second special symbol When the change display is completed and the display result is determined (when the second reservation memory number is reduced), from the game control microcomputer 100, the second reservation memory number specifying the updated second reservation memory number When the designated command is received, the out-of-screen second reserved display 21TM102 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command.

For example, when the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command is 2, both light-emitting devices are turned on. Further, when the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is set to the blinking state, and the other light emitting device is set to the lit state. Then, when the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are brought into a blinking state.

The fourth pattern display 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main substrate 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the first special symbol variation display is started (that is, Variable display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, it becomes a light-off state or a lighting state (that is, the variable display is completed), and the display result is derived. The other light-emitting device is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started (that is, variation display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the light-off state or the lighting state is reached (that is, the variable display is completed), and the display result is derived.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 provides a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has been subtracted, and a display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command specifying the variation time of the special symbol are received from the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of a set of commands, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to specify the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the display result is determined, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol. It is possible to specify that the display result has been derived after the variable display of .

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, variable display). is started, and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has passed, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or lit in response to receiving the pattern confirmation designation command (that is, the display result is confirmed ). For example, when the display result of "loss" is specified by the display result specification command, one of the light emitting devices is turned off during the pattern fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" is specified by the display result specification command. In this case, one of the light emitting devices is lit during the symbol fixing period.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 provides a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has been subtracted, and a display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command specifying the variation time of the special symbol are received from the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of a set of commands, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to identify the variation time of the second special symbol. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed and the display result is determined, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the second special symbol. It is possible to specify that the display result has been derived after the variable display of .

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device blinks (that is, variable display) in the fourth symbol display 21TM103. is started, and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has passed, the other light emitting device is turned off or lit in response to receiving the pattern confirmation designation command (that is, the display result is confirmed ). For example, when the display result of "loss" is specified by the display result specification command, the other light emitting device is turned off during the pattern fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" is specified by the display result specification command. In this case, the other light-emitting device is lit during the symbol fixing period.

It should be noted that the emission color of the first out-of-screen suspension display 21TM101 and the emission color of the second out-of-screen suspension display 21TM102 may be different, for example, the former is illuminated in blue and the latter in red. You can let them do it. Also, in the fourth symbol display device 21TM103, the luminescent color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is made different from the luminescent color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, the former is caused to emit light in blue (the same emission color as the first out-of-screen holding display 21TM101), and the latter is caused to emit light in red (the same emission color as the second out-of-screen holding display 21TM102). You can do it.

Also, an image showing the first reserved memory number (for example, an image of blue numbers "0 to 4") and an image showing the second reserved memory number (for example, an image of red numbers "0 to 4") It may be displayed on the display device 5 . In addition, the image of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern (for example, a square image, blinks (fluctuations) in white during the period when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is out. is stopped in blue during the design confirmation period, and if the display result is a big hit, it is stopped in red during the design confirmation period), and a fourth design image corresponding to the second special design (for example, a square It is an image of the second special symbol is blinking (fluctuation) in yellow during the period when the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating, and if the display result is lost, it will be stopped in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result will be a big hit. In some cases, an image that is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol fixing period) may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. Effect control CPU120 is the timing of receiving the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled, setting change state display light the device 21TM104. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. do.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU120 is the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, setting change Flash the status indicator 21TM104. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (lighting state) and that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (blinking state) by the lighting mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. It's becoming Here, compared with the period from when the power is turned on until the image display control of the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123, the light emission of each light emitting device by the lamp control board 14 after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the image display device 5 cannot notify that it is being controlled in the setting change mode or in the setting confirmation mode (an image display by the display control unit 123). Even during the period before display control becomes possible, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode is being controlled and that the setting confirmation mode is being controlled by the light emission mode of the setting change state display 21TM104. It becomes possible.

On the effect control board 12 side, not only the setting change state display 21TM104, but also the first out-of-screen reservation display 21TM101, the second out-of-screen reservation display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. By emitting light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the light is on, it may be notified that the setting change mode is being controlled or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. For example, the LEDs constituting the first out-of-screen suspension display 21TM101, the second out-of-screen suspension display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are all turned on to indicate that the setting change mode is being controlled. The LEDs constituting the first out-of-screen holding display 21TM101, the second out-of-screen holding display 21TM102, and the fourth pattern display 21TM103 are all set to a blinking state to be controlled in the setting confirmation mode. may be notified.

On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 displays the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the normal drawing reservation display 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern during the game (for example, all of them are turned on at the same time). ), it is possible to notify that the control is in the setting change mode. In addition, during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the CPU 103 includes the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display device 25B, and the general pattern reservation display device 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second The special pattern display device 4B and the normal pattern display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern during the game (and also different from the light emission pattern controlled in the setting change mode). By (for example, making all of them blink at the same time), it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 30TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 30TM will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of pending display and active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, there are a first pending display area 30TM101 for displaying the first pending storage number (first pending display 30TM001 of 0 to 4) and a second pending storage number (second pending storage of 0 to 4). 30TM002), and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying an active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. The first reserved display area 30TM101, the second reserved display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the bottom of the screen. , the right side is the second reserved display area 30TM102.

When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 30TM001 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 30TM101. That is, the first pending display 30TM001 is controlled to the jackpot game state because the starting condition (for example, winning to the first starting winning port) is established, but the starting condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) is. When a plurality of first reserved displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101, the first reserved displays 30TM001 correspond to the first reserved displays 30TM001 in the order closest to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the right as seen from the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

Further, when the second reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second reserved displays 30TM002 corresponding to the second reserved memory number in the second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, the second pending display 30TM002 is controlled to the jackpot game state because the start condition (for example, winning to the second start winning port) is established, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. When a plurality of second reserved displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second reserved display area 30TM102, the second reserved displays 30TM002 correspond to the second reserved displays 30TM002 in the order close to the active display areas 30TM103 (in order from the left when viewed from the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays an active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 indicates that the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed after the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is established, and the jackpot game is started. It is information corresponding to the variable display of the special design (and the variable display of the decorative design) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In addition, in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side as viewed from the player), which is an area different from the first reservation display area 30TM101, the first reservation storage number (secondary reservation display 30TM004 of 0 to 4) is displayed. A sub-reserved display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 which is different from the active display area 30TM103 and displays a sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the currently executed variable display are provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU120, based on the determination to display the secondary reservation display 30TM004 at the time of start winning (when the winning to the first start winning opening occurs), in the secondary reservation display area 30TM104 A number of secondary reserved displays 30TM004 corresponding to the number of one reserved storage are displayed, and a secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105. That is, the sub-reservation display 30TM004 is controlled to the jackpot game state because the starting condition (for example, winning the first starting winning port) is established, but the starting condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is not established. In addition, the secondary active display 30TM005 is controlled to the jackpot game state after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning port) is established, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-suspended displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-suspended display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub-suspended displays 30TM004 is arranged in the order close to the sub-active display areas 30TM105 (in order from the right as viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the secondary pending representation 30TM004 has a star-shaped outline, which is different from the first pending representation 30TM001 (circular representation or triangular representation). Since the secondary pending display 30TM004 is displayed in a smaller size than the first pending display 30TM001, it is inconspicuous and has low visibility for the player. The secondary active indication 30TM005 also has a star-shaped contour, which is different from the active indication 30TM003 (circular or triangular). The sub-active display 30TM005 is smaller in size than the active display 30TM003, so it is less noticeable and less visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the sub-active A secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. In this way, as information corresponding to one variable display (common variable display) being executed, information in different forms such as the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

Further, corresponding to the number of first reserved storage being 4, four first reserved displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101, and four secondary reserved displays are displayed in the secondary reserved display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. In this way, as information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not yet been executed, information in different forms, ie, the first pending display 30TM001 and the secondary pending display 30TM004 are displayed. That is, one first reserved display 30TM001 and one secondary reserved display 30TM004 corresponding to the variable display (holding memory) common to the variable display (holding memory) corresponding to the one first reserved display 30TM001 are displayed at the same time. It will be displayed on the screen.

In this way, a plurality of types of pending displays (first pending display 30TM001, secondary pending display 30TM004) corresponding to a common variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, Amusement can be improved by diversifying the effects using the hold display. Similarly, a plurality of types of active display (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed (first special symbol variable display, decorative symbol variable display) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production using the active display and improve the interest.

Here, as will be described later, when it is determined not to display the secondary reservation display 30TM004 in the determination at the time of starting winning, while the first reservation display 30TM001 is displayed in the first reservation display area 30TM101, The secondary pending display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary pending display area 30TM104. In addition, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105, further indicating that the secondary active display 30TM005 should be displayed. The information (the square frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 11-1) will also not be displayed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible to execute the first change effect and/or the second change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect is a special mode different from the normal mode (white round display in this example) of the first pending display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning. (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (in this example, blue circular display), green mode (in this example, green circular display), red mode (in this example, red circular display display) or in a gold form (in this example, a gold circular display). In addition, the second change effect is to change the secondary pending display 30TM004 or secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the object of determination at the time of starting winning to the normal state (in this example, a white star display). This is an announcement effect displayed in a blue mode (blue star display in this example) or a red mode (red star display in this example).

FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing change effect determination processing. The effect control CPU 120 executes change effect determination processing in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a set of commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a command at the time of starting winning based on the occurrence of a starting winning to the first starting winning port). It is checked whether or not a command for specifying the number of 1 reserved memories to be added) has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not the big hit will be determined among the results of determination at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of the big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging the big win and the random number for judging the kind of the big win extracted at the time of starting winning, and designates the result of the judgment. Output the specified command. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be a normal reach or whether or not it will be a super reach based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of the start winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. do. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. do. If the command for one set of starting winnings has not been newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process is terminated as it is.

If one set of starting winning commands has been newly received, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on the determination that at least the first change effect is to be executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode. Determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 11-3) (step S30TM1030).

By executing the processes of steps S30TM1010 and S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processes after step S30TM1030 are executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, it is configured to be able to execute the second change effect.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in this embodiment, the final display modes of the active display 30TM003 are "normal mode", "special mode", "blue mode", "green mode", and "red mode". ", and "gold mode" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in this embodiment, the final display modes of the secondary active display 30TM005 are "no display", "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these aspects. Of these, "no display" indicates that the secondary reserved display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary reserved display area 30TM104 and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the starting winning (new first reserved memory). Triangular display), 18% blue mode (blue circle display), 21% green mode (green circle display), 16% red mode (red circle display) ), and at a rate of 10%, it becomes a gold mode (gold round display). That is, the first change effect, in which the form of the information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal form (white circular display), is 69. % will be executed.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode at a rate of 2%, the special mode at a rate of 3%, the blue mode at a rate of 15%, and the green mode at a rate of 20%. 25% gives a red appearance and 35% gives a gold appearance. That is, the first change effect, in which the form of the information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the object of determination at the time of starting winning is different from the normal form, is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

In this way, when the first change effect is executed, the percentage of big wins is higher than when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot becomes the highest when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the gold mode. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), regarding the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the degree of expectation for a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<special mode<blue mode<green mode<red mode<gold mode. .

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect to be described later, at the stage of the first pending display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. may be. Then, when the first pending display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), the display mode is at least the same as before the active shift, or a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than that. is changed to Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first pending display 30TM001, the degree of expectation for a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<special mode<blue mode<red mode.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the ratio of selecting the special mode as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the rate of selecting other modes. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, which will be described later, the ratio of special aspects included in the change patterns of pending display is not so low compared to the ratio of other aspects included. Therefore, when the first pending display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when it is displayed in other modes. When the first pending display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the player cannot expect a big win as much as when it is displayed in a blue mode or a red mode, but the degree of expectation is higher in the display mode. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, if the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the The secondary pending display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first pending memory) are not displayed at a rate of 70%, but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The ratio of the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary pending display 30TM004) being displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, and the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary pending display 30TM004) is displayed and The percentage of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, and the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary pending display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). is 1%. In other words, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the displayed information (suspended display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display), is executed at a rate of 5%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the The secondary pending display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first pending memory) are not displayed at a rate of 40%, but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The ratio of the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary pending display 30TM004) being displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, and the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary pending display 30TM004) is displayed and The percentage of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary pending display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). is 25%. In other words, the information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the displayed information (suspended display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display), is executed at a rate of 50%.

Thus, when the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed, the ratio of winning big is higher than when the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Also, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of the big win is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the probability of winning a big hit is the highest when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode. As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), with regard to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation for a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, at the stage of the secondary hold display 30TM004 prior to the secondary active display 30TM005, the display mode may be a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode. There is Then, when the secondary pending display 30TM004 is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (when it is displayed as the secondary active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as before the active shift, or a display with a higher degree of expectation than that. It is designed to change in mode. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the secondary pending display 30TM004, the degree of expectation for a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 (1) determines to execute the first change effect (makes the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 different from the normal mode), It may be decided to execute a change effect (display the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 and make the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 different from the normal mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and not to display the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005. (2-2) It is decided to execute the first change effect, and the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is normally It may be decided that

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (3) decides not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the normal mode), and executes the second change effect (the secondary hold display 30TM004 and It may be decided to display the secondary active display 30TM005 and make the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 different from the normal mode.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may (4-1) decide not to execute the first change effect, and may decide not to display the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005. In addition, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and although the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed, the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is normal). It may be decided that

In the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute either the first change effect or the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and ( If any of 4-2) is applicable, the first pending display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first pending memory) is displayed in the normal mode. The first pending display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first pending memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory is started, this The active display 30TM003 corresponding to does not change from the normal mode to another mode (change patterns 101, 201, 301, 401).

In addition, when the above (4-2) is applicable, the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to this will not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

If the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (1), (2-1) and (2 -2) and (3), as shown below, the change pattern of the change effect is determined.

If it is determined to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, if the above (1) applies, in step S30TM1060, the updated first Determine the change pattern of the first change effect based on the number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 ( 11-4 and 11-5), the updated first reserved memory count (the first reserved memory count after receiving the command for specifying the addition of the first reserved memory count), and the determined sub-active display 30TM005 The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode of (see FIG. 11-6).

Effect control CPU120 executes the first change effect, when it is determined not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, the above (2-1) and (2-2) If any of the above applies, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved memory count (the first reserved memory count after receiving the command for specifying the addition of the first reserved memory count) and the final value of the determined active display 30TM003 The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). In addition, in the case of (2-2) above, although the secondary reservation display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first reservation memory) is displayed, the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to this will not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

If the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the second change effect without executing the first change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, if it corresponds to the above (3), step In S30TM1210, the second Determine the change pattern of the change effect (see FIG. 11-6).

If the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3) If one of the above applies), a look-ahead counter is set (steps S30TM1070, S30TM1130, and S30TM1220). In addition, when neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, but the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed (in the above (4-2) (if applicable) also sets the look-ahead counter.

In the look-ahead counter, a value corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the start winning (the value specified by the first reserved memory number designation command) is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the look-ahead counter is decremented by one each time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received. That is, every time the first reservation display 30TM001 or the sub-reservation display 30TM004 corresponding to the reservation memory that is the object of judgment at the time of start winning is shifted, the value of the prefetch counter is decremented. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and/or the second change effect (or the secondary pending display 30TM004 is displayed although the second change effect is not executed). variable display) is executed.

Also, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, it sets a change prohibition flag (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period in which the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start-up win occurs, the above-mentioned step S30TM1020 is determined to be YES, thereby corresponding to the new start-up win (new first reserved memory). Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the secondary pending display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning (new first pending memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display targeted for the first change effect ends.

11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the number of first reserved memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the starting winning, (i) the n-th first reserved display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101. (ii) the first suspension display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side) in the first suspension display area 30TM101. Timing (when n≧2), and (iii) Timing at which the first pending display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (Timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed ), the display information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

11-4 and 11-5, for each change pattern, at each timing of (i) to (iii), the display information corresponding to the variable display (first pending display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is It indicates whether the display mode will be changed. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode of white circular display, and “special” indicates a special mode of white triangular display. , "blue" indicates a blue mode, which is a blue circular display, and "red" indicates a red mode, which is a red circular display.

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reservation shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the variation pattern 101 has a probability of 100%, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). Judgment values are assigned as determined by A change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which after the first reserved display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first reserved display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the active shift means that the first reserved display 30TM001 shifts from the first reserved display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, the display of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display to be determined).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103 . The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 103 is. 2, after displaying the first reserved display of the notice target in the special mode at the time of starting winning, the first reserved display of the notice subject is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the special mode. In addition, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402, which will be described later) ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105. FIG. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first pending display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first pending display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 105 is , the first suspension display of the notice target is displayed in a blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first suspension display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the normal mode to the final blue mode. Also, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402, which will be described later) ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the special mode to finally the blue mode. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403 and 404), the active display 30TM003 will remain unchanged in the blue mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105. FIG.

Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the normal mode to finally the green mode. Also, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402 described later) ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the special mode to finally the green mode. In addition, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403, which will be described later) and 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue aspect to the final green aspect.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 103, the variation pattern 104, the variation pattern 105, the variation pattern 106, and the variation pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first pending display of the notice target is displayed in a blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first pending display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. , the first pending display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first pending display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402, which will be described later) ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the special mode to finally the red mode. Also, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403 and 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue aspect to the final red aspect. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405, which will be described later) 412), the active display 30TM003 remains in the red mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the variation pattern 101, the variation pattern 102, the variation pattern 102, and the variation pattern 101, the variation pattern 102, and the variation pattern 102, respectively, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 103, the variation pattern 104, the variation pattern 105, the variation pattern 106, and the variation pattern 107, respectively.

Here, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the normal mode to the final gold mode. In addition, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402, which will be described later) ), after the active shift, the active indication 30TM003 will change from the special aspect to finally the gold aspect. Also, if the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403 and 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue aspect to the final gold aspect. Also, if the gold mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405, which will be described later) 412), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will change from the red aspect to the final gold aspect.

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for two reserved pieces shown in FIG. 11-4 (B). Select a table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning), the probability of the change pattern 201 being 100%. Judgment values are assigned as determined by In the change pattern 201, after displaying the first pending display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. This is a change pattern that does not change the first pending display of the notice target even at the timing as it is in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 202 according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A judgment value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204 . In the change pattern 202, after displaying the first pending display for notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first pending display for notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the first pending display of the notice object to a special mode at the timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first pending display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. , the first reserved display for notice is changed to a special mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the first reserved display for notice is not changed as it is in the special mode. After the first pending display is displayed in a special mode, the first pending display to be notified is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and the first pending display to be notified is also displayed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 201, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 203, the variation pattern 204, the variation pattern 205, the variation pattern 206, the variation pattern 207, and the variation pattern 208, respectively. In the change pattern 205, after displaying the first pending display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display to be notified to a blue mode, and the change pattern 206 displays the first reserved display to be notified in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then gives notice at the timing of the first reserved shift. It is a change pattern in which the first pending display of the target is not changed in a special mode, and the first pending display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the 1 pending display in a special mode, at the timing of the first pending shift, the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the first pending display of the notice target remains in the blue mode. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 208 displays the first pending display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then, at the timing of the first hold shift, the first pending display of the notice target remains in the blue mode. It is a change pattern that does not change, and does not change the first pending display of the announcement target in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 203, the variation pattern 204, the variation pattern 205, the variation pattern 206, the variation pattern 207, and the variation pattern 208, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, and the Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 203, the variation pattern 204, the variation pattern 205, the variation pattern 206, the variation pattern 207, the variation pattern 208, the variation pattern 209, the variation pattern 210, the variation pattern 211, and the variation pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, after displaying the first pending display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, the first pending display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern for changing the first pending display of the notice target to a red mode, and the change pattern 210 displays the first pending display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the notice is given at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the first pending display of the target is not changed to the blue mode, and the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the 1 pending display is displayed in a blue mode, at the timing of the first pending shift, the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the first pending display of the notice target remains in the red mode. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 212 displays the first suspension display of the notice object in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then, at the timing of the first hold shift, the first suspension display of the notice object remains in the red mode. It is a change pattern that does not change, and does not change the first pending display of the announcement target in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 203, the variation pattern 204, the variation pattern 205, the variation pattern 206, the variation pattern 207, the variation pattern 208, the variation pattern 209, the variation pattern 210, the variation pattern 211, and the variation pattern 212, respectively. ing.

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the reserved 3 pieces shown in FIG. 11-5(C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 301 has a probability of 100%, regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). Judgment values are assigned as determined by In the change pattern 301, after displaying the first pending display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is displayed. This is a change pattern in which the first pending display to be announced is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the pending shift, and the first pending display to be announced is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). A judgment value is assigned to each of 302 . In the change pattern 302, after displaying the first pending display to be notified in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first pending display to be notified is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the second holding shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first reserved display for notice is not changed in the special mode at the timing of , and the first reserved display for notice is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301, change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303 , the change pattern 304 , and the change pattern 305 . In the change pattern 303, after displaying the first reserved display for notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first reserved display for notice is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first reserved shift, and the second reserved shift is performed. At the timing of , the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode. After displaying the first pending display of the notice object in the normal mode, at the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed. It is a change pattern in which the pending display is changed to a blue mode, and the first pending display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the form, at the timing of the first holding shift, the first holding display of the notice object is not changed in the blue form, and at the timing of the second holding shift, the first holding display of the notice object is kept in the blue form. It is a change pattern that does not change, and does not change the first pending display of the announcement target in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303 , the change pattern 304 , and the change pattern 305 .

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, or the Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 303, the variation pattern 304, the variation pattern 305, the variation pattern 306, the variation pattern 307, the variation pattern 308, the variation pattern 309, and the variation pattern 310, respectively. In the change pattern 306, after displaying the first pending display for notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first pending display for notice is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first suspension display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of , and the first suspension display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first pending display in the blue mode, at the timing of the first pending shift, the first pending display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode, and at the timing of the second pending shift, the first pending display to be notified is not changed. It is a change pattern in which the pending display is not changed to the blue mode and the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the blue mode, the first suspension display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the first suspension display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second holding shift. The change pattern 309 is a change pattern in which the first pending display of the notice target is changed in the timing of the active shift and is not changed in the red mode. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to a red mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode, and the timing of the active shift. However, it is a change pattern that does not change the first pending display of the notice target in the red mode, and the change pattern 310 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first pending display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of the start winning. does not change the first pending display of the notice target in the red mode, does not change the first pending display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift. 1 This is a change pattern in which the pending display remains in the red mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301, change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 303, the variation pattern 304, the variation pattern 305, the variation pattern 306, the variation pattern 307, the variation pattern 308, the variation pattern 309, and the variation pattern 310, respectively.

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for four reserved pieces shown in FIG. 11-5 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the variation pattern 401 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). Judgment values are assigned as determined by In the change pattern 401, after displaying the first suspension display for notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first suspension display for notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second suspension display is displayed. At the timing of the holding shift, the first holding display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode, at the timing of the third holding shift, the first holding display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode, and even at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first pending display to be notified is not changed as it is in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). 402 is assigned a judgment value. In the change pattern 402, after displaying the first pending display for notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first pending display for notice is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of , the first pending display subject to notice is not changed in the special mode, even at the timing of the third pending shift, the first pending display subject to notice is not changed in the special mode, and the timing of the active shift is also subject to notice. This is a change pattern that does not change the first reserved display of , as it is in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 402 according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404 . In the change pattern 403, after displaying the first pending display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first pending display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of , the first suspension display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the first suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the first suspension display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode. The change pattern 404 is a change pattern that does not change the 1 pending display as it is in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 displays the 1st pending display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the 1st pending display to be announced at the timing of the first pending shift. The 1st hold display is not changed in the blue mode, the 1st hold display for the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the 1st hold display for the notice target is not changed at the timing of the 3rd hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode, and the first pending display of the announcement target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 402 according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404 .

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, or the Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change patterns 405 to 412, respectively. In the change pattern 405, after displaying the first pending display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first pending display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of , the first pending display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the first notice target 1 pending display is changed to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 displays the first pending display to be announced in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the first pending display to be announced at the timing of the first pending shift. The hold display is changed to a special mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode. The change pattern 407 is a change pattern in which the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing as it is, and the change pattern 407 is after the first pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and the third hold shift is performed. At the timing of , the first pending display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the first pending display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode. After displaying the target first suspension display in a blue mode, even at the timing of the first, second and third suspension shifts, the first suspension display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode, and the notification is given at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the target first hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. does not change the first suspension display of the notice target in the blue mode, changes the first suspension display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the first suspension display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern in which the display remains in the red mode, and in the change pattern 410, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift. The display is not changed in the blue mode, but at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift, the first notice target is displayed. The change pattern 411 is a change pattern in which the pending display is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 411 displays the first pending display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the first pending display to be announced at the timing of the first pending shift. It is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to a red mode, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first pending display to be notified in a red mode at the time of prize winning, the first pending display to be notified is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the first, second and third pending shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a pattern of change.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401, change pattern 402 and Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 403, the variation pattern 404, the variation pattern 405, the variation pattern 406, the variation pattern 407, the variation pattern 408, the variation pattern 409, the variation pattern 410, the variation pattern 411, and the variation pattern 412, respectively. ing.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. When the first reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and when it is decided to display the secondary reservation display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005, (i ) The 1st to n-th secondary reserved displays 30TM004 corresponding to the first reserved memory number n at that time are displayed in the secondary reserved display area 30TM104, and the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed as a secondary. Timing displayed in the active display area 30TM105 (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the secondary holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting winning is the position of the higher ranking in the secondary holding display area 30TM104 (secondary active display area 30TM105 side) (when n≧2), and (iii) the timing at which the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting winning shifts to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (the secondary active display corresponding to the starting winning 30TM005 is displayed), there is a possibility that the display information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In FIG. 11-6, for each change pattern, at each timing of (i) to (iii), what kind of display mode is the display information corresponding to the variable display (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005)? is shown. In the change patterns shown in FIG. 11-6, "normal" indicates a normal mode that is a white star display, and "blue" indicates a blue mode that is a blue star display. "Red" refers to the red embodiment, which is a red star.

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reservation shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). Select a table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning), the probability of the change pattern 601 being 100%. Judgment values are assigned as determined by A change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIG. 11-6, the active shift means that the secondary suspension display 30TM004 shifts from the secondary suspension display area 30TM104 to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the fluctuation subject to determination at the time of start winning display of the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801, and change pattern 901, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 will remain unchanged in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, the change pattern 602, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, and the change pattern 602 according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 603 . The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-holding display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801, and change pattern 901, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the secondary active representation 30TM005 will change from the normal mode to the final blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, change pattern 902 905), after the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 remains in the blue mode and does not change.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, the change pattern 602, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, or the Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in a blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-holding display of the notice object is kept in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801, and change pattern 901, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 will change from the normal mode to finally the red mode. Also, if the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is selected at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, change pattern 902 905), after the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 will change from the blue aspect to the red aspect. Also, if the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, change pattern 906 912), after the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 remains in the red mode and does not change.

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for two reserved pieces shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). Select a table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the variation pattern 701 has a probability of 100%, regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). Judgment values are assigned as determined by In the change pattern 701, after displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and even at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern 702, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, and the change pattern 702, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704 . In the change pattern 702, after displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern for changing the sub-hold display of the notice target to a blue mode, and in the change pattern 703, after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the notice target is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the secondary pending display is changed to a blue mode, and the secondary pending display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying , the sub-holding display of the announcement target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift and the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern 702, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708, respectively. In the change pattern 705, after displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 706 changes the secondary hold display of the notice target to the red mode, and the change pattern 706 displays the notice target sub hold display in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then displays the notice target sub hold display at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the display is not changed to the blue mode, but the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the display, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and is a change pattern. 708 is a change pattern in which after the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, the sub hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. .

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for 3 reserved pieces shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). Select a table.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the variation pattern 801 has a probability of 100%, regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). Judgment values are assigned as determined by In the change pattern 801, after displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of , and the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). A judgment value is assigned to each of the change patterns 802 to 804 . In the change pattern 802, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The change pattern 803 changes the sub-holding display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of , and does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the secondary hold display is displayed in the normal mode, at the timing of the first hold shift, the secondary hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift, the sub hold display of the notice object is displayed. A change pattern 804 is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display of the announcement target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, the change pattern 802, the change pattern 802, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, etc., according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, which is a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. In the change pattern 805, after displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. , the secondary hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the secondary hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode. is displayed in a blue mode, at the timing of the first hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode. The change pattern 807 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. In pattern 808, after the secondary hold display of the notice object is displayed in a red mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a pattern of change.

When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for four reserved pieces shown in FIG. 11-6 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the variation pattern 901 has a probability of 100%, regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). Judgment values are assigned as determined by In the change pattern 901, after the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the start winning, the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 902 to 905 . In the change pattern 902, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the third time. The change pattern 903 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift of , and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is held at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. After displaying the secondary hold display in the normal mode, at the timing of the first hold shift, the secondary hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, the notice target is displayed. The change pattern 905 is a change pattern that does not change the secondary hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is to display the secondary hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first, second, and third hold shifts. It is a change pattern that does not change the secondary hold display of the announcement target in the blue mode at the timing and the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to change pattern 905, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 906 to 912 . In the change pattern 906, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of , the secondary hold display for the notice target is changed to a blue mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the secondary hold display for the notice target is changed to a red mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the secondary hold display for the notice target is changed to red. It is a change pattern that does not change the mode, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode, and the active shift is performed. The change pattern 908 is a change pattern in which the notification target sub-hold display is not changed in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 908 displays the notification target sub-hold display in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then at the timing of the first hold shift. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice target sub-hold display is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 909 is a change pattern in which the secondary hold display is not changed in the red mode, and in the change pattern 909, after the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the notice target is displayed at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. does not change the secondary hold display in the blue mode, changes the secondary hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the secondary hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. A change pattern 910 is a change pattern that does not change, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Instead, the secondary hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 911, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second time, It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the announcement target in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. After that, at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, the sub-hold display of the announcement target is a change pattern that does not change while remaining in the red mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the ratio of execution of the first change effect to display the first pending display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is the secondary pending display 30TM004 or the secondary active display 30TM005. is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the second change effect is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

In this way, in the lower part of the screen, by frequently executing the first changing effect for changing the display mode of the first pending display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility, the player can easily respond to the notice effect. can sustain their interest. On the other hand, with respect to the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005, which have low visibility, the percentage of winning a big hit differs depending on whether they are displayed at the top of the screen. It will be noted whether secondary pending indication 30TM004 and secondary active indication 30TM005 are being displayed. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation for a big win when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, whether or not the display mode changes when the secondary reservation display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed. will also pay attention to

Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first pending display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star-shaped icon (secondary pending display 30TM004 or secondary active display 30TM004) displayed at the top of the screen. The size and shape are different from those of the display 30TM005). That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to common reserved storage and common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions within the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first pending display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed in a round shape, and the other icon (secondary pending display 30TM004 or secondary active display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. By doing so, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily grasp the difference (different types of display information). In addition, it is possible to diversify the effect of the icon corresponding to the variable display and improve the entertainment.

In addition, like the relationship between the first reserved display 30TM001 in the red mode displayed at the bottom of the screen and the secondary reserved display 30TM004 in the red mode displayed at the top of the screen, common display colors corresponding to the common variable display Icons (however, the icons are round and star-shaped) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are performed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the degree of expectation for a big win regarding the target variable display.

In addition, like the relationship between the red-mode active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-mode sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen, icons of common display colors corresponding to the variable displays being executed are displayed. (However, the icon has a different shape: a round icon and a star icon) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the degree of expectation for a big win related to the variable display being executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the combination of the display color of the first reservation display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-reservation display 30TM004, the degree of expectation of the big hit is different (for example, red mode Since the combination of the first pending display 30TM001 and the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the red mode has the highest expectation for a big hit, the player becomes interested in both modes of the pending display, and the display of the pending display. It is possible to increase the interest of the performance that changes the mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs (for example, the active display 30TM003 in gold mode and the display color in red mode). Since the combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation for a big hit, the player becomes interested in the mode of both active displays, and the interest in the effect of changing the display mode of the active display is heightened. be able to.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first pending display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the first change effect When it is displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is taken over during the active shift) or changes to a more expected display color. This can make the player interested in how the first pending display 30TM001 changes.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the secondary pending display 30TM004 shifts to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (when the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the second change effect is displayed) ), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is inherited during the active shift), or the display color changes to a more expected display color. This can keep the player interested in how the secondary pending display 30TM004 changes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11C, more display modes are provided for the active display 30TM003 with high visibility than for the secondary active display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001 with high visibility is the same as when changing the mode of the secondary reserved display 30TM004 with low visibility. are provided more than the change pattern of In this way, by varying the types of executable effects and effect patterns according to the visibility of the active display and the pending display, the first change effect and the second change effect are prevented while preventing the effect from becoming excessively complicated. He is trying to appropriately enhance the interest of the change production.

(Specific example of first change effect and second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. FIG. 11-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when executing;

First, in FIG. 11-8(1), the first reserved memory number is 3, and the image display device 5 displays the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in a variable display (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-7). (variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white round display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first suspended display 30TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first suspended display area 30TM101. ) are displayed three times. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Also, the guide (square frame) indicating the secondary active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

11-8(2) (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), a new prize-winning It is assumed that the start winning to the ball device 6A occurs and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (gold mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning to be determined. , and, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined, and it is decided to execute the second change effect, a sub-active display corresponding to the start winning to be judged is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Also, at this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the target variation display of the look-ahead preview effect is executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the secondary active display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect, and displays the secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display). A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The secondary active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the currently executed decorative symbol (first special symbol). Further, based on the fact that the first reserved memory count is four, four sub-reserved displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-reserved display area 30TM104.

Furthermore, the production control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-7 and (2) of FIG. Then, execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning (first reserved memory) generated after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect starts after the first pending display 30TM001 targeted for the first changing effect is displayed (after the secondary pending display 30TM004 targeted for the second changing effect is displayed). from) to the end of the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 30TM001 (the secondary pending display 30TM004) (period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7).

As a result, when a new starting prize is generated within the period in which the change effect is prohibited, the normal mode first suspension display 30TM001 (white round display) corresponding to the start win is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the time period, the first pending display of its normal mode will not change to another mode (eg, special mode, blue mode, or red mode). In addition, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the processing of step S30TM1030 is not executed), so a new start winning prize is obtained. The corresponding secondary pending indication 30TM004 and secondary active indication 30TM005 are never displayed.

In addition, not limited to such a form, when a new start winning occurs within the change effect prohibition period, although the normal mode secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may be kept unchanged.

In this example, since the number of first pending memories is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 and the sub-holding display area 30TM104 The displayed fourth sub-suspended display 30TM004 is a suspended display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(3), the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), The first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the pending display area 30TM101 is shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is erased. , the sub-suspended displays 30TM004 displayed in the sub-suspended display area 30TM104 are shifted one by one toward the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

In this shift display, the first reserved display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first reserved display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Also, in this shift display, the normal mode secondary pending display 30TM004, which had been displayed as the secondary pending display at the position closest to the secondary active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the secondary active display 30TM005. will be

Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Then, the first pending display of the announcement target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (in this example, the first pending display 30TM001a, which is a white triangular display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(5), the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), The first pending displays (the first pending display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first pending display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the pending display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1. The display is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display on the image display device 5 is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Then, the first suspension display of the notice target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (in this example, the first suspension display 30TM001b, which is a blue circular display), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, that The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated as shown in FIG. 11-8(7).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), The first suspended displays (the first suspended display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first suspended display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the suspended display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, Along with erasing the secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105, the secondary pending display displayed in the secondary pending display area 30TM104 (normal mode secondary pending display 30TM004 (white star display) and blue mode sub-suspended display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display)) is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Then, the first pending display to be announced is changed from a blue mode to a red mode (in this example, the first pending display 30TM001c which is a red circular display), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, that The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed from a blue mode to a red mode (sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated as shown in FIG. 11-9(9).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-7), The first suspended display (red mode first suspended display 30TM001c (red round display)) displayed in the suspended display region 30TM101 is shifted to the active display region 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the secondary active display region 30TM105 is displayed. along with erasing the secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105, and moving the secondary pending display (red mode secondary pending display 30TM004c (red star display)) displayed in the secondary pending display area 30TM104 to the secondary active display area 30TM105. Shift display is performed, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5 .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). 11-7, in the active display area 30TM103, the red mode active display 30TM003c is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example). A change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-16. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggesting effect, which will be described later, may be executed.

If the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period shown from T7 to T8 in FIG. 11-7. Change the mode. For example, when the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 determined at the time of starting winning is the red mode, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in the blue mode immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, Sub-active display 30TM005 is changed from blue to red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-7), the same decoration pattern ("7" in this example) stopped in the left pattern display area and the right pattern display area. A ready-to-win state is established, and a ready-to-win effect is executed in which characters "ready to reach!" Here, at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established, the first pending display 30TM001, the second pending display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden, thereby preventing the visibility of the ready-to-win effect from being lowered and the interest from being lowered. can do. The first pending display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variable display of the announcement target ends (until the timing indicated by T9 in FIG. 11-7).

In this way, as the ready-to-win effect is executed in the lower part of the screen, the first pending display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which share at least a part of the display area with the area in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, are not displayed. On the other hand, the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display, which are displayed in areas different from the area where the ready-to-win effect is executed, can be continuously displayed at the top of the screen even while the ready-to-win effect is being executed. , the player can see them. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of pending memories even during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, and can also grasp the display modes of the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. 11-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image;

First, in FIG. 11-11(1), when the first reserved memory number is 3, the image display device 5 displays the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in a variable display (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-10). (variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003 (white round display) in the normal mode, and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode. ) are displayed three times.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative patterns, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (2) (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new winning It is assumed that a start winning to the ball device 6A occurs and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (gold mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning to be determined. , and the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. Also, in this example, it is assumed that it is decided not to display the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 (thus, the second change effect is not executed). Also, at this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the target variation display of the look-ahead preview effect is executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the secondary suspension display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the secondary suspension display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are not to be displayed by the determination at the time of starting winning, Also, the guide (square frame) indicating the secondary active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-10 and (2) of FIG. Then, execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning (first reserved memory) generated after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is the period from when the first pending display 30TM001 targeted for the first changing effect is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 30TM001 ends. It is defined as a period (a period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10).

As a result, when a new starting prize is generated within the period in which the change effect is prohibited, the first suspension display 30TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start win is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the time period, the first pending display of its normal mode will not change to another mode (eg, special mode, blue mode, or red mode). Also, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, the presence or absence of execution of the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the processing of step S30TM1030 is not executed), so a new start winning prize is obtained. The corresponding secondary pending indication 30TM004 and secondary active indication 30TM005 are never displayed.

In addition, not limited to such a form, when a new start winning occurs within the change effect prohibition period, although the normal mode secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may be kept unchanged.

In this example, since the number of first pending memories is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 is the notice target by the first change effect. This is a suspended display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated as shown in FIG. 11-11(3).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), The first suspended displays 30TM001 displayed in the suspended display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

In this shift display, the first reserved display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first reserved display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Then, the first suspension display of the announcement target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (in this example, the first suspension display 30TM001a, which is a white triangular display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated as shown in FIG. 11-11(5).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), The first suspended displays (the first suspended display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first suspended display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the suspended display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and displayed on the image display device. At 5, the next variable display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Then, the first pending display of the announcement target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (in this example, the first pending display 30TM001b, which is a blue circular display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated as shown in FIG. 11-11(7).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), The first suspended displays (the first suspended display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first suspended display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the suspended display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and displayed on the image display device. 5, the next variable display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Then, the first suspension display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first suspension display 30TM001c, which is a red circular display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated as shown in FIG. 11-12(9).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-10). The first suspended display (red-mode first suspended display 30TM001c (red round display)) displayed in the suspended display region 30TM101 is shifted to the active display region 30TM103 side, and the image display device 5 displays the following changes: Start display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). 11-10, in the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-10), the same decoration pattern ("7" in this example) stopped in the left pattern display area and the right pattern display area. A ready-to-win state is established, and a ready-to-win effect is executed in which characters "ready to reach!" Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first pending display 30TM001, the second pending display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden. The first pending display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variable display of the announcement target ends (until the timing indicated by T9 in FIG. 11-10).

As described above, when it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of the start winning, the period until the end of the variable display targeted for the first change effect is the new start win. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start winning is not executed either. In this way, after changing the display mode of the first reserved display 30TM001 in the highly visible first reserved display area 30TM101 (after setting it to a different form from the normal mode), a new starting prize was generated thereafter. Even in this case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start winning in the sub-reserved display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is made to pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility, and the second change effect is performed. To prevent the complication of performance due to execution of a second change performance directed to a variable display different from the variable display targeted for the first change performance.

In the present embodiment, after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first pending display 30TM001 is displayed in a different mode from the normal mode), if a new start winning occurs, the new An example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning has been shown, but not limited to such a form, after the first change effect is executed (the first pending display 30TM001 is the normal mode) is displayed in a different manner), if a new starting prize occurs, it is possible to execute the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start win, but at that time The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first pending display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

In addition, after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first pending display 30TM001 is displayed in a different mode from the normal mode), if a new start winning occurs, not only the second change effect but also other notices You may make it restrict|limit the execution of production|presentation. For example, the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 each time the variable display is executed (for example, the number of the first reserved storage changes from 3 to 0). It is also possible not to execute the countdown effect, which is displayed as "3", "2", "1", and "0" along with the decrementing by one. Also, the background change effect of changing the background image to a special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first pending display 30TM001 is displayed in a different mode from the normal mode), when a new start winning occurs, the new Although an example of prohibiting execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning has been shown, this is not limited to such a form, and after the first change effect is executed (the first pending display 30TM001 is normally If a new start-up win occurs during the period during which the game is displayed in a different mode, the first change effect corresponding to the new start-up win is executable, but corresponds to the new start-up win. The second change effect is not executed (the secondary pending display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is not displayed, or the secondary pending display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning is displayed, but its display mode is changed to normal (the mode may be left unchanged).

(Modified example of first change effect and second change effect)
In the above embodiment, the mode is changed at the timing when the first pending display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. , but is not limited to such a form, in response to the execution of the first suspension action effect acting on the first suspension display 30TM001, the mode of the first suspension display 30TM001 is changed, and the secondary suspension display 30TM004 is acted on The aspect of the secondary suspension display 30TM004 may be changed in accordance with the execution of the secondary suspension effect effect.

FIGS. 11-13, 11-14, and 11-15 are specific examples of executing the first pending effect effect in the first change effect and executing the sub-sustaining effect effect in the second change effect.

First, FIG. 11-13(1) shows a state in which the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in a state where the first reserved memory number is 3. FIG. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003 (white round display) in the normal mode, and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode. ) are displayed three times. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Also, the guide (square frame) indicating the secondary active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decoration patterns, as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (gold mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning to be determined. , and, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined, and it is decided to execute the second change effect, a sub-active display corresponding to the start winning to be judged is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Also, at this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the target variation display of the look-ahead preview effect is executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the secondary active display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect, and displays the secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display). A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved memory count is four, four sub-reserved displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-reserved display area 30TM104.

In this example, since the number of first pending memories is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 and the sub-holding display area 30TM104 The displayed fourth sub-suspended display 30TM004 is a suspended display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13(3), the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first The reserved displays 30TM001 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the secondary reserved display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted one by one toward the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

In this shift display, the first reserved display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first reserved display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Also, in this shift display, the normal mode secondary pending display 30TM004, which had been displayed as the secondary pending display at the position closest to the secondary active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the secondary active display 30TM005. will be

Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first pending display of the notice target from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first pending display 30TM001a), which is a white triangular display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first pending action effect and the type of the first pending effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first pending action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the first pending action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(4), an effect is executed in which the character A appears and throws a ball toward the first reservation display 30TM001 to be announced. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first reserved display 30TM001, the player can expect that the aspect of the first reserved display 30TM001 will change.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (5), in response to the execution of the first pending action effect (action effect A), changes the first pending display of the notice target from the normal mode to the special mode. It is changed to a mode (in this example, the first pending display 30TM001a, which is a white triangular display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13(6), the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first The reserved displays (the first reserved display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first reserved display 30TM001a in the special mode) are shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the secondary displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Along with erasing the active display 30TM005, the secondary pending display (the normal mode secondary pending display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the secondary pending display area 30TM104 is shifted one by one toward the secondary active display area 30TM105. Then, the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first pending display of the notice target from the special mode to the blue mode ( In this example, it recognizes to change to the first suspension display 30TM001b), which is a blue circular display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first pending action effect and the type of the first pending effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first pending action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

In addition, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example Then, it recognizes to change to the sub-hold display 30TM004b), which is a blue star-shaped display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the secondary pending effect effect and the type of the secondary pending effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute a secondary pending action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(7), a character B appears and an effect is executed in which a ball is thrown toward the first reservation display 30TM001a to be announced. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first reserved display 30TM001a to be announced, the player can expect that the state of the first reserved display 30TM001a will change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first pending display of the notice target from the special mode to the blue It is changed to a mode (in this example, the first pending display 30TM001b, which is a blue circular display).

The effect control CPU 120 next executes a secondary pending effect effect (effect effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14(9), a character a appears, and an effect is executed in which balloons are blown toward the secondary hold display 30TM004 to be announced. As shown in FIGS. 11-14 (10) and 11-15 (11), the balloon thrown by the character a flies toward the notification target secondary holding display 30TM004 and reaches the position of the secondary holding display 30TM004. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can expect that the mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 will change.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the secondary holding display 30TM004 to be notified, the form of the secondary holding display 30TM004 changes to a balloon shape (secondary holding display 30TM004F ). Subsequently, an image of the broken balloon (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. to a blue mode (in this example, the secondary hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is terminated as shown in FIG. 11-14 (15).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first The reserved displays (the first reserved display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first reserved display 30TM001b in the blue mode) are shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the secondary displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Along with erasing the active display 30TM005, the secondary pending display displayed in the secondary pending display area 30TM104 (the normal mode secondary pending display 30TM004 (white star display) and the blue mode secondary pending display 30TM004b (blue star display )) are shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display on the image display device 5 is started.

Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first pending display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red mode ( In this example, it recognizes to change to the first pending display 30TM001c), which is a red circular display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first pending action effect and the type of the first pending effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first pending action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

In addition, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display of the announcement target from the blue mode to the red mode (this example Then, it recognizes to change to the sub-hold display 30TM004c) which is a red star display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the secondary pending effect effect and the type of the secondary pending effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute a secondary pending action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15(17), an effect is executed in which a character C appears and throws a ball toward the first reservation display 30TM001b to be announced. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first reserved display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can expect that the state of the first reserved display 30TM001b will change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first pending display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red mode in response to the execution of the first pending action effect (action effect C). It is changed to a mode (in this example, the first pending display 30TM001c, which is a red round display).

The effect control CPU 120 next executes a secondary pending effect effect (effect effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15(19), a character b appears and an effect is executed in which balloons are blown toward the secondary hold display 30TM004b to be announced. As shown in FIGS. 11-15 (20) and 11-15 (21), the balloon thrown by the character b flies toward the notification target secondary hold display 30TM004b and reaches the position of the secondary hold display 30TM004b. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can expect that the mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004b will change.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the secondary holding display 30TM004b to be notified, the form of the secondary holding display 30TM004b changes to a balloon shape (secondary holding display 30TM004F ). Subsequently, an image of the broken balloon (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 changes the secondary pending display of the notice target in a blue mode in response to the execution of the secondary pending effect effect (effect effect b). to a red mode (in this example, the secondary hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star display). .

In this way, the first pending effect rendering executed when changing the mode of the first pending display and the secondary pending effect rendering executed when changing the mode of the secondary pending display are different in performance mode. Thus, it is possible to further improve interest due to the presence of multiple types of pending display (first pending display and sub-holding display).

As shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, an effect in which a character appears and performs an action on an icon may be executed when changing the display mode of the active display. Also, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in response to the execution of the active action presentation in which the character A appears and throws a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). In addition, when the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in response to the execution of the secondary active effect presentation in which the character a appears and shoots a balloon toward the secondary active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). In this way, the active action effect executed when changing the mode of the active display and the side active effect effect executed when changing the mode of the secondary active display differ in the effect mode, so that a plurality of types can be obtained. It is possible to further enhance interest due to the presence of the display corresponding to the variation of (active display and sub-active display).

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution ratio of the second change effect may differ according to the current set values (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko game machine 1. For example, compared to when the setting value is low (1 to 3), when the setting value is high (4 to 6), the ratio of displaying the first pending display 30TM001 in a manner different from the normal manner is high. Also, the ratio of the secondary pending display 30TM004 being displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio of the secondary pending display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 themselves being displayed) may be high. In addition, the number of times the display color of the first pending display 30TM001 changes is greater (for example, three times) when the set value is higher (4 to 6) than when the set value is lower (1 to 3). ) A variation pattern may be selected at a high rate, and a variation pattern in which the display color of the secondary reservation display 30TM004 is changed a large number of times (for example, twice) may be selected at a high rate.

(Active change production and change suggestive production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. is different, an active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display is executed.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change-suggestion production that suggests the possibility of change. This change-suggestion effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change-suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode is changed. When the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed.

When performing the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 makes the display mode of the active display during the active shift different from the final display mode of the active display determined when the start winning occurs. In this case, the active display is changed from the display mode during the active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display by executing the active change effect and the change suggesting effect during the execution of the variable display.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode during the active shift to the final display mode when starting the variable display. 11 to 16 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of tables for determining the change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, a determination value is assigned to each of the special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, and gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In FIGS. 11 to 16, the display of "○" indicates that the success-mode change-suggestion effect is executed, and the display of "?" indicates that the failure-mode change-suggestion effect is executed. ing.

The effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), when the active display during the active shift is the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 11-16(A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, when the final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. In the change pattern 011, the number of executions of the change-suggestion effect is two, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 011, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to activate the active display. This is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode.

When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the variation pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of execution times of the change suggesting effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 012, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a blue mode, and then a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display is not changed to the blue mode, and the change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, the success mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the failure mode change suggesting effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and then the success mode changes. This is a change pattern in which a suggestive effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the variation pattern 015 with a probability of 30%. In the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015, the number of executions of the change suggesting presentation is 4 times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 014, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. The display is changed to a blue mode, then a success mode change suggesting performance is executed to change the active display to a green mode, and then a failure mode change suggesting performance is executed to keep the active display in the green mode without changing. In the change pattern 015, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion presentation is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion presentation is performed. is executed to change the active display to a blue mode, then the failure mode change suggesting effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggesting effect is executed to display the active display. is a change pattern that changes to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the variation pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggesting effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5 times, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. changing the display to a blue mode, then executing a success mode change suggesting effect to change the active display to a green mode, then executing a success mode change suggesting effect to change the active display to a red mode, This is a change pattern in which the failure mode change suggesting effect is executed after that and the active display is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 017 is a change suggesting effect of the success mode after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift. to change the active display to a special mode, then execute a success mode change suggesting effect to change the active display to a blue mode, then execute a success mode change suggesting effect to change the active display to green A change pattern of changing to a mode, then executing a change suggesting performance of a failure mode to keep the active display unchanged in a green mode, and then executing a change suggesting performance of a success mode to change the active display to a red mode. is.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. In the change pattern 018, the number of executions of the change suggesting effect is 5 times, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 018, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. changing the display to a blue mode, then executing a success mode change suggesting effect to change the active display to a green mode, then executing a success mode change suggesting effect to change the active display to a red mode, After that, it is a change pattern in which a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a gold mode.

The effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16(B), when the active display during the active shift is the special mode. As shown in FIG. 11-16(B), the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode is such that when the final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. In the change pattern 021, the number of executions of the change suggesting effect is two, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in a special mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode, and then a failure mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. This is a change pattern in which the display remains in the blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the variation pattern 023 with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggesting effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in a special manner during the active shift, a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode, and then a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a green mode, and then a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display is not changed to the green mode, and the change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode, and then a failure mode change suggesting effect is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode without changing, and then the success mode changes. This is a change pattern that executes a suggestive effect and changes the active display to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the variation pattern 025 with a probability of 20%. In the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025, the number of executions of the change suggesting presentation is 4 times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in a special manner during the active shift, a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode, and then a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. The display is changed to a green mode, then a success mode change suggesting performance is executed to change the active display to a red mode, and then a failure mode change suggesting performance is executed to keep the active display in the red mode without changing. In the change pattern 025, after the active display is displayed in a special mode during the active shift, the successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the successful mode change suggesting effect is performed. to change the active display to a green mode, then execute a failure mode change suggesting effect to keep the active display unchanged in the green mode, and then execute a success mode change suggesting effect to make the active display. is a change pattern that changes to a red mode.

Also, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. In the change pattern 026, the number of executions of the change suggesting effect is 4 times, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in a special manner during the active shift, a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode, and then a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. A change in which the display is changed to a green mode, then a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode, and then a success mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a gold mode. It's a pattern.

The effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16(C), when the active display during the active shift is the blue mode. As shown in FIG. 11-16(C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, when the final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. In the change pattern 031, the number of executions of the change suggesting effect is two, of which one is a success mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in a blue mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode, and then a failure mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. This is a change pattern in which the display remains green.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the variation pattern 033 with a probability of 20%. The number of execution times of the change suggestive presentation in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in a blue mode during the active shift, a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode, and then a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display is not changed to the red mode, and the change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode, and then a failure mode change suggesting effect is executed to keep the active display in the green mode without changing, and then the success mode changes. This is a change pattern for executing a suggestive effect and changing the active display to a red mode.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. In the change pattern 034, the number of executions of the change suggesting effect is 3, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in a blue mode during the active shift, a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode, and then a successful mode change suggesting effect is executed to activate the active display. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

The effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16(D), when the active display during the active shift is the red mode. As shown in FIG. 11-16(D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment values are assigned. In the change pattern 041, the number of executions of the change suggesting effect is one, of which the success mode is one and the failure mode is zero. A change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in a red mode during the active shift, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a gold mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-16, within one variable display period (in this example, before the reach state is established, the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode, so the reach after the start of the variable display During the period until the state is established), the more change-suggesting performances are executed, especially, the more success-mode change-suggesting performances are executed, the more the display color changes to the one with higher expectation of big win. higher percentage.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the n-th change suggesting effect has been executed, the greater the number of executions of the success mode change suggesting effect up to that point, the higher the ratio of the n+1th change suggesting effect to be executed. is configured as For example, at the stage when the second change-suggestion effect is executed (in the case of n=2), if both times are successful, the third change-suggestion effect is always executed. If one of the two times is a success mode and one time is a failure mode, the third change suggesting effect may not be executed. The same is true for n=3 and n=4. In this way, when the change suggesting effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggesting effect of the success mode executed within the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the ready-to-win state, the more the same change. During the display period (within the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the ready-to-win state), the ratio of execution of the next change suggesting effect is high, so the player can increase the number of times the change suggesting effect is executed, especially the success mode. The number of executions of the change-suggesting presentation of .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the change suggesting effect was executed] to the [the number of times the change suggesting effect was executed] within one variable display period, the greater the expectation of a big hit. The rate of change to a high degree display mode is high. Specifically, [number of executions of change-suggestion effect of success mode/number of executions of change-suggestion effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. 2/3 when the final display mode is the green mode, 3/4 when the final display mode is the green mode, 4/5 when the final display mode is the red mode, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If so, it is 5/5. In this way, the larger the [number of executions of success mode change suggestive effect / number of times change suggestive effect executed] is, the higher the ratio of the active display to change to the display mode with high expectation of big win. , attention is paid to the relationship between the number of executions of the change-suggesting presentation and the number of executions of the successful mode of change-suggesting presentation, thereby improving interest.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of times the success mode change suggesting effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Specifically, the number of success mode change-suggestion effects that are consecutive is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and when the final display mode is the green mode. 2 or 3, 3 or 4 if the final appearance will be the red aspect, and 5 if the final appearance will be the gold aspect. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the success mode change suggesting effect is continuously executed, and how many times it continues.

Also, in this example, when the final display mode is the same display color, a change pattern with a greater number of successive change suggesting effects of the success mode is likely to be selected. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the rate of selection of the changing pattern 012 (two consecutive) is higher than that of the changing pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the case of the green mode, the changing pattern is higher than the changing pattern 015 (two consecutive). 014 (three consecutive) is more likely to be selected, and in the case of the red mode, the changing pattern 016 (four consecutive) is more likely to be selected than the changing pattern 017 (three consecutive). In this way, even if the display color is the same in the end, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation by facilitating success mode change suggestive effects to continue.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestive effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestive effect based on the change pattern shown in FIGS. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggesting effect based on whether each change suggesting effect is in a successful mode or in a failure mode, and whether or not the next change suggesting effect is to be executed. decide. The types of change suggestion effects include change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character There is a change suggesting production E in which E appears.

Effect control CPU 120, in the change pattern determined at the time of start winning, when the change suggesting effect to be executed for the nth time is a success mode and the n+1th change suggesting effect is to be executed, [ Select the table of "success mode, with effect execution next time". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, with next effect execution], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability.

Effect control CPU 120, in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning, if the change suggesting effect executed n-th time is a success mode and the n+1th change suggesting effect is not executed, [ Select the table of "success mode, no effect execution next time". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability.

Effect control CPU 120, in the change pattern determined at the time of start winning, when the change suggesting effect to be executed for the nth time is a failure mode and the n+1th change suggesting effect is to be executed, [ Select the table of "Failure Mode, Execution of Effect Next Time". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, next effect execution], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability.

Effect control CPU 120, in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning, if the change suggesting effect to be executed for the nth time is a failure mode and the n+1th change suggesting effect is not executed, [ failure mode, no effect execution next time] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no next effect execution], the character A is 35%, the character B is 30%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 5%, and the character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggesting effect for each change suggesting effect based on the change suggesting effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-17. Therefore, when the n-th and n+1th change suggesting effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the n-th change suggesting effect, and all the characters from character A to character E are selected in the n+1st change suggesting effect. may be selected. That is, when the change suggesting effect A in which the character A appears is executed for the nth time, the change suggesting effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears may be executed for the n+1 time. There is also a possibility that the change suggesting effect A in which the same character A as the n-th time appears will be executed at the n-th time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change-suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the probability that the change suggesting effect A in which the character A appears is low is low, but the probability that the next change suggesting effect will be executed is high, and the change suggesting effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of becoming a successful mode, but a low probability of executing the next change suggesting effect. Also, the probability that the change suggesting effect E in which the character E appears is a success mode is 100%, but the probability that the next change suggesting effect will be executed is 0%. Therefore, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the player has a low degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display will change, but has a high degree of expectation that the next change suggesting effect will be executed. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggesting effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display will always change, but the next change suggesting effect will not be executed (this change suggesting effect will be the last).

As described above, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type of character that appears in the production, so the player pays attention to which type of character appears. will do. In addition, since the rate at which the next change suggesting effect is executed differs depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

11 to 17. For example, it is possible to provide an effect type in which the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is low and the rate at which the next change-suggestion effect is executed is low. An effect type may be provided in which the rate of change in the display mode of the display is high and the rate of execution of the next change suggesting effect is also high.

(Specific examples of active change effect and change suggestion effect)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. 11-18, 11-19 (9) to (12), and 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the gold mode at the time of starting winning. This is an example of a case where it is decided to set the active shift mode to the normal mode, and the change pattern of the active display is set to the change pattern 018 when starting the variable display based on the start winning. . 11-18 and FIG. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 changes the final display mode to the green mode at the time of starting winning. is determined, the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014. is.

In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is decided to execute the change suggestive effect A in which the character A appears in relation to the first change suggestive effect, and the second change suggestive effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggesting performance A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggesting performance B in which the character B appears for the second change suggesting performance, and the third change suggesting performance is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggesting performance B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C appears, and it is decided to execute the change suggesting performance C in which the character C appears for the third change suggesting performance, It is decided to execute the change suggesting effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggesting effect of No. 2, and it is decided to execute the change suggesting effect D in which the character D appears in relation to the fourth change suggesting effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion performance D of the success mode based on the execution of the fifth change suggestion performance, and the success mode of the character E appearing with respect to the fifth change suggestion performance. It is assumed that execution of change suggesting effect E has been decided.

In FIG. 11-18(1), the active display 30TM003 (white circular display) of the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative patterns. This indicates that the

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggesting effect A of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the first change suggesting effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(1), the character A appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character A throws the ball toward the active display 30TM003. As shown in -18(2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image that reminds us that the active display has exploded. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18(3), in response to the end of the first change suggesting effect, a special form of active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggesting effect B of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the second change suggesting effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(4), the character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character B throws the ball toward the active display 30TM003a. As shown in -18(5), an effect image is displayed indicating that the ball thrown by the character B has hit the active display 30TM003a. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (6), in response to the end of the second change suggesting effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays a blue mode active display 30TM003b (blue circular display). be.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change-suggestion effect C of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the third change-suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(7), the character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b. As shown in FIG. 11-18(8), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue mode active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (9), in response to the completion of the third change suggesting effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays a green mode active display 30TM003d (green circular display). be.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggesting effect D of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggesting effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 11-19(11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green mode active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays a red mode active display 30TM003c (red circular display). be.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggesting effect E of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggesting effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) is displayed in which a transparent member (such as a glass plate) forming the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked. . Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20(14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) is displayed with the crack range enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (15), an image (screen crack image 30TM210) in which a transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is broken is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image is displayed in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (16), an effect image is displayed indicating that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red mode active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggesting effect, the active display 30TM003e (gold round display) in gold mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (18), the broken screen image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 11-20 (19), the left pattern display area and the right pattern A ready-to-win state is established in which the same decorative pattern (in this example, "7") is stopped in the display area, and a ready-to-win state in which characters "reach!!" A performance is performed. Here, at the timing when reach is established as described above, the gold mode active display 30TM003e is hidden, and the square frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

11-18 and FIG. 11-19 (9), (10), (20)-(22), the production control CPU 120 decides the final display mode to be a green mode at the time of starting winning. This is an example of a case where it is decided to set the mode during the active shift to the normal mode, and the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014 when starting the variable display based on the start winning. .

In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is decided to execute the change suggestive effect A in which the character A appears in relation to the first change suggestive effect, and the second change suggestive effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggesting performance A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggesting performance B in which the character B appears for the second change suggesting performance, and the third change suggesting performance is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggesting performance B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C appears, and it is decided to execute the change suggesting performance C in which the character C appears for the third change suggesting performance, It is decided to execute the change suggesting effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggesting effect of No. 2, and it is decided to execute the change suggesting effect D in which the character D appears in relation to the fourth change suggesting effect. It is assumed that it is determined to execute the change suggesting effect D of the failure mode based on the fact that the fifth change suggesting effect is not executed.

11-18(1) to 11-19(9) (first change suggesting effect to third change suggesting effect) are the same as the above-described example of change pattern 018, so they will be explained. will be omitted, and examples of effects shown in FIGS.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion performance D of the failure mode in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion performance. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (20), an effect image is displayed indicating that the ball thrown by the character D did not hit the active display 30TM003d. At this time, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the aforementioned effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed. A production image is displayed in which the ball rolls toward the lower right portion of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (21), when the fourth change suggesting effect ends, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode continues to be displayed in the active display area 30TM103. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before execution of the fourth change suggesting effect (after the third change suggesting effect ends).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), a ready-to-win state is established in which the same decoration pattern ("4" in this example) is stopped in the left pattern display area and the right pattern display area, and "READY!! ” is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Here, as described above, the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established, so the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

As shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state in which the image display device 5 continues to display the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in a variable manner. , a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) of change suggesting effects are executed in accordance with the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggesting performance is completed for a predetermined number of times, the same decorative symbols are stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area to establish a ready-to-win state. In other words, during the period when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggesting effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, changes the direction of the variable display, or changes the ready-to-win state. I will not establish it. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the change suggesting performance is executed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, the mode of the variable display of the ornamental pattern does not change, so that the change suggesting performance attracts more attention.

Although FIGS. 11 to 16 show a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous, the change pattern is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. . Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change-suggesting effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change-suggesting effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestive effect of the failure mode is performed three times in succession, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed twice in succession. Also, a performance pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggesting effect of the failure mode is executed one or more times, but the change suggesting effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the change suggesting effect of the failure mode is executed, and the active display is always displayed when the change suggesting effect of the success mode is executed. Although an example in which the display mode changes has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the change suggesting effect of the success mode is executed, a higher rate of activation is performed than when the change suggesting effect of the failure mode is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes. For example, it is possible to provide an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the failure mode changes. An effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display changes even when the suggestive effect is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 and the like, when the effect suggesting a change in the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode with a level of expectation of a big hit that is one level higher (normal mode to special mode, special mode to blue mode, from blue mode to green mode, from green mode to red mode, from red mode to gold mode), but not limited to such a mode, when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed Alternatively, a change pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which the likelihood of a big win is two or more levels higher (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a gold mode, etc.). In addition, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestive effect to be executed (for example, the type of character that appears). is executed, the ratio of the display mode to change by two stages or more is low, and when the change suggesting effect in which the character B appears is executed, the ratio of the display mode to change by two stages or more is high. Also good. Furthermore, when the change suggesting effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may always change in three steps.

In the above embodiment, the change-suggestion effect may be executed before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed based on a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed one or more times to re-variate the decorative symbols after temporarily stopping the decorative symbols, before the temporary stopping of the decorative symbols. You may make it perform the change suggestion production|presentation of a success mode. For example, when the temporary stop is executed n times, the success mode change suggesting effect is executed before each temporary stop (the success mode change suggesting effect is continuously executed a total of n times), and then It is also possible to suggest that the (n+1)-th temporary stop will not be executed by executing a change-suggestion rendering of the failure mode. In addition, when the variation display of decorative symbols is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed even once, the performance pattern in which only the failure-mode change-suggestion effect is performed and the success-mode change-suggestion effect is not performed. may be provided. In addition, when the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n+1 times), the n+1 success mode change suggestion effect is continuously performed. An effect pattern may be provided in which the effect is executed and the effect suggesting a change in the failure mode is not executed.

In the case of such a configuration, the change suggesting effect is started (the character appears) in a state where the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped, and the change suggesting effect is finished before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (the character performs an action and the display mode of the active display changes). For example, immediately after the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the character A appears and performs an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the temporary stop is performed for the first time. After the re-fluctuation of is started, character B appears and performs an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-fluctuation is performed. After the game is started, the character C may appear and perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by avoiding overlap between the execution period of one change suggesting effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (that is, the period of changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern), it is possible to draw attention to the change suggesting effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being lowered when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

In addition, when executing the effect of changing the display direction of the decorative pattern from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started in the state where the decorative pattern is displayed in the vertical direction (the character appears). It is preferable to end the change suggesting effect (the character performs an action and the display mode of the active display changes) before changing the variable display direction of the decoration pattern to the horizontal direction. For example, immediately after the variable display of decorative patterns is started, the first character appears and performs an action, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. After the change in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and perform an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by avoiding overlap between the execution period of one change suggesting effect and the timing of changing the direction of the variable display of the decorative pattern, attention can be drawn to the change suggesting effect and the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered when the direction changes.

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the change suggesting effect is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes. It may also be a production that suggests that the changes. For example, the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 may be used as the change patterns when changing the display mode of the pending display. Alternatively, the display mode of the pending display may not be changed when the effect indicating the change of the failure mode is executed.

In the above-described embodiment, in both the success-mode change-suggestion effect and the failure-mode change-suggestion effect, the characters appearing in the same action (active display or pending display) are effects that affect, for example, a ball Although the example of performing the action of throwing a ) is shown, this is not limited to such a form, and in the effect of suggesting a change in the success mode, the character that has appeared performs an action to change the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In the failure mode change suggesting effect, the character that has appeared may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the pending display. It should be noted that the actions performed by the characters appearing may be different between the change suggesting effect of the success mode and the change suggesting effect of the failure mode. The action of throwing the ball in the direction of is performed (effect that affects active display or pending display). You may make it perform the production which does not act.

In the above-described embodiment, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the ready-to-win state, the more the next change suggestion effect will be performed within the predetermined period. is executed, and the higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change-suggestion performance of the success mode to the number of executions of the change-suggestion performance executed within the predetermined period, the higher the expectation of the big win. . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the temporary stop of the decorative symbols (combination of decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbols that will undergo re-fluctuation (pseudo-continuous) after temporary stop) is temporarily stopped. It may be a period, or it may be a period from when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped until the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped again after the decorative symbols are changed again (that is, the period between the pseudo-runs). In addition, the predetermined period may be a period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the first stop of any one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. It may be a period until the fixed stop.

In the above-described embodiment, when the change suggesting effect is executed a plurality of times, there may be a plurality of patterns of periods from the end of one change suggesting effect to the start of the next change suggesting effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggesting performance to the start of the next change suggesting performance is long, the success rate of the next change suggesting performance is higher than when the interval is short, and the degree of expectation for a big hit. can be set higher. Further, when the change suggesting effect is executed many times, the interval between the performances may be gradually shortened, and accordingly the degree of expectation for the big win may be gradually increased. According to such a form, when one change suggesting effect is completed, the player can determine whether or not the next change suggesting effect will be executed, and also the interval until the next change suggesting effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interest.

In the above embodiment, the ratio of changing the display mode of the active display may be changed according to the current setting values (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. For example, when the setting value is high (4 to 6), compared to when the setting value is low (1 to 3), the display mode of the active display is more likely to be displayed in a different mode from the normal mode. You can do it. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the display color of the active display changes more times (for example, 3 times or more) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The ratio of pattern selection may be high, that is, the ratio of success mode change suggesting effects to be executed and the success mode change suggesting effects to be continued may be high. In addition, compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) is a specific type of change suggestive effect (for example, the effect in which the character X with a low appearance frequency appears). may be executed at a higher rate.

[Another example of power-on processing]
Next, another example of power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. -11, FIGS. 9-43 to 9-44, and processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2. However, some of the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process is similar to the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 9-43, and parity check is performed as data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are normal values as the set values stored in the set value storage area, and six stages of set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when shifting to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it has been determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is to be executed. If the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be executed. This indicates that the In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM is not actually cleared, and when the setting change mode is set, the RAM is cleared after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is non-set state). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. You can let it happen.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been detected to be open, and a detection signal that indicates that the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game controlling microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side , the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been opened to the game control microcomputer 100, and the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 12-2. When shifting to the setting change mode, it becomes possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it becomes possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, if the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and there is no power interruption during the setting change ( NO at step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO at step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in order to enter a state (setting confirmation mode) in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value is changed, as will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. can't If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that there is some kind of illegality. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the setting value is going to be performed by the means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is placed in the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Control is possible, but not limited to such a form, even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode may be controlled by none of the above.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (setting command transmission) to be described later without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), control is not performed in either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if normal values (0 to 5) are stored in the setting value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is broken, the determination in step S21TM4010 is NO. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). will be controlled by mode. In addition, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. In addition, if the setting change mode has been controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the establishment of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later). It will be.

At step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4120, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), or if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON at step S21TM4140 If (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 detects that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The setting value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, it displays a message saying "the set value may be abnormal". Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn the power switch 21TM055 OFF), and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). to perform an operation to change the set value (determine the set value). For example, it displays a message "After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode." It should be noted that the same notification may be made by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to indicate that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)." Even though there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (the determination of YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) has not been satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). be done.

During the period of the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from accumulating in the 7-segment display and causing damage to the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the period of the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5 ), it is possible to identify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 continues until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if power failure occurs during setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before moving to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing and special symbol process processing shown in Figure 9-14), the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value need to let Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) to (3) are all satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value in the setting value storage area cannot be fixed to the normal value because the change of the setting value is not permitted. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any one of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the above-described loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed.

If the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed, the normal game processing cannot be performed. not. In this manner, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not established, the power is once turned off, and the conditions (1) to (3) are all established when the power is turned on next time. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to the normal value.

It should be noted that the CPU103, when any of the conditions of (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, predetermined It is also possible to prompt the user to turn off the power by emitting light in the power-off instruction mode.

In this embodiment, if the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be checked (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the control to the setting confirmation mode is not performed even if the two conditions are met. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in either setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3. In the process of FIG. 12B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. If the set value storage area does not store a normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, in the set value storage area as the normal value. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure has been input. Immediately before the device becomes inoperable due to the stoppage, the power supply stoppage processing is executed. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled (repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650), the power supply If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be executed appropriately in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the values (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the game hall clerk normally recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall clerk may actually setting value may be mistakenly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area +1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has been changed. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility that the Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is set (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated setting values are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the game arcade clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is set (when the power is turned on or when the power was cut off last time) is 3. If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and transmit the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650). ) and updating of the setting value (step S21TM4620) corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determined as YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determined as NO in step S21TM4040 to set the RAM clear flag). remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the set value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070 or S21TM4130) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or S21TM4140). is determined and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

At step S21TM4680, if lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES at step S21TM4680), CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and sets the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (step S21TM1670 in FIG. 9-14) when the normal game process is started. The security signal is continuously output until the For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (1), output of a security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are started. The value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of control in any of the modes. set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the processing for starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether control is performed in the setting change mode or in the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Also, in the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710, regardless of whether the control was performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is necessary to determine which mode the control was in). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the output control of the security signal is simplified by making the security signal output start control and output end control common between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set as a security signal for both the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting change mode control, which mode is selected on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-4(2), when the setting change mode is set, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once set in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared. there is That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 1 second has elapsed since the setting change mode was set, and 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode was terminated.

Specifically, if it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after interrupt permission In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 9-14), if the security signal continues to be output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled ( If the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the game control timer interrupt processing after the interrupt is permitted (for example, in FIG. 9-14 In the information output processing of step S21TM1670 shown), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30000 ms to 0 ms. In addition, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms ) to 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the game control timer interrupt process may be performed.

In this manner, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode and the control in the setting change mode are finished, and the control is performed in the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the control in the setting change mode was completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the output period of the security signal different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process was executed and the setting change mode was controlled. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled without executing the initialization process. It is possible to presume that there is a possibility that the change processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area (an area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is not executed), so the value of the abnormality detection flag is initialized in the signal output process. It remains set without being reset, and it is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period until one second elapses after the end of control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, RAM clear is executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is executed), so in the subsequent signal output processing The anomaly detection flag is cleared (it is unknown whether an anomaly was detected when the power was cut off), and as a result, the security signal output period ends the setting change mode. until 30 seconds elapses (a period corresponding to the execution of RAM clear).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 12-2, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, for example, 50 ms or longer. That is, a common security signal timer value of 50 ms may be set for both when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored when the power is subsequently turned off. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the setting value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as it is on the side of the effect control CPU 120. If they are displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the effect control CPU 120 side, the value specified by the setting command (0 to 5) plus 1 is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 Within the range, a production that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, not limited to such a form, CPU103 is set to the setting command the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area, effect control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command are displayed as they are on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). YES at S21TM4020), and no power interruption occurred during the setting change (NO at step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4040). ), it is sufficient to execute the power-off recovery process without clearing the RAM.

If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as after step S21TM1340 shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, the processing of steps S21TM1340 to S21TM1370 and steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the processing in the case where the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal at power-on, is executed, and after the interrupt is enabled, FIG. It suffices to shift to the timer interrupt processing for game control shown in 14 (including special symbol process processing and the like). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM1370), and the normal game processing is started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the power supply was restored based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). ). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example, are restored from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that (the RAM is not cleared).

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that RAM clear has been set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150 and it has been decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute power-on processing accompanied by RAM clearing.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clearing process) to step S21TM1460, the process of setting the value of the security signal timer to 30 seconds (step S21TM1465), and the processes of steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the backup RAM Execute the process when the data check result of the area is abnormal, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process etc.) shown in FIGS. .

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) is cleared, and the initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining per normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized to In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is that (a) if control is not performed in the setting change mode, the set value storage area does not contain the regular values when the power is turned on; (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is set, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the top address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the table set at initialization in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for judging a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, a special symbol process flag, etc. An initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this initialization command, the initialization process is performed (RAM clearing is performed without restoring from power interruption based on the data at the time of power supply stop). recognized). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, initialization of the game state etc. is performed (at the time of power supply stop). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the data of .

Next, CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the security signal timer value (1 second) set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second). ), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. remain.

In this step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the value of the security signal timer is set, so that the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (see FIG. 9-14 Information output processing of step S21TM1670 shown), thereafter, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms every time the game control timer interrupt processing is executed by the interrupt permission, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing.

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21 described above). Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 9-14) is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not to be a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit. Random number update processing is processing for updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number for A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as a performance display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself). processing, or processing of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the normal per symbol determination random number is one cycle (normal per symbol determination random number After stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum possible values, an initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the power failure recovery process (process after step S21TM1340), but not limited to such a form, If it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a Depending on the state of the door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process (process after step S21TM1340) at the time of power failure recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) is shifted to, but in such a form However, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to switch the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state etc. (execute RAM clearing). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state, etc. is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like. there is

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the setting value to be confirmed by the game arcade is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game stop state (step loop processing of S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is started in an unstable state of the set value (game control timer interrupt processing is executed) while preventing that, when the power is turned on, the power It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled to the setting change mode when the interruption occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 determines the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode ( Steps S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not established, the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor in the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) 21TM029 displays an error by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, by displaying the character "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D that constitute the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs to the game parlor clerk (in the setting change mode). (the possibility that a power outage may have occurred in a controlled state) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the set value abnormality error command, displays a message on the image display device 5, "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." After turning off the power once (turning off the power switch 21TM055), when the power is turned on again (when turning on the power switch 21TM055), the clerk or the like is instructed to shift to the setting change mode and change the setting value. (fix the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130); and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). YES), control is performed in the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. Please let me shift to the setting change mode.") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the fact that the image display device 5 was controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052) ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, it is possible to cause the image display device 5 to display a message "You are in setting change mode" or a message "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value". As a result, a game arcade clerk or the like can understand that the control is in the setting change mode, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. is changed to the set value as planned, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the set value can be fixed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, one of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions are not met, without being controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) . As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. to switch to the setting change mode.") will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to switch to the setting change mode." It is reported that the state is not established. In this case, the store clerk or the like at the game parlor understands that the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is in the stopped state (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again after operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. In the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to the state, it is possible to fix the set value and shift the pachinko game machine 1 to the normal game processing.

In this way, when a power failure occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in the case of (a) that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored, an error is displayed on the main substrate 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029). The mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being interrupted, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be properly changed.

On the other hand, in the case of (b) where the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is interrupted during the setting change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly stopped (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is stopped. will be done. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and transition condition (i ) to (iii) are not established, a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the setting value may be abnormal and the transition to the setting change mode has been performed (or the transition condition has been satisfied). , and the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command displays an image of the message "There is a possibility that the setting value is abnormal" and the message "It will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode." It is preferable to display it on the device 5 . On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. In response to that (turned from OFF state to ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, (2) setting changeover switch (clear switch ) 21 TM052 is operated (turned from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed and notify that fact, although neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, the store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade clearly grasps that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, It is possible to check whether the

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (timer interrupt process for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 .

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES at step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode was entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

As shown in FIG. 12-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. Alternatively, the RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the setting change mode may be entered (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the condition is satisfied.

In the processing shown in FIG. 12-6, if the result of the data check in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without judging whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are met, and the setting is changed. The part that is controlled to the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled to the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 12-1. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3.

Even in such a configuration, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is entered. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. and the setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed), if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the mode to the setting change mode irrespective of whether or not is established, it is possible to improve the workability for fixing the set value.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting It will be controlled in change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 12-2).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determination of YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the game arcade clerk who has changed the setting value must once turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to finalize the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the setting change mode control is determined whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). are made different, while the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. Appropriately transitioning to normal game processing is made.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), it is possible to issue a notification prompting the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Execute corresponding processing), and the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, ``Turn ON the lock switch once, and switch it to OFF after changing the set value.'' A message may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In the processing shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3 and 12-6, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine 1 can be set in the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control when a power failure occurs during setting value change will be described with reference to FIG. 12-7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 and FIG. 10-2 described above, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. itself will be changed.

First, regarding the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is turned off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends), FIG. -7(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, "0" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, power failure occurs. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in turn 6, the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when applying the control shown in FIG. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the 6th and 7th turns may be the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power supply is interrupted. , the setting value after change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power supply is restored, there are cases where the set values have already been set, and in this case, the game arcade clerk terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set values again. Since it is sufficient to shift the game machine to the normal game process by pressing the button, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power failure occurs after the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends), Description will be made with reference to FIG. 12-7(2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 12-7(1), and the explanation is omitted. Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the fixed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in sequence 6, it is assumed that the power supply switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in sequence 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in Figure 12-7 (1) and (2), when the power supply is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control of the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set values that have been changed in accordance with the previous setting change operation in the setting change mode, that is, the set values that were stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , are effective setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area at the time of power restoration).

Note that the setting value storage control shown in FIG. 9-37 may be applied instead of the setting value storage control shown in FIG. 12-7. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is operated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). state to the OFF state) is performed, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to determine the setting value. can be In this case, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is also changed according to the change of the setting value stored in the .

With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting If the power is cut off without completing the operation for terminating the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 will be It means that it has not been changed from the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). In other words, in the power supply stop state, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area at the time of the previous power-on are continuously held. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time. It will be the value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for gaming machines with different jackpot probabilities according to the setting values Although it is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5 It can also be applied to a game machine in which the jackpot probability is 1/300.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 35TM]
Next, a gaming machine having the characteristic portion 35TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-20. Although the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 includes one image display device, the gaming machine may be configured to include a plurality of image display devices. In the example of FIG. 13-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first image display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second image display device. In addition, as the movable body 32 described above, a first logo panel 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420, which are light-transmissive decorative bodies, are provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having two image display devices shown in FIG. 13-1, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, which is the first image display device, corresponds to the image display device 5 shown in FIG. It is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . That is, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 described above. For example, the background image of the decorative design is displayed, and the decorative design is variably displayed. In addition, an effect image such as an advance notice effect accompanying the variable display of the decoration pattern is displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays a pending display and an active display (display corresponding to variable display).

A sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, which is a second image display device, is provided below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. A first logo panel 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420 at the downward movement end are arranged on the front side (player side) of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. The sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays an image for changing the aspect (e.g., emission color) of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 having optical transparency, an image imitating a 7-segment display, and the like. It is possible.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, an image simulating a 7-segment display device is used to display the remaining time until a suggestive effect (for example, a temporary stop of a pseudo-continuous pattern) is executed, the expectation of a big hit (for example, the expectation of winning in a battle effect). It is possible to inform the player of a numerical value indicating the degree), the elapsed time from the start of a suggestive effect (for example, a music ready-to-win effect in which a song is played when the ready-to-win state is established). Numerical values indicated by the images imitating these seven-segment displays are images related to effects (including variable display of decorative patterns) executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and are executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is an image related to the time of production.

The first logo panel 35TM410 is vertically driven by a first logo panel driving mechanism 35TM510, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is vertically driven by a second logo panel driving mechanism 35TM520. Below, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the first logo panel driving mechanism 35TM510, the second logo panel 35TM420 and the second logo panel driving mechanism 35TM520 etc. logo panel The drive mechanism 35TM001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4.

(logo panel driving mechanism)
13-2 shows the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, FIG. 13-2(a) is a front view of the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, and FIG. 13-2(b) is P in FIG. 13-2(a). It is an arrow view. Also, FIG. 13-3 is a view in the direction of arrow Q in FIG. 13-2(a). As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-3, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 is arranged near the center of the game area on the game board 2. As shown in FIGS. FIG. 13-2(a) shows a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the downward movement end and overlapped with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 13-2(b) and 13-3, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is located below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and in front of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (toward the player). are placed. Both the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are rectangular in front view, and the width and height of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are greater than the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged side by side at the same distance from the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when they are at the downward movement end. A first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged on the front left side of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and a second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged on the front right side of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at positions overlapping the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear.

The width and height when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged in parallel are substantially the same as the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is covered with the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the downward movement end. It looks like there is

The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are made of transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate. The outline of the character information "FEV" and the outline of the character information "ER!" For example, in a transparent synthetic resin plate, the character portion (the portion surrounded by the outline of the character) is formed thin, and the other portions are formed thick. It is configured to be higher than the lightness.

Instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a contour member made of a material such as a colored and opaque synthetic resin is formed on a transparent synthetic resin plate so as to match the contour of the character. may be attached. In addition, the first logo panel is made of multiple materials with different translucency so that the translucency of the material of the character part (the part surrounded by the outline of the character) is higher than the translucency of the material of the other parts. 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420 may be formed.

In this way, by making the translucency of the character portion higher than that of the other portions, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (first logo When the panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move to the upper presentation position, among the information displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, Positions corresponding to the character portions of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 (the area surrounded by the outline of "FEV" and the area surrounded by the outline of "ER!") (positions relative to each area) The information displayed in , is more visible than information displayed in positions corresponding to other parts.

The first logo panel 35TM410 can be moved vertically in FIG. 13-2(a) by the first logo panel driving mechanism 35TM510. Further, the second logo panel 35TM420 can be moved vertically in FIG. 13-2(a) by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 and the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 have the same structure and are arranged symmetrically in the horizontal direction of FIG. 13-2(a).

The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 is composed of a first rack 35TM511, a first pinion 35TM512, a first motor 35TM513, a first support plate 35TM514, and the like. The second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 is composed of a second rack 35TM521, a second pinion 35TM522, a second motor 35TM523, a second support plate 35TM524, and the like. A first rack 35TM511 is fixed to the left side of the first logo panel 35TM410, and a second rack 35TM521 is fixed to the right side of the second logo panel 35TM420. The first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521 are formed in the shape of a prism elongated in the vertical direction in FIG. 13-2(a).

The first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524 are formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a). Guided by a first guide 35TM515 integrally formed on the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, the first rack 35TM511 can move vertically in FIG. 13-2(a). Similarly, the second rack 35TM521 is guided by a second guide 35TM525 integrally formed on the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524 to move vertically in FIG. 13-2(a).

A first motor 35TM513 and a second motor 35TM523 are attached to the rear surfaces of the first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524, respectively. A first pinion 35TM512 fixed to the output shaft of the first motor 35TM513 meshes with first rack teeth 35TM511A formed on the left side surface of the first rack 35TM511. Similarly, the second pinion 35TM522 fixed to the output shaft of the second motor 35TM523 meshes with the second rack teeth 35TM521A formed on the right side surface of the second rack 35TM521.

In this manner, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 as movable bodies are connected to the effect control board 12, and the operations of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are controlled by the effect control board. 12 (effect control CPU 120).

Specifically, a first motor 35TM513 for driving the first logo panel 35TM410, and an origin detection sensor 35TM519 for detecting whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is positioned at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (photo sensor), a second motor 35TM523 for driving the second logo panel 35TM420, and an origin detection sensor 35TM529 for detecting whether or not the second logo panel 35TM420 is positioned at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (photo sensor) is connected, and by controlling the operation of the first motor 35TM513 and the second motor 35TM523, the operation of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is controlled by the effect control board 12 (effect control board 12). CPU 120) can be individually controlled, and whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are positioned at the origin position (initial position) is controlled by the effect control board 12 (effect control board 12). The control CPU 120) can detect it.

When the effect control CPU 120 rotates the first motor 35TM513, the first logo panel 35TM410 fixed to the first rack 35TM511 moves vertically in FIG. 13-2(a). Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 rotates the second motor 35TM523, the second logo panel 35TM420 fixed to the second rack 35TM521 moves vertically in FIG. 13-2(a).

The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are independently movable in the vertical direction in FIG. It is possible to move upward or downward in FIG. 13-2(a).

A plate-like first contact member 35TM516 and a plate-like second contact member 35TM526 are fixed to the lower ends of the first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521, respectively. A first lower end stopper 35TM517 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, and a first upper end stopper 35TM518 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514. Similarly, a second lower end stopper 35TM527 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524, and a second upper end stopper 35TM528 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524.

When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves upward in FIG. 13-2(a), the first contact member 35TM516 contacts the first upper end stopper 35TM518 at the upward movement end of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the first logo panel 35TM410 moves upward. The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the exact production position at the end of upward movement. When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves downward in FIG. 13-2(a), the first contact member 35TM516 contacts the first bottom end stopper 35TM517 at the downward movement end of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the first logo panel 35TM410 moves downward. The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the exact origin position (also referred to as initial position or retracted position) at the end of downward movement. Whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is at the origin position is detected by an origin detection sensor 35TM519 (photosensor).

Similarly, when the second logo panel 35TM420 moves upward in FIG. 13-2(a), the second contact member 35TM526 contacts the second upper end stopper 35TM528 at the upward movement end of the second logo panel 35TM420. , the second logo panel 35TM420 stops at the exact presentation position of the upward movement end. When the second logo panel 35TM420 moves downward in FIG. 13-2(a), the second contact member 35TM526 contacts the second bottom end stopper 35TM527 at the downward movement end of the second logo panel 35TM420, and the second logo panel 35TM420 moves downward. The logo panel 35TM420 stops at the exact origin position (also referred to as initial position or retracted position) at the end of downward movement. Whether or not the second logo panel 35TM420 is at the origin position is detected by the origin detection sensor 35TM529 (photosensor).

In the state of FIG. 13-2(a), both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at the origin position overlapping the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear, and the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is low. is lowered, the player can see the whole of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. However, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are made of translucent material, the player can see the sub liquid crystal display through the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It is possible to view the information in the device 35TM300.

That is, the modes of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position change according to the display image of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. At this time, the character portions of "FEV" and "ER!", that is, the portions where the contours for presentation are formed, are more visible than the other portions, so that the player can more clearly see the sub-liquid crystal display. The display image of the device 35TM300 can be visually recognized, and the change of the image displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 35TM300 can be grasped more clearly.

FIG. 13-4 is a front view showing a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to positions overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear directions. That is, in FIG. 13-4, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to the performance position, which is the upward movement end in FIG. The panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear. At this time, the lower visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced, and the overall visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. The player can clearly see the information displayed on the entire sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Also, in this state, the aspect of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position changes according to the display image (especially the part displayed in the lower part) of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. become. At this time, the character part of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410 and the character part of "ER!" The display image of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be visually recognized, and the change of the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be grasped more clearly.

Also, although not shown, the first logo panel 35TM410 may be independently moved to a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in front and back in a front view. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 is moved to the rendering position, which is the end of upward movement, and is placed at a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower left portion is reduced, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, while the visibility of the left half is improved, the right side Half of the visibility is reduced. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the left half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the information displayed on the right half.

Also, in this state, the aspect of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the rendering position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (especially the portion displayed in the lower left portion). Also, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 (especially the portion displayed on the right half). At this time, the player can more clearly see the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the character portion of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410 compared with the other portions. Changes in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be clearly grasped. In the second logo panel 35TM420, the characters "ER!" Changes in the image displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

Similarly, although not shown, the second logo panel 35TM420 may be independently moved to a position where it overlaps the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. That is, the second logo panel 35TM420 is moved to the rendering position, which is the end of upward movement, and is arranged at a position overlapping the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear. At this time, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is in a state where the visibility of the lower right portion is lowered, and the right half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is in a state where the visibility is improved. Half of the visibility is reduced. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the right half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the information displayed on the left half.

Also, in this state, the aspect of the second logo panel 35TM420 at the presentation position changes according to the display image (especially the portion displayed in the lower right portion) of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Also, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 (especially the portion displayed in the left half). At this time, the player can more clearly see the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the second logo panel 35TM420 with respect to the character part of "ER!" The change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be grasped more clearly. Regarding the character portion of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can more clearly see the display image of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 compared with the other portions. Changes in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

As shown in FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 drives both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 between the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It can be moved together at the same time or independently. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of patterns for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, and to provide a plurality of patterns for changing the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is possible, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

In addition, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the origin position to the presentation position, the screen visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 improves, and the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 decreases. do. On the other hand, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the presentation position to the origin position (return to the origin position), the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 improves, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. screen visibility is reduced.

In this way, the visibility of the different display means of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 changes according to the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are the decorations. , and the visibility of each display means can be associated with each other, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

(Pseudo continuous performance)
As described above, the variation pattern is determined when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the variation display of the special symbol (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). Here, when a variation pattern is determined to execute one or more pseudo-continuous effects, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command designating the variation pattern displays decorations based on the variation pattern on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The pseudo-continuous effect is executed one or more times during the symbol variation display period.

Pseudo-continuous effect means that during the period from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols until the display results are derived and displayed after the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, in each display area of the left, middle, and right symbols This is an effect in which the decorative pattern is once temporarily stopped and then variably displayed again. By executing the pseudo continuous effect, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed once, that is, within the variable display period of the decorative symbol based on one variation pattern command corresponding to one reserved memory, it is as if It is possible to make it look as if the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed a plurality of times.

In the pseudo-continuous effect shown in this embodiment, decorative symbols consisting of numbers are temporarily stopped in the display area of the left symbol and the display area of the right symbol. After the pseudo-continuous pattern (in this example, the pseudo-continuous pattern 35TM600 displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 13-9 (5) and 13-10 (10)) is temporarily stopped, the left The variable display of the decorative symbols in the respective display areas of the symbols, the middle symbols, and the right symbols is resumed (so-called re-fluctuation is performed). Here, "a state in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative design does not stop completely and moves slightly up and down, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, a state in which the decorative design is swinging, A state in which the decorative pattern repeats enlargement and reduction, and a state in which the decorative pattern is in a different form (deformed) from that at the time of final stop (at the time of finalizing the design) may be acceptable.

(Countdown production)
In this embodiment, when the variable display of decorative symbols is performed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 on the basis of the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, until the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped in the medium symbol display area (re-variation is performed). It is possible to execute a countdown effect for informing the remaining time (until it is notified that the game will be completed) on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as will be described later, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect is always executed, but the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed without the countdown effect being executed.

In the countdown effect in this embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub-liquid crystal is displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops in the display area of the medium pattern becomes 3 seconds. "3" is displayed on the display 35TM300, "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the remaining time reaches 2 seconds, and "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the remaining time reaches 1 second. "1" is displayed, and "0" is displayed at the timing when the remaining time becomes 0 seconds (timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the medium symbol display area). The remaining time until the decoration symbol temporary stop in the countdown effect is displayed by an image imitating a 7-segment display.

Thus, as the time (number of seconds) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the countdown effect, "3", which is set as an initial value, is displayed first. After that, by performing a countdown operation, the time (number of seconds) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 decreases by 1 every second, and when it reaches the final value of "0", The pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the display area of the medium symbols. That is, it is notified that the re-variation will be executed.

In addition, when the variation display is executed based on the variation pattern involving a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects and when it is decided to execute the countdown effect, the countdown effect corresponding to each pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. That is, the countdown effect is executed the same number of times as the pseudo-continuous effect within one variation display period of decorative symbols based on one variation pattern (holding memory).

In this example, the initial value of the countdown effect is "3" regardless of the variation pattern and display result. As a result, when "3" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player immediately starts a countdown until a suggestive effect (in this example, a pseudo-continuous effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. It is possible to grasp that.

(expectation preview performance)
Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the variation display of the special symbol (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). At that time, it may be determined to be a variation pattern with super reach. For example, in a variation pattern involving super reach, after the reach state is established on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a battle effect is executed in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle (FIGS. 13-11 (13) and (18)). ), if the final display result is a big hit (when the jackpot pattern is confirmed and stopped), a victory effect is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, and if the final display result is a loss (the winning pattern is confirmed In the case of stopping), a defeat effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

The expectation degree announcement effect in the present embodiment is an effect for notifying the victory expectation degree (that is, the big win expectation degree) that the ally character wins over the enemy character in the battle effect. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), after the reach state is established (after the battle effect is started), the numerical value bar 35TM610 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the entire width of the numerical value bar 35TM610 is displayed. The percentage of the range (0 to 100%) of the colored part for the winning expectation (big hit expectation) is suggested. The win expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is updated by 10 each time 5 seconds elapse after the initial value is indicated, and finally reaches the final value. When the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 reaches the final value, the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is not updated even after 5 seconds have passed since that timing.

(count-up effect)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a count-up effect in which the degree of expectation for victory is displayed numerically (numbers) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in correspondence with the expectation level announcement effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. . Here, as will be described later, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation level notice effect is always executed. There is also

The count-up effect is to display the win expectation shown by the numerical bar 35TM610 displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a two-digit numerical value (number) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is updated by 10 every five seconds after the initial value is indicated, and finally reaches the final value. When the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is not updated even after 5 seconds have passed since that timing. .

In this way, the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the winning expectation indicated by the numerical value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 match, and the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 Corresponding to the change from the initial value to the final value, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 also changes from the initial value to the final value.

The numerical value as the degree of expectation of winning displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed by an image imitating a 7-segment display as in the case of the countdown effect. However, unlike the countdown production described above, a plurality of initial values and final values are provided for the countup production. It is different. In addition, the display mode is changed according to the degree of victory expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. If it is, it is displayed in blue, and if it is in the range of "80" to "100", it is displayed in red. Furthermore, when the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the numerical value is flashed to inform the player that the winning expectation has reached the final value. I'm trying

In this way, as the degree of expectation of victory displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the count-up presentation, first, a value (50 to 90 in this example) set as an initial value is displayed. After that, by performing a count-up operation based on the determined change pattern (number of times of change), the winning expectation displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 increases by 10 every 5 seconds. When the value (60 to 100 in this example) is reached, the final display mode is entered. That is, the blinking numerical value informs the final degree of expectation for winning (the degree of expectation for big win).

(Production decision processing at the time of fluctuation start)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 determines the display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. Before the display result is derived and displayed, it is determined (predetermined) whether it is a big win or a "lost", and the type of the big win in the case of a "big win". In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), based on the predetermined result of the display result, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using a random number value for determining the variation pattern.

In this embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "loss", the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination table for failure shown in FIG. 13-6(A). In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode and the display result is lost, and the variation pattern is non-reach lost, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode. ) is performed, and a variation pattern of super reach loss is provided. The variation pattern of this super ready-to-win is as follows: a variation pattern of super ready-to-win (no pseudo-run) in which pseudo-continuous performance is not executed; There are provided a pattern and a variation pattern of super reach loss (twice pseudo-continuous) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice.

In the example of FIG. 13-6 (A), 90% is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern, 5% is determined to be a super reach variation (pseudo continuous) variation pattern, and 4% , the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of super reach (1 pseudo-run), and at a rate of 1%, a variation pattern of loss of super reach (2 pseudo-runs) is determined.

Further, in this embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-6(B). In this example, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is the ready-to-win mode, and the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win big win in which the super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) is executed is the super ready-to-win big win (no pseudo-run) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. A variation pattern, a variation pattern of a super ready-to-win jackpot in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once (one pseudo-continuous), and a variation pattern of a super ready-to-win big win in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice (two pseudo-continuous). , is provided.

In the example of FIG. 13-6 (B), 10% of the time it is determined to be a super reach jackpot (no pseudo run) variation pattern, and 40% of the time it is determined to be a super reach jackpot (one pseudo run) variation pattern. , and it will be determined to be a variation pattern of super reach jackpot (pseudo consecutive 2 times) at a rate of 50%.

In this way, when the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the ratio of occurrence of big wins is higher than when the variation pattern of super reach is not selected. In addition, in the variation pattern of super ready-to-win, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit is higher when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed than when the pseudo-continuous performance is not executed, and further, when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed only once. The ratio of occurrence of a big hit is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice than when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the fluctuation pattern of super reach has a relationship of super reach (no pseudo-run)<super reach (one pseudo-run)<super reach (two pseudo-runs).

In this example, an example is shown in which the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed up to two times, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times or more. can be In addition, the number of pseudo-continuous performances that can be selected only when a big win occurs may be provided. A variation pattern for four times in a row) is provided, but a variation pattern for missing super reach (four times in a pseudo run) may not be provided.

When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern command that designates a reach, a pseudo run, etc., is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the variable time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-run, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 13-5 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 13-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect based on the execution ratio determination table of the expectation level announcement effect (see FIGS. 13-6(C) and (D)) (step S35TM1010). .

FIG. 13-6(C) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level announcement effect when the display result is a loss, and is the judgment value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed for each loss variation pattern. is allocated. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out". Also, when the variation pattern is "missing super reach (non-pseudo-running)", it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 90% and to execute it at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the variation pattern is "super reach lost (1 pseudo-run)", it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 80% and to execute it at a rate of 20%. . In addition, when the variation pattern is "missing super reach (twice in pseudo-run)", it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 70%, and to execute it at a rate of 30%. .

FIG. 13-6(D) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level notice effect when the display result is a big win, and is the judgment value for determining whether or not the expectation level notice effect is executed for each of the big win variation patterns. is allocated. The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation level announcement performance at a rate of 40% and executes it at a rate of 60% when the variation pattern is "super ready-to-win jackpot (no pseudo run)". to decide. In addition, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot (one pseudo-run)", it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 30% and to execute it at a rate of 70%. . In addition, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot (pseudo-run 2 times)", it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute it at a rate of 80%. .

In this way, in the case of super ready-to-win, the ratio of execution of the expectation degree announcement effect is higher than in the case of not to be super ready-to-win, and further, in the case of super ready-to-win, the more times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, The rate at which the expectation level announcement effect is executed increases. Then, as described above, the greater the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous performance, the higher the expectation of the big hit. is high.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation level announcement effect (YES in step S35TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 changes the final display mode (final value) of the expectation level announcement effect to the final display of the expectation level announcement effect. Determined based on the mode determination table (see FIG. 13-6(E)) (step S35TM1030). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect (NO in step S35TM1020), the process proceeds to step S35TM1090, which will be described later.

FIG. 13-6(E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode of the expectation level announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 13-6(E), in this embodiment, according to the display result, the final display mode of the expectation degree announcement effect is "60", "70", "80", "90", and Any numerical value of "100" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these numerical values.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the final The display mode is "60" at a rate of 40%, "70" at a rate of 30%, "80" at a rate of 20%, "90" at a rate of 10%, and "90" at a rate of 0%. 100”. On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), the final display mode of the expectation level notice effect is " 60" at a rate of 15%, "70" at a rate of 30%, "80" at a rate of 30%, "90" at a rate of 45%, and "100" at a rate of 1%.

In this manner, the final display mode of the expectation degree announcement effect is such that the greater the degree of victory expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 (ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width of the numerical bar 35TM610), the greater the hit. The ratio is high, and the degree of expectation for a big hit has a relationship of "60"<"70"<"80"<"90"<"100". In addition, when the final display mode of the expectation degree announcement effect becomes "100", it is determined that a big win will occur.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation level announcement effect based on the display mode change pattern determination table of the expectation level announcement effect (see FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G)). (Step S35TM1040).

FIGS. 13-6F and 13-6G are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the display mode change pattern of the expectation level announcement effect. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the expectation level announcement effect is to be executed and the final display mode of the expectation level announcement effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the determined final display mode. Any initial value (first display mode) is determined. In this example, any one of "50", "60", "70", "80", and "90" can be determined as the initial value of the expectation level notice effect. A judgment value is assigned to each.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (F), if the display result is "missing" (that is, if the determination result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the determined expectation level notice effect When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is 1). That is, when the final display mode is "60", since there is no change pattern other than the change pattern for changing from the minimum initial value of "50" to the final value of "60", the ratio is 100%. , the initial value is determined to be "50".

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation degree announcement effect is "70", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is set at a rate of 60%. The value is determined to be "60" (1 change). In addition, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation degree announcement effect is "80", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 3 times), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 50% (the number of changes is 1). In addition, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation degree announcement effect is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 10% (the number of changes is 4), and the initial value is set at a rate of 20%. The value is determined to be "60" (3 times of change), 30% of the time the initial value is determined to be "70" (2 times of change), and 40% of the time the initial value is determined to be "80". (1 change).

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (G), when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the determined expectation level notice effect When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is 1). That is, when the final display mode is "60", since there is no change pattern other than the change pattern for changing from the minimum initial value of "50" to the final value of "60", the ratio is 100%. , the initial value is determined to be "50".

In addition, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation degree announcement effect is "70", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 60% (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is set at a rate of 40%. The value is determined to be "60" (1 change). In addition, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation degree announcement effect is "80", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 50% (the number of changes is 3 times), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 1). In addition, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation degree announcement effect is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 4), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (3 times of change), 20% of the time the initial value is determined to be "70" (2 times of change), and 10% of the time the initial value is determined to be "80". (1 change). In addition, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation degree announcement effect is "100", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 35% (the number of changes is 5), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (4 times of change), 20% of the time the initial value is determined to be "70" (3 times of change), and 10% of the time the initial value is determined to be "80". (2 times of change), the initial value is determined to be "90" at a rate of 5% (1 time of change).

After determining the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation degree previous notice effect in this manner, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect corresponding to the execution of the expectation degree previous notice effect (step S35TM1050). ). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect based on the table for determining whether or not to execute the count-up effect shown in FIG. 13-7(H).

As shown in FIG. 13-7(H), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the count-up effect differs depending on the display result. 20, when the display result is "no" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "no"), the count-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%; Decide to run at a rate of %. On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the count-up effect at a rate of 25%. , 75% of the time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the expectation degree announcement effect is executed, there are times when the count-up effect is executed and times when the count-up effect is not executed, and when the count-up effect is executed , the ratio of winning a big hit is higher than when the count-up effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation level announcement effect is always executed.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the count-up effect (YES in step S35TM1060), it determines the final display mode of the count-up effect (step S35TM1070), and further changes the display mode of the count-up effect. Patterns and initial values are determined (step S35TM1080). Then, the process proceeds to step S35TM1090. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the count-up effect (NO in step S35TM1060), the process directly proceeds to step S35TM1090.

Here, as described above, the degree of winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation degree announcement effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (ratio (0 % to 100%)) and the degree of expectation of victory indicated by a numerical value in the count-up effect executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 are matched. Therefore, the final value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the degree of expectation of victory finally indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the degree of expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1030 (step S35TM1070). Also, the pattern of change in the degree of expectation of victory shown as a numerical value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same pattern as the pattern of change in the degree of expectation of victory indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation degree announcement effect, that is, the pattern determined in step S35TM1040. (Step S35TM1080). In addition, the initial value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the degree of expectation of victory initially indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the degree of expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1040 (step S35TM1080).

In this embodiment, the display mode of the expectation degree announcement effect and the display mode of the count-up effect corresponding thereto are increased by 10 from the first display mode (initial value) to the final display mode (final value). Assuming that the initial value is "n", each change changes step by step to the final value, such as "n+10", "n+20", "n+30", . In addition, the change pattern of the expectation level notice effect and the corresponding change pattern of the count-up effect change at least once (10) from the initial display mode (initial value). When the display mode (initial value) is "n", the minimum value of the final display mode (final value) is "n+10".

As shown in FIG. 13-6(E), with respect to the expectation level announcement effect and the corresponding count-up effect, the higher the final value of the win expectation level, the higher the big win expectation level. Here, the big win expectation differs according to the initial value determined based on the final value of the winning expectation, that is, according to the change pattern and the number of times of change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), when the final value of the winning expectation is "90", when the initial value is "50" (4 times of change), the big hit expectation is the highest, and when the initial value is "60" (3 times of change), the expectation of big hit is the second highest, and when the initial value is "70" (2 times of change), the expectation of big hit is 3 It is the second highest, and when the initial value is "80" (the number of changes is 1), the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. Thus, when the final value of the winning expectation is "N (70 ≤ N)", the jackpot expectation is the highest when the initial value is "50", and when the initial value is "N-10" has the lowest jackpot expectations. That is, the greater the variation from the initial value of the win expectation (the greater the number of times of change), the higher the expectation of a big win.

As described above, with respect to the expectation degree notice effect and the corresponding count-up effect, the degree of expectation for the big hit differs according to the initial value and the change pattern (the number of times of change). The initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when executed, and the initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when the count-up effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 correspondingly. can draw attention.

At step S35TM1090, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo continuous effect. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed one or more times during the variable display period of the decorative symbols to be started. If the variation pattern does not involve a pseudo continuous effect (YES in step S35TM1090), the variation start time effect determination process is terminated. If the variation pattern accompanies a pseudo-continuous effect (NO in step S35TM1090), it determines whether or not the countdown effect is to be executed (step S35TM1100), and ends the effect determination process at the time of variation start.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(I), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the countdown effect differs depending on the display result. When the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 55%, and 45%. decided to run at a rate of On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 40%, We decide to run at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, there are times when the countdown effect is executed and times when the countdown effect is not executed, and when the countdown effect is executed, the countdown effect is not executed. The probability of winning a big hit is higher than when it is not executed. On the other hand, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), when the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 executes the count-up effect corresponding to the expectation level advance notice effect, the count-down effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect is executed. The expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is done. As a result, the player pays attention to which effect, the count-up effect or the count-down effect, is executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, thereby enhancing the interest in the effect of updating the numerical value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. can be made

As for the degree of expectation for the big win, the degree of expectation for the big win is highest when both the countdown performance and the countup performance are executed, and the second big win is expected when the countdown performance is not executed but the countup performance is executed. A case where the expectation is high and the countdown performance is executed but the countup performance is not executed has the third highest degree of expectation for the big win, and the case where neither the countdown performance nor the countup performance is executed has the lowest degree of expectation for the big win. It's becoming

(Specific examples of countdown effect and countup effect)
Next, specific examples of the countdown effect and the countup effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-8 to 13-11. 13-8 is a time chart when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed, and FIGS. 13-9 to 13-11 are the main liquid crystal display when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on a display device 35TM200 and a sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300;

In the example shown below, it is determined to be a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, it is determined that the expectation level notice effect is executed, and both the countdown effect and the countup effect are performed. It is assumed that it has been decided that the performance will be executed.

First, FIG. 13-9(1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing variable display of left, middle, and right decorative patterns (variable display started at timing T1 shown in FIG. 13-8). showing. At this time, nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, but a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, thereby displaying the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. , the entire character is displayed. Further, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position overlapping the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front and rear in a front view.

At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. It is possible to view the screen of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 itself.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9(2), the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. (at the timing of T2A shown in FIG. 13-8), according to the timing of 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-continuous pattern determined based on the variation pattern Then, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays the initial value of the countdown effect ("3" in white mode in this example), thereby starting the first countdown effect.

Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the rendering position (T2A to T2B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production positions where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear directions, and the visibility of the lower portion of the screen on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 was reduced. state.

Then, at the timing (timing T3 in FIG. 13-8) after one second has passed from the timing T2A in FIG. In the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the 35TM200, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the countdown operation to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed. to display the updated value (“2” in white mode in this example).

Then, at the timing (timing of T4 in FIG. 13-8) after one second has passed from the timing of T3 in FIG. In the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the 35TM200, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the countdown operation to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed. to display the updated value (“1” in white mode in this example).

Next, at the timing (timing T5 in FIG. 13-8) after one second has elapsed from the timing of T4 in FIG. 13-8, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern (in this example, the number pattern "2") is temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5L of 35TM200, and a decorative pattern (in this example, the number pattern "4") is temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5R. Then, the pseudo consecutive symbols 35TM600 are temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, in accordance with the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns 35TM600 temporarily stop in the pattern display area 5C, a countdown operation is performed to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1, and the final value after updating (in this example, "0" in white mode) is displayed.

Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T6A to T6B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 have been displaced to the original positions where they overlap the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear directions, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

Next, at timing (timing T6B in FIG. 13-8) one second after timing T5 in FIG. 13-8, the pattern display area 5L of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as shown in FIG. , in the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the first re-variation display of the decorative symbols is executed, and the first countdown effect is terminated. In this example, the value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 ("0" in white mode in this example) is erased, and the value relating to the countdown effect is returned to a state in which it is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position overlapping the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front and rear in a front view.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. (at the timing of T7A shown in FIG. 13-8), the timing is 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-continuous pattern determined based on the variation pattern. Then, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays the initial value of the countdown effect ("3" in white mode in this example), thereby starting the second countdown effect.

Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the rendering position (T7A to T7B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production positions where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear directions, and the visibility of the lower portion of the screen on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 was reduced. state.

Next, at the timing (timing T8 in FIG. 13-8) one second after the timing of T7A in FIG. In the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the 35TM200, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, the countdown operation to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed. to display the updated value (“2” in white mode in this example).

Next, at the timing (timing T9 in FIG. 13-8) after one second has passed from the timing T8 in FIG. In the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the 35TM200, while executing the variable display of decorative patterns, the countdown operation to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed. to display the updated value (“1” in white mode in this example).

Next, at the timing (timing of T10 in FIG. 13-8) after one second has elapsed from the timing of T9 in FIG. A decorative pattern (in this example, the number pattern "3") is temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5L of 35TM200, and a decorative pattern (in this example, the number pattern "5") is temporarily stopped in the pattern display area 5R. Then, the pseudo consecutive symbols 35TM600 are temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, in accordance with the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns 35TM600 temporarily stop in the pattern display area 5C, a countdown operation is performed to decrease the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1, and the final value after updating (in this example, "0" in white mode) is displayed.

Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T11A to T11B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 have been displaced to the original positions where they overlap the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear directions, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

Next, at timing (timing T11B in FIG. 13-8) one second after timing T10 in FIG. 13-8, (11) in FIG. In the area 5C and the pattern display area 5R, the second re-variation display of decorative patterns is executed, and the second countdown presentation is ended. In this example, the value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 ("0" in white mode in this example) is erased, and the value relating to the countdown effect is returned to a state in which it is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position overlapping the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front and rear in a front view.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing to establish the reach state in the variation pattern. ” is displayed in a stopped state, and characters of “READY!!” are displayed on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing of T12 in FIG. 13-8).

Then, after the ready-to-win state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect according to the variation pattern of super ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (13). Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is caused to display the friend character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 (timing of T13 in FIG. 13-8).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing (timing of T14A in FIG. 13-8) immediately after the battle effect is started based on the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. is executed and a count-up effect is executed. That is, in accordance with the start of the expectation degree announcement effect, the battle effect is temporarily interrupted to hide the friend character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters "expectation of victory" and , the numeric bar 35TM610 is displayed, and the determined initial value is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the count-up effect is started.

In this example, it is assumed that the initial value of the expectation degree announcement effect and the count-up effect is determined to be 70, and the final value is determined to be 90 (that is, the change pattern of 2 changes is determined). Based on this, initially, the percentage of the colored portion in the numerical bar 35TM610 is "70"% of the entire bar, and "70" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is in the range of "50" to "70", the numerical value "70" is displayed in blue on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

At the same time as starting the count-up effect, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the effect position (T14A-T14B). As a result, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and attention is paid to the initial value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the change pattern from the initial value to the final value as the count-up effect is executed. can be made The timing for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the presentation position to improve the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is before the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. or after the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Then, at the timing (timing T15 in FIG. 13-8) five seconds after the timing of T14A in FIG. A count-up operation that updates the ratio of the colored portion from "70"% to "80"% of the entire bar and increases the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 from "70" to "80" by 10. (first change). In response to the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of "80" to "100", the numerical value "80" is displayed in red on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. .

Next, at the timing (timing of T16 in FIG. 13-8) five seconds after the timing of T15 in FIG. A count-up operation that updates the ratio of the colored portion from "80"% to "90"% of the entire bar and increases the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 from "80" to "90" by 10. (2nd change). In response to the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of "80" to "100", the numerical value "90" is displayed in red on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. .

Next, at the timing of 5 seconds after the timing of T16 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T17 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. When the colored portion reaches the final value ("90"% of the entire bar), the display mode is not changed, and the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value ("90%"). ”), the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is blinked (“90” is blinked in red mode). As a result, the player is informed that the display mode of the expectation degree announcement effect and the count-up effect has reached the final display mode, and that no further update will be performed.

Thus, in this embodiment, at the timing when the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value ("90"), the fact that the numerical value has reached the final value is not immediately notified (see FIG. 13). (T16) in -8 and not flashing immediately at the timing of Figure 13-11 (16)), in a mode (non-blinking mode) that suggests that there is a possibility of change for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) After that, it is made to indicate that the final value has been reached (changes to a blinking mode at the timings of (T17) in FIG. 13-8 and (17) in FIG. 13-11). By doing so, the player cannot immediately grasp whether or not the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value, that is, whether or not there is room for further change. Interest can be maintained in the numbers displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves the decoration bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin positions (T18A to T18B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 have been displaced to the original positions where they overlap the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear directions, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. ing.

Next, at the timing (timing of T18B in FIG. 13-8) five seconds after the timing of T17 in FIG. Then, the count-up effect is terminated, and the battle effect is restarted to display the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 again. With the end of the expectation level announcement effect, the characters "expectation level of victory" and the numerical bar 35TM610 disappear from the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the numerical value indicating the degree of victory expectation disappears from the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as described above, at T18A to T18B in FIG. 13-8, the ornaments of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position, so the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 The visibility is improved, and the player can concentrate on the battle production.

In this way, the countdown effect accompanied by the subtraction operation of the displayed numerical value shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 13-10 (7) to (10), (17) can be executed in the common sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the numerical updating operation executed in the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be performed. It is possible to diversify the accompanying effects and improve the interest of the effects executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300.

In addition, a countdown effect and a count-up effect are provided as effects involving different types of update operations (subtraction, addition), and each type of effect is indicated by an image imitating a 7-segment display. By executing such effects on the common sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to provide consistency in the effects, and to effectively use the common display area to display multiple types of effects. can be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the countdown effect is executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 from three seconds before the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In response to the execution of the expectation level announcement effect on the liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 executes the count-up effect simultaneously with the expectation level announcement effect. In this way, a countdown effect is provided corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect as one of the effects suggesting the degree of expectation for the big hit, and a count-up effect is provided corresponding to the expectation level advance notice effect as the other effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win. is provided to clarify the correspondence between the effects.

In this embodiment, the operations executed by the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 include a countdown operation corresponding to the simulated continuous effect and a countup operation corresponding to the expectation level notice effect. The former action causes the numerical value to decrease, and the latter action causes the numerical value to increase. It can be clearly distinguished from the corresponding production.

Also, in the countdown effect, 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous pattern 35TM600 temporarily stops, "3" is displayed as the initial value, and 1 is subtracted each time one second elapses. In this updating method, immediately after the start of the battle effect, any one of "50" to "90" is displayed as an initial value, and 10 is added every five seconds. In this way, by varying the initial value and change pattern of each effect executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player can easily grasp which effect is being executed. Furthermore, by making the subtraction period of the countdown effect (1 second in this example) and the addition period of the countup effect (5 seconds in this example) different, the player can determine which effect is executed. It is possible to easily grasp whether the

Even if the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countdown effect is executed are different from the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countup effect is executed. Better, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countdown effect is executed may be different from the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countup effect is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, since the numerical range "0 to 3" in the countdown effect and the numerical range "50 to 100" in the countup effect do not overlap, the effect being executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding regarding. Note that the numerical range in the countdown effect and the numerical value range in the countup effect may partially overlap, for example, the countdown effect is subtracted from the initial value "10". Alternatively, the count-up effect may be increased from the initial value "10". According to this, when the initial value is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to draw attention to which effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the countdown effect, the numerical values are displayed in white regardless of the numerical range. On the other hand, in the count-up effect, the numerical value is displayed in blue mode ("50" to "70") or red mode ("80" to "100") according to the numerical range, and the final value is displayed in blinking mode. . In this way, the difference between the countdown effect and the countup effect can be made clearer by making the display mode of the numerical values during the execution of the countdown effect different from the display mode of the numerical values during the execution of the countup effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, within one variable display period, the countdown effect is executed in the periods T2A to T6B and T7A to T11B in FIG. 13-8, and the period T14A to T18B in FIG. is performing a count-up effect. In this way, the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed at different timings so that the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the countup effect do not overlap (when one effect is being executed, the other effect is executed. By preventing the production from being executed), the production can be prevented from becoming complicated, and both the production of the countdown production and the production of the countup can be executed in a common area (the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in this example).

In addition, in this embodiment, the number bar 35TM610 is displayed in a manner that matches the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, which is different from the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 on which the count-up effect is executed. will be That is, the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect and the proportion of the colored portion in the numerical bar 35TM610 match. In this way, the degree of expectation for winning, which is common production information, is displayed in different modes using different displays such as the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, thereby further enhancing the production effect. can.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a countdown effect and a countup effect are executed as effects related to the display result of the variable display being executed. A countdown effect or a countup effect may be executed as the look-ahead foretelling effect related to the display result of the non-variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the number of remaining variable display times until the variable display (target variation) based on the starting winning is executed is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 every time the variable display is performed. You may make it perform the production|presentation which counts down to. In addition, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, until the variation display (target variation) based on the starting winning is executed, the target variation jackpot expectation is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 every time the variation display is performed. You may make it perform the production|presentation which counts up to. As in these examples, the countdown effect and the countup effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a decorative symbol suggesting that the decorative symbol will be changed again, is temporarily stopped. This is not limited to such a form, and when a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern consisting of numbers) that can appear or can be fixed and stopped even when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed (for example, combinations in which the left, middle, and right symbols are "2", "4", and "6") may be temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when temporarily stopping the decorative symbols, first, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped, and then the middle symbol is finally temporarily stopped. However, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern may be temporarily stopped at the same time.

(3) In the above embodiment, the initial value of the countdown effect is always "3" (the countdown effect is started 3 seconds before the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern 35TM600). A plurality of initial values may be selectable at different ratios according to variation patterns or display results without being limited to the form. For example, when the number of pseudo-runs is 1, the ratio of the initial value of "3" in the first countdown effect is 80%, and the ratio of the initial value of "5" is 20%. In the case where the number of pseudo-runs is two, the ratio of the initial value of "3" in the first countdown effect is 20%, and the ratio of the initial value of "5" is 80%. can be In addition, when the display result is a loss, the ratio of the initial value of "3" in the countdown effect is 80%, and the ratio of the initial value of "5" is 20%. In the countdown effect, the ratio of "3" as the initial value may be 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value may be 80%.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the variation pattern of super ready-to-win with two pseudo-continuous effects is determined and when it is decided to execute the countdown effect, two pseudo-continuous effects are performed. An example in which the countdown effect corresponding to each is executed (the same number of countdown effects as the pseudo-continuous effect is executed) has been shown, but not limited to this form, the super reach with two pseudo-continuous effects. When the variation pattern is determined, there is an effect pattern in which the countdown effect is executed for one pseudo-continuous effect, while the countdown effect is not executed for the other pseudo-continuous effect. You can do it.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the pseudo-continuous effect was always executed when the countdown effect was executed. There may be cases where the performance is not executed. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation level notice effect is always executed. There may be cases where the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed.

(6) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the countup effect on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 using an image that simulates a 7-segment display. Not limited to such a form, an actual 7-segment display is provided in place of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, and by controlling light emission of the 7-segment display, the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the countup effect can be obtained. may be displayed (lighted).

(7) In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled in the time saving state (time saving number of times) and the remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in the probability changing state (ST (special time) number of times) , the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, etc., can be displayed. During the period when the information (numerical value) regarding these game states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the countdown effect or the count up is performed more than the period when the information (numerical value) regarding these game states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. You may make it the ratio which performance is performed becomes low. According to such a configuration, in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state is restricted, thereby making it easier for the player. The important latter can be preferentially notified.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 executes the countdown effect in response to the pseudo consecutive notice effect as the first suggestive effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 An example is shown in which the count-up effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the expectation level notice effect as the second suggestion effect to be executed. Not limited to such a form, a countdown effect is executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect, and a countdown effect is executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect (for example, the remaining time until the expectation level notice effect is counted down). ). Conversely, the count-up effect may be executed in correspondence with the second suggestion effect, and the count-up effect may be executed in correspondence with the first suggestion effect. In this way, the numerical value updating motion corresponding to the first suggestive effect and the numerical value updating motion corresponding to the second suggestive effect may be common motions.

In addition, there are a case where a countdown effect is executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect and a case where a countup effect is executed, and a case where the countup effect is executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect and a case where the countdown is executed. There may be cases where the performance is executed. In this way, an effect involving different types of actions may be executed in correspondence with a common suggestive effect.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, both the countdown effect and the countup effect are sub-display devices that are different from the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 on which the pseudo-continuous effect and the expectation level notice effect as suggestive effects are executed. Although an example of execution on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and either one or both of the countdown effect and the countup effect can be executed as a suggestive effect, i.e., a simulated continuous effect and an expectation notice effect. may be executed in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, in the countdown effect, an example of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped has been shown. Alternatively, for example, the remaining time until the movable accessories such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operate may be subtracted and updated. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the count-up effect, an example of adding and updating the numerical value related to the degree of expectation of a big hit has been shown, but the numerical value related to other indicators may be added and updated. The elapsed time after the movable accessories such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move to the performance positions may be added and updated.

(example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value and a countup effect of adding a numerical value, and it is possible to execute the countdown effect and the countup effect in the sub-liquid crystal display, which is a common area. Although the pachinko game machine 1 has been exemplified as such a game machine, the game machine with such a configuration is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1, and may be a slot machine.

A slot machine is equipped with a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) on which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn as identification information on the outer periphery. A player sets the number of bets (1 to 3 medals), operates a start lever to start spinning each reel, and the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel. , the rotation is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing. Winning occurs according to the display result derived when all the reels stop rotating (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

As the types of wins, there are types such as small wins, special wins, and replay wins. Here, in winning a small winning combination, the player can obtain the benefit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small winning combination. Winning a special role allows the player to obtain the benefit of being shifted to a game state advantageous to the player such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB) from the next game. Winning a replaying combination provides the advantage that the next game can be played without consuming new medals for setting the number of bets.

In such a slot machine, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the amount of reduction in the game value by increasing the winning probability of the replaying combination as compared to the normal time as an advantageous state for the player after the bonus is completed. Some replay times (referred to as RT) are controlled, and the RT is terminated when an end condition including winning a predetermined falling winning combination is satisfied. In addition, there is a system in which the effect state can be controlled during an assist time (referred to as AT), which is a notification period during which a navigation effect (for example, guiding the pressing order) for informing the internal lottery result can be executed. Also, the state in which the game state is RT and the effect state is controlled to be AT is also called assist replay time (ART). By the main control unit setting flags corresponding to each game state, winning combination, etc., and executing processing corresponding to the set flags (including transmission of effect control commands to the sub-control unit) Game control is performed.

The role lottery, the AT lottery, the RT lottery, the ART lottery, and the AT, RT, and ART extra lottery are stored in the RAM, for example, at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated). It is performed based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag being played, and the winning flag of the winning combination is stored. Whether or not the winning combination is actually established is determined by the winning flag stored in the RAM, the operation timing of the stop button, and the like.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second display device. , a first logo panel 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420, which are light-transmissive decorative bodies, were provided. A sub-liquid crystal display device may be provided as a display device, and a first logo panel and a second logo panel, which are light-transmitting decorations, may be provided as movable bodies.

In such a slot machine, the sub-control unit controls the remaining number of times controllable to the AT state (AT number of times), the remaining number of times controllable to the RT state (RT number of times), and the controllable number of times to the ART state on the sub liquid crystal display. The remaining number of times (ART number of times) and the like can be displayed. During the period when the information (numerical value) regarding these game states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display, the countdown effect or count up effect is more effective than the period when the information (numerical value) regarding these game states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. It may be executed less frequently. According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state on the sub-liquid crystal display device, thereby making it more important for the player. priority can be given to the latter.

(Example of related effects, etc. related to the execution status of suggestive effects)
Next, an example of executing a related effect related to the execution status of the suggestive effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state will be described. In the example shown below, a music ready-to-win effect and a cut-in notice effect can be executed as suggestive effects. In addition, a count display effect can be executed as a related effect related to the execution status of the music ready-to-win effect. Also, a timer effect can be executed as a effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. Each of these effects will be specifically described below.

(Music Reach production)
The music ready-to-win effect is an effect that can be executed when the variation pattern of super ready-to-win is selected as the variation pattern, and is a suggestive effect to be executed as one type of super ready-to-win effect after establishment of the ready-to-win state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-15(3) to 13-15(6) and FIGS. At the same time, it is an effect of displaying an image in a mode corresponding to the reproduction time of the music on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200.

In this embodiment, on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, images of characters (A to C) corresponding to the reproduction time of music and images of notes (35TM700 to 35TM720) corresponding to the reproduction time of music are displayed. In the first stage of Music Reach production (music playback time period of 1 to 15 seconds), one character (character A) and one type of note (note 35TM700) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, In the second stage of music reach production (music playback time period of 16 to 30 seconds), the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays two characters (character A, character B) and two types of notes (note 35TM700, note 35TM710) is displayed, and in the third stage of music reach production (music playback time period of 31 to 60 seconds), the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays three characters (character A, character B, character C) and Three kinds of notes (note 35TM700, note 35TM710, note 35TM720) are displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-13, which will be described later, the MUSIC READY presentation is divided into three cases: the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage (when the music is output to the end). ), and it is determined in advance to which stage progress is made according to the display result and the variation pattern. When the musical ready-to-win production progresses to the second stage, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when it ends in the first stage, and when it progresses to the third stage, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when it ends in the second stage. is high. As the relationship between the final number of stages of the music ready-to-win effect and the degree of expectation for a big hit, the relationship of first stage<second stage<third stage is established.

The timing at which the reproduction of the music related to the music ready-to-win effect is started is the timing before the timing at which the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped by the music reproduction time. Therefore, when the music ready-to-win production ends at the first stage, the reproduction of the music is started 15 seconds before the decoration pattern is decided and stopped, and the decoration pattern is decided and stopped at the timing when the music is reproduced for 15 seconds. will do. In addition, when the music ready-to-win production ends in the second stage, the reproduction of the music is started 30 seconds before the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped, and the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped at the timing when the music is reproduced for 30 seconds. will do. Also, when the Music Reach production ends at the third stage (when the song is played to the end), the song will start playing 60 seconds before the decoration pattern is confirmed and stopped, and the song will be played for 60 seconds. The decorative pattern is determined and stopped at the timing of reproduction (timing at which the music is reproduced to the end).

With such an effect configuration, when the reproduction of the music related to the music ready-to-win effect is started, the player expects the music to be reproduced as long as possible before the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped.

(Count display effect)
The count display effect is related to the execution status of the Music Reach effect, and is shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) to (6) and FIGS. As shown, this is an effect in which the reproduction time of the music in the Music Reach effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Specifically, the effect is to display the elapsed time (number of seconds) from the start of playback of the music on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. I'm trying

The initial value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the count display effect is "1", and the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is updated by 1 each time one second elapses. In this manner, in the counting display effect, the operation of adding and updating the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by one every second is performed. As a result, the player is notified of the reproduction time of the music in the MUSIC READY production. Therefore, the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the first stage is "15", and the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the second stage is "30". The final value of the count display effect becomes "60" when the music reach effect progresses to the third stage.

With such an effect configuration, the player can clearly grasp the reproduction period after the start of the music. By understanding that the longer the music reproduction period is, the higher the expectation of a big hit becomes, the user expects that the numerical value (music reproduction time) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 will increase as much as possible. .

The numerical value (playback time) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 may be displayed differently depending on the range of the value (reproduction time). In the range of 16-30, the numerical value is displayed in red, and in the range of 31-60, the red numerical value may be further blinked.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect is a effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 13-20 (10), which will be described later, when another effect such as a super reach effect (music reach effect) is being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, This is an advance notice effect executed in a display mode with a high priority. As the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (“CHANCE” and “Gekietsu”) with different displayed characters, and the ratio of selecting each effect mode differs according to the display result (Fig. 13-13(F)).

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another suggestive effect, etc., is being displayed, suddenly, a display mode with a higher priority than the image related to another suggestive effect, etc. Since a cut-in image that seems to be displayed on the front side of the image related to the suggestion effect etc. is displayed, the user will be attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. In addition, the player is also interested in in which one of the plurality of presentation modes the cut-in notice effect is executed.

(timer effect)
The timer effect is an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and is an effect of displaying the remaining time (number of seconds) until the cut-in notice effect is executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. As shown in FIGS. 13-19(6) to 13-20(9) described later, the timer effect is a cut-in notice effect (a cut-in image of "CHANCE" or "Gekietsu" is displayed). 3 seconds before, and first, "3" is displayed as an initial value in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The numerical value displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is updated by subtracting 1 every second, and the cut-in image is displayed when the numerical value becomes "0".

Thus, the timer effect is a effect executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, which is different from the display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300) where the count display effect is executed, and is different from the count display effect. As an operation, it is an effect that performs a subtraction operation of the remaining time until the start of the suggestive effect (countdown operation until the execution of the cut-in notice effect). Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the cut-in announcement effect is executed, the timer effect is always executed.

(Production decision processing at the time of fluctuation start)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 determines the display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. Before the display result is derived and displayed, it is determined (predetermined) whether it is a big win or a "lost", and the type of the big win in the case of a "big win". In addition, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111), based on the predetermined result of the display result, the fluctuation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "loss", the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination table for failure shown in FIG. 13-13(A). In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode and the display result is lost, and the non-reach-lost variation pattern, and the normal reach where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode and the display result is lost. A winning variation pattern and a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the variable display mode of decorative symbols is a ready-to-win mode and a super ready-to-win effect is executed to result in a losing display result are provided.

In the example of FIG. 13-13 (A), 90% of the time it is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern, 8% of the time it is determined to be a normal reach variation pattern, and 2% of the time it is a super reach variation. pattern will be determined.

Further, in this embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-13(B). In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the ready-to-win mode and the display result is a big win, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the ready-to-win mode and the display result is the super ready-to-win effect. A variation pattern of a super reach jackpot that becomes a jackpot is provided.

In the example of FIG. 13-13(B), the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 95%.

In this way, when the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the ratio of occurrence of big wins is higher than when the variation pattern of super reach is not selected. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation pattern of the present embodiment has a relationship of normal reach<super reach.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (A) and (B), non-reach, normal reach, and super reach are provided as fluctuation patterns, but the above-described FIG. 13-6 (A) and As shown in (B), as a super reach variation pattern, a super reach without a pseudo-continuation effect (no pseudo-continuation), a super reach with one pseudo-continuation effect (one pseudo-continuation), and a plurality of times A super reach (twice in a pseudo-continuation) accompanied by a pseudo-continuation effect may be provided.

As described above, when starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first A reservation memory number subtraction designation command or a second reservation memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 .

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern command that designates a reach, a pseudo run, etc., is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the variable time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-run, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 13-12 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. Unlike the process shown in FIG. 13-5, this fluctuation start effect determination process determines whether or not to execute the music ready-to-win effect, the count display effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect, and the mode of execution.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 13-12.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the Music Ready-to-win effect and the final stage in the case of executing the Music Ready-to-win effect using the final stage determination table (Figs. 13-13 (C) and (D)). (see step S35TM2010).

FIG. 13-13(C) shows the execution ratio of the Music Ready-to-win effect when the display result is a loss, and the determination for determining whether or not to execute the Music Ready-to-win effect and the final stage for each change pattern for losing. value is assigned. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the music ready-to-win effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach loss". Also, when the variation pattern is "no normal reach", it is determined that the music reach effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. Also, if the variation pattern is "super reach failure", it is decided not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute up to the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 20%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 10%.

FIG. 13-13(D) shows the execution ratio of the Music Ready-to-Win effect when the display result is a big hit, and is the determination for determining whether or not to execute the Music Ready-to-Win effect and the final stage for each of the big win variation patterns. value is assigned. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". Also, if the variation pattern is "super ready-to-win", it is decided not to execute the music ready-to-win effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute up to the first stage of the music ready-to-win effect at a rate of 10%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 30%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 40%.

In this way, when the final stage of the Music Reach production is the second stage (music reproduction period is up to 15 seconds), the final stage of the Music Reach production is the second stage (music reproduction period is up to 15 seconds). is up to 30 seconds), the expectation of a big hit is higher. In addition, when the final stage of the Music Reach production is the third stage (the music reproduction period is 60 seconds), the final stage of the Music Reach production is the second stage (the music reproduction period is up to 30 seconds). seconds, and the song is played to the end), the expectation of a big hit is higher. That is, regarding the degree of reliability of the music ready-to-win effect (the degree of expectation for a big hit), the relationship of the first stage<the second stage<the third stage is established.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the music ready-to-win effect (YES in step S35TM2020), it determines to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the MUSIC READY effect (NO in step S35TM2020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2040).

In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 executes the count display production at a rate of 100% when the MUSIC READY production is executed, and 100% when the MUSIC READY production is not executed. It is set so as not to execute the count display effect at the rate of %.

Here, the numerical value update period in the count display effect matches the music playback period in the music ready-to-win effect. Therefore, when it is decided to end the Music Ready-to-Win effect in the first stage, the final value in the count display effect is determined to be "15", and when it is decided to end the Music Ready-to-Win effect in the second stage. determines the final value in the count display effect to be "30", and determines the final value in the count display effect to be "60" when it is decided to end the music ready-to-win effect in the third stage. Thus, the final value of the count display effect is determined based on the final stage of the Music Reach effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-13(E)) (step S35TM2050).

FIG. 13-13(E) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, in which judgment values for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed are assigned corresponding to whether or not the count display effect is executed. there is The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 45% and to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 55% when not executing the count display performance. Further, when executing the count display effect, it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 98%, but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 2%.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S35TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect to the effect mode determination table of the cut-in notice effect (Fig. 13). -13(F)) (step S35TM2070). On the other hand, if it is decided not to execute the cut-in announcement effect (NO in step S35TM2060), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 13-13(F), in this embodiment, the judgment values are assigned so that the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect differs according to the display result. When the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect (characters of the cut-in image) is 80%. , the first mode "CHANCE", and 20%, the second mode "Super heat". On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the effect mode of cut-in notice effect (characters of cut-in image) is , 20% of the time it becomes the first mode "CHANCE", and 80% of the time it becomes the second mode "Super heat".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the timer effect in response to the cut-in notice effect (step S35TM2080), and ends the process as it is.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, it is decided to execute the timer effect at a rate of 100%. It matches the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect shown. As shown in FIG. 13-13(E), when the count display effect is executed, the cut-in notice effect is executed less frequently than when the count display effect is not executed. That is, when the count display effect is executed, the ratio of the timer effect to be executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed.

In the present embodiment, when both the count display effect and the timer effect are executed, the execution period of the count display effect and the execution period of the timer effect overlap. Therefore, a plurality of types of operations, namely, the operation of adding and updating the playback time of the music and the operation of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the cut-in image is displayed, are performed in parallel. As a result, there is a risk that the presentation will become complicated and confuse the player. In the present embodiment, when the count display effect is being executed, the execution ratio of the timer effect is made lower than when the count display effect is not being executed, thereby diversifying the effect while achieving both effects. Simultaneous execution is restricted to suppress complication of production.

(Specific example of count display effect corresponding to Music Reach effect)
Next, a specific example of the count display effect corresponding to the Music Reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15. FIGS. 13-14 are time charts showing the execution timing of each effect when the count display effect corresponding to the MUSIC READY effect is executed and the timer effect is not executed, and FIGS. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the count display effect is executed and the timer effect is not executed;

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 determines the third stage as the final stage of the music reach effect based on the super reach variation pattern, and sets the numerical value of the music playback time accordingly. It is assumed that it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect while deciding to execute the count display effect to update to 60.例文帳に追加

First, FIG. 13-15(1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing variable display of left, middle and right ornamental patterns (variable display started at timing T1 shown in FIG. 13-14). showing. At this time, nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, but a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, thereby displaying the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. , the entire character is displayed. Further, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position overlapping the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front and rear in a front view.

At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. It is possible to view the screen of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 itself.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing at which the ready-to-reach state in the variation pattern should be established. ” is displayed in a stopped state, and characters “READY!!” are displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIGS. 13-14).

Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the music ready-to-win production in response to establishment of the ready-to-win state. FIG. 13-15(3) shows a state in which the first stage of the MUSIC READY presentation (the MUSIC READY presentation started at timing T3 in FIG. 13-14) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the Music Reach effect, and displays the character A, the musical note 35TM700, and the characters "Music Reach START!!" display. Music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R along with the start of the Music Reach production.

The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reproduction is started, and displays "1" as the initial value of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. During the reproduction of music, the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by one every time one second elapses. Here, at the timing when the MUSIC READY effect is started, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side), the player can see the sub liquid crystal display. It is difficult to visually recognize the music playback time displayed on the display 35TM300.

During the period of the first stage of the music reach effect (music playback time period of 1 to 15 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are positioned in front of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side). Since this state continues, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the music playing time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, although the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. , it is possible to visually recognize the music playback time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15(3), since the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be visually recognized as "8", the player can see the music playing time ( It is possible to grasp that the elapsed time from the indicated timing T3) is 8 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 16 seconds (timing T4A shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the second stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (4). transition to In the second stage, the music is continued to be reproduced (the part of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is caused to display characters A and B, and note 35TM700 and note 35TM710. That is, along with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while the continuation of the same piece of music is reproduced.

In addition, as the Music Reach production reaches the second stage, the production control CPU 120 simultaneously moves the decorations of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the production position. (T4A-T4B shown in FIGS. 13-14). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" As a result, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production positions where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear directions, and the visibility of the lower portion of the screen on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 was reduced. state.

During the period of the second stage of the music reach effect (music playback time period of 16 to 30 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is performed. The visibility of is improved compared to the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can grasp the music reproduction time more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15(4), "16" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music playback time reaching 16 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the second stage (16 to 30 seconds) of the music effect.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 31 seconds (timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the third stage of music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (5). transition to In the third step, the music is continued to be reproduced (the part of the music after 31 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays character A, character B, character C, note 35TM700, note 35TM710, and the note 35TM720 is displayed. That is, along with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while the continuation of the same piece of music is reproduced.

During the period of the third stage of the music reach effect (music playback time period of 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are not present in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is performed. The visibility of is improved compared to the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can grasp the music reproduction time more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15(5), "31" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music playback time reaching 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (timing T6 shown in FIGS. 13-14), the music is reproduced to the end, and the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped upon completion of the reproduction of the music. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (6), the effect control CPU 120 displays a combination of decorative patterns that result in a big win in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. In addition, the occurrence of a big win is notified by displaying the characters "big win!!" on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (the final playing time of the music in the Music Reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

At the end of the Music Reach effect and the count display effect, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves the decorations of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin positions (Fig. 13- T7A-T7B shown in 18). As a result, while the final value of the count display effect ("60" in this example) remains displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the final value is increased by the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value ("60" in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

As described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are controlled by the sub-liquid crystal while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) of the Music Reach effect. Since it is located at the origin position where it overlaps the display 35TM300 in front and back in front view, the visibility of the count display effect (period of numerical values 1 to 15) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. On the other hand, during the period when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the second stage (16 seconds to 30 seconds) and the third stage (31 seconds to 60 seconds) of the Music Reach effect, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM410 The logo panel 35TM420 is positioned so that it does not overlap with the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 when viewed from the front. are doing.

In this manner, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved or lowered in accordance with the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, thereby making it possible to switch the visibility of the count display effect. there is As a result, it is possible to easily change only the visibility of the count display effect executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 while performing a constant addition operation according to the music reproduction time.

When the Music Reach production shifts from the first stage to the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move to the production position to improve the visibility of the count display production on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, it is emphasized that the music reach presentation has shifted from the first stage to the second stage, that is, the period of high expectation for a big win is emphasized, and the amusement can be improved.

On the other hand, assuming that the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position when the Music Reach production is in the first stage, the visibility of the count display production on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. As a result, the player clearly recognizes the numerical value (1 to 15) of the count display performance even though the degree of expectation for the big win is still low. As a result, the entertainment of the music reach effect and the count display effect is rather reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displayed during the period in which the first stage of the Music Reach production is executed, regardless of whether the Music Reach production ends in the first stage. Positioning the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 at the origin position lowers the visibility of the count display effect, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In the present embodiment, when the MUSIC READY production is executed, the count display production is executed at a rate of 100%. Depending on the number, the execution ratio of the count display effect may be varied. For example, when the Music Reach effect ends in the first stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 100%, and when the Music Reach effect is executed up to the second or third stage, it is 100%. The count display effect may be executed at a rate of . Here, when the Music Reach effect is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, the count display effect is started at the timing when the Music Reach transitions to the second stage (that is, addition from the initial value "16" update operation). With this configuration, during the period when the second stage or the third stage of the MUSIC READY presentation is being executed, the music displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reproduced by executing the counting display presentation. It is possible to visually recognize the time (from 16), but during the period when the first stage of the Music Reach effect is being executed, the count display effect is not executed, so the music playing time is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), which will be described later, when the Music Reach effect is executed up to the second stage, the corresponding count display effect starts from the first stage (initial value "1"). In some cases, it may start from the second stage (initial value "16"). Also, when the MUSIC READY effect is executed up to the third stage, the corresponding count display effect is started from the first stage (initial value "1"), and the second stage (initial value "16 ”) or from the third stage (initial value “31”). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the count display effect is started, and to improve interest.

In addition, as described above, as a variation pattern of super reach, super reach with no pseudo-continuous effect, super reach with one pseudo-continuous effect, and super reach with two pseudo-continuous effects are provided. You can do it. In this case, it is preferable that the degree of expectation for a big hit has a relationship of super reach (no pseudo-run)<super reach (one pseudo-run)<super reach (two pseudo-runs). In the case of such an effect configuration, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (when the pseudo-continuous one-time or two-time pseudo-continuous super reach is selected), when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed (the pseudo-continuous It is preferable that the ratio of the music reach effect and the count display effect to be executed up to the second stage or the third stage is higher than when no super reach is selected.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed multiple times (when the pseudo-continuous 2-time super reach is selected), when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only once (when the pseudo-continuous 1-time super reach is selected) The ratio of the music reach effect and the count display effect to be executed up to the second stage or the third stage may be higher than in the case of the second stage or the third stage. By adopting such a performance structure, the player is interested in whether or not the pseudo-continuous performance is executed and whether or not the pseudo-continuous performance is executed a plurality of times, thereby improving the interest. be able to.

(Another example of production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
FIGS. 13-16 are flowcharts showing other examples of the processing for determining effect at the start of fluctuation. 13-12, in this variation start effect determination process, when executing the music ready-to-win effect, the timing to start the count display effect according to the determined final stage number of the music ready-to-win effect. can be made different.

Specifically, in the processing shown in FIGS. 13-12, when the MUSIC READY presentation is executed, the counting display presentation is always executed from the first stage of the MUSIC READY presentation (the initial value of the counting display presentation is However, in the processing shown in FIGS. 13-16, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is started from the second stage (sub liquid crystal display When the initial value displayed on the 35TM300 is "16"), and when the count display effect is started from the third stage (when the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is "31") (see Figure 13-17(G)).

In addition, regarding the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect, when the count display effect is executed, it is set to be higher than when the count display effect is not executed (Fig. 13-17 (H )). Therefore, the countdown operation until the start of the cut-in notice effect in the timer effect and the update operation of the music playback time in the count display effect are executed in parallel at a high rate.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is displayed as a result of the display result designation command. And set the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the variation pattern designation command, and change the decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern The effect to be executed during display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation shown in FIGS. 13-16.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the Music Ready-to-Win effect and the final stage based on the Final Stage Determination Table (see FIGS. 13-13(C) and (D)) of the Music Ready-to-Win effect (step S35TM3010). ).

Next, if it is determined to execute the Music Ready-to-Win effect (YES in step S35TM3020), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count display effect is to be executed in the count display effect execution start stage determination table (Fig. 13-17). (G)) (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the MUSIC READY effect (NO in step S35TM3020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM3040).

FIG. 13-17(G) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution start stage determination table for the count display effect. A judgment value for determining is assigned. When the final stage of the MUSIC READY production is the first stage, the production control CPU 120 determines to execute the count display production from the first stage of the MUSIC READY production at a rate of 1% (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 decides to display "1" as an initial value), and decides not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 99%.

In addition, when the final stage of the MUSIC READY production is the second stage, it is decided to execute the count display production from the first stage of the MUSIC READY production at a rate of 3% (initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 It was decided to display "1" as a value), and to execute the count display effect from the second stage of the Music Reach effect at a rate of 25% ("16" was set as the initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300). It is decided to display it), and 72% of the time it is decided not to execute the count display effect.

In addition, when the final stage of the MUSIC READY production is the third stage, it is decided to execute the count display production from the first stage of the MUSIC READY production at a rate of 5% (initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 It was decided to display "1" as a value), and to execute the count display effect from the second stage of the Music Reach effect at a rate of 30% ("16" was set as the initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300). (decides to display "31" as the initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300), and to execute the count display effect from the third stage of the Music Reach effect at a rate of 60%. ), and decides not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 5%.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the count display effect is to be started from the first stage of the MUSIC READY effect, after the initial value "1" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the MUSIC READY effect is started. The addition operation corresponding to the music playing time is continued until the final value corresponding to the final stage ("15" for the first stage, "30" for the second stage, and "60" for the third stage). will be Further, when it is determined that the count display effect is to be started from the second stage of the Music Reach effect, after the initial value "16" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the final stage of the Music Reach effect is displayed. The adding operation corresponding to the music playback time is continued until the final value ("30" in the second stage and "60" in the third stage). Also, when it is determined that the count display effect is to be started from the third stage of the MUSIC READY effect, after the initial value "31" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the final stage of the MUSIC READY effect is displayed. The addition operation corresponding to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value ("60" in the third step) is obtained.

Here, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), when the final stage of the Music Reach effect is the second stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 72%, and (i) at a rate of 3%. The count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect, and (ii) the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 25%. That is, the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the Music Ready-to-win effect is 3% of (i), whereas the ratio of the count display effect to be executed in the second stage of the Music Ready-to-win effect. is 28% of (i)+(ii). Also, if the final stage of the Music Reach production is the third stage, the count display production is not executed at a rate of 5%, and (iii) the count display production is executed from the first stage of the Music Reach production at a rate of 5%. Then, (iv) the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30%, and (V) the count display effect is executed from the third stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 60%. That is, the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the Music Ready-to-Win effect is 5% of (iii), while the ratio of the count display effect to be executed in the second stage of the Music Ready-to-Win effect. is 35% of (iii)+(iv), and the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the third stage of the Music Reach effect is 95% of (iii)+(iV)+(V).

According to the ratios shown in FIG. 13-17(G), the ratio of executing the count display effect is lowest when the music reach effect is in the first stage, and the count display effect is executed when the music reach effect is in the second stage. The ratio of executing the effect is the next lowest, and the ratio of executing the count display effect is the highest when the music ready-to-win effect is the third stage.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-17(H)) (step S35TM3050).

FIG. 13-17(H) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, in which judgment values for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed are assigned corresponding to whether or not the count display effect is executed. there is The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 95% and to execute the cut-in notice performance at a rate of 5% when not executing the count display performance. Also, when executing the count display effect, it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%, but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the cut-in advance notice effect (YES in step S35TM3060), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect to the effect mode determination table of the cut-in notice effect (Fig. 13). -13(F)) (step S35TM3070), decides to execute the timer effect (step S35TM3080), and ends the process. On the other hand, if it is decided not to execute the cut-in announcement effect (NO in step S35TM3060), the process ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13(C) and (D), the relationship between the final stage of the Music Reach production and the degree of expectation for a big hit is "first stage"<"second stage"<" The player expects that the music reproduction time will be as long as possible, that is, that the numerical value of the music reproduction time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 will be as large as possible. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), the ratio of execution of the count display effect is higher when the music reach effect is the second stage than when the music reach effect is the first stage. The count display effect is executed more frequently when the music reach effect is at the third stage than when the music reach effect is at the second stage. Therefore, the player is also interested in the timing at which the count display effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, the timer effect is executed at a rate of 100%, so the execution ratio of the timer effect matches the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 13-17(H), the ratio of execution of the cut-in notice effect is higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed. . That is, when the count display effect is executed, the ratio of the timer effect to be executed is higher than when the count display effect is not executed. Thus, by increasing the execution ratio of the timer performance when the count display performance is being executed, the count display performance and the timer performance can be associated with each other to improve interest.

(Modified example of count display effect and timer effect)
Next, modified examples of the count display effect and the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18, 13-19, and 13-20. FIGS. 13-18 are time charts when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed, and FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20 show Shows an example of effect images displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when executing the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect and executing the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. It is an explanatory diagram.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 determines the third stage as the final stage of the music ready-to-win effect based on the variation pattern of super reach, and also determines the count display effect in the first stage of the music ready-to-win effect. is not executed, and the count display effect is executed in the second and third stages of the Music Reach effect, and the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect of the first mode are executed during the execution of the third stage of the Music Reach effect. shall be decided to carry out

First, FIG. 13-19(1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing variable display of left, middle, and right decorative patterns (variable display started at timing T1 shown in FIG. 13-18). showing. At this time, nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, but a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, thereby displaying the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. , the entire character is displayed. Further, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position overlapping the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front and rear in a front view.

At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. It is possible to view the screen of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 itself. However, at this time point, since the count display rendering has not been executed yet, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is in a state where no numerical value is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. ” is displayed in a stopped state, and characters “READY!!” are displayed on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIGS. 13-18).

Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the music ready-to-win production in response to establishment of the ready-to-win state. FIG. 13-19(3) shows the state in which the first stage of the MUSIC READY presentation (the MUSIC READY presentation started at timing T3 in FIG. 13-18) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the Music Reach effect, and displays the character A, the musical note 35TM700, and the characters "Music Reach START!!" display. Music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R along with the start of the Music Reach production.

Since the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 during the period (T3 to T4A in FIG. 13-18) during which the first stage of the Music Reach effect is being executed, the sub liquid crystal display is not executed during this period. This is a state in which the music playing time is not displayed on the display 35TM300, and no update operation is being performed.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 16 seconds (timing T4A shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 performs the second stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (4). transition to In the second stage, the music is continued to be reproduced (the part of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is caused to display characters A and B, and note 35TM700 and note 35TM710. That is, along with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while the continuation of the same piece of music is reproduced.

The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the Music Reach effect reaches the second stage (the timing at which the 16-second transition portion of the music is reproduced), and the count display effect is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. "16" is displayed as the initial value of . During the reproduction of music, the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by one every time one second elapses. Here, as will be described later, at the timing when the second stage of the MUSIC READY production is started, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are positioned in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (toward the player). Therefore, the player can easily see the music playing time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300.

In addition, as the Music Reach production reaches the second stage, the production control CPU 120 simultaneously moves the decorations of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the production position. (T4A-T4B shown in FIGS. 13-18). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" As a result, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production positions where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front and rear directions, and the visibility of the lower portion of the screen on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 was reduced. state.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 31 seconds (timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 performs the third stage of music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (5). transition to In the third step, the music is continued to be reproduced (the part after 31 seconds of the music is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays character A, character B, character C, note 35TM700, note 35TM710, and the note 35TM720 is displayed. That is, along with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while the continuation of the same piece of music is reproduced.

During the period of the third stage of the music reach effect (music playback time period of 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are not present in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is performed. The visibility of is improved compared to the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can grasp the music reproduction time more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-19(5), "31" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music playback time reaching 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 42 seconds (timing T6 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in announcement effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (6). Based on the fact that the remaining time (number of seconds) has reached 3 seconds, a timer effect is executed, and a timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the initial value is "3") is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. ) are displayed. At this time, "42" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the fact that the music reproduction time has reached 42 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 43 seconds (timing T7 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in announcement effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (7). Based on the fact that the remaining time (number of seconds) is 2 seconds, the timer effect is continued, and the updated timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the numerical value of "2") is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. image). At this time, "43" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the fact that the music reproduction time has reached 43 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 44 seconds (timing T8 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in announcement effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (8). Based on the fact that the remaining time (number of seconds) is 1 second, the timer effect is continued, and the updated timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the numerical value "1") is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. image). At this time, "44" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the fact that the music reproduction time has reached 44 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 45 seconds (timing T9 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in announcement effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (9). Based on the fact that the remaining time (number of seconds) is 0 seconds, the timer effect is continued, and the updated timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the final value of " 0”) is displayed. At this time, "45" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the fact that the music reproduction time has reached 45 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in accordance with the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (the timing at which the numerical value of the timer image in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is updated from "1" to "0"). to display a cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, a cut-in image "CHANCE" of the first mode) having a higher priority than the effect image of Music Reach effect on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. .

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 46 seconds (the timing of T10 shown in FIGS. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the timer effect in response to the execution of the cut-in notice effect, and The display of the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the numerical image of the final value "0") displayed in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 is ended. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the cut-in notice effect, and a cut-in image 35TM800 ( In this example, the cut-in image "CHANCE" of the first mode is continuously displayed. "46" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the fact that the music reproduction time has reached 46 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 47 seconds (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 continues the cut-in announcement effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (10). A cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, a cut-in image "CHANCE" in the first mode) of a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the Music Reach effect is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is displayed continuously. At this time, "47" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the fact that the music reproduction time has reached 47 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music playback time reaches 48 seconds (timing of T12 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the cut-in announcement effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (11). , the cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image "CHANCE" in the first mode), which had been displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than the effect image of the Music Reach effect in the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. terminate. As a result, the character A, the character B, and the character C displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the note 35TM700, note 35TM710, and note 35TM720 can be visually recognized again. At this time, "48" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the count display effect in response to the fact that the music reproduction time has reached 48 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 13-18), the music is reproduced to the end, and the decoration pattern is confirmed and stopped upon the completion of the reproduction of the music. In the example shown in FIG. 13-20 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays a combination of decorative patterns that result in a big win in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. In addition, the occurrence of a big win is notified by displaying the characters "big win!!" on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (the final playing time of the music in the Music Reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

At the end of the Music Reach effect and the count display effect, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves the decorations of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin positions (Fig. 13- T14A-T14B shown in 18). As a result, while the final value of the count display effect ("60" in this example) remains displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the final value is increased by the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value ("60" in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

The effect control CPU 120 displaces the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 to the origin positions during the period when the first stage of the Music Reach effect is being executed, and executes the second stage of the Music Reach effect. During this period, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the production position. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the execution ratio of the count display effect during the period during which the first stage of the Music Ready-to-win effect is executed, while during the period during which the second stage of the Music Ready-to-win effect is executed, The execution ratio of the count display performance is made higher than the period during which the first stage of the music reach performance is executed.

Therefore, the visibility of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved during the period when the second stage of the MUSIC READY production is being executed, and the ratio of the display of the production information for the count display production on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also improved. are doing. Therefore, it is emphasized that the music reach effect has moved to the second stage, and the interest can be improved. On the other hand, regardless of whether the MUSIC READY presentation ends in the first stage, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced during the period when the MUSIC READY presentation stage 1 is executed. The rate at which the effect information of the count display effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also reduced. Therefore, it is not emphasized that it is the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) in which the expectation of a big hit is low even though the count display effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a count display effect and a timer effect are executed as effects related to the display result of the variable display being executed. A count display effect or a timer effect may be executed as the look-ahead forewarning effect related to the display result of the variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, a special background image that is different from the normal background image will be displayed over multiple times of changing display until the changing display (target change) based on the starting winning is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute a zone effect that displays . Then, the execution period of this zone effect (the number of fluctuations in the special background image) may be added and updated on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 to execute a count display effect. Further, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the remaining time until the variation display (target variation) based on the starting winning is executed is executed by subtracting and updating the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Also good. As in these examples, the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

(2) In the above embodiment, the initial number of seconds for the timer effect is always "3" (the timer effect starts 3 seconds before the cut-in image 35TM800 is displayed). A plurality of initial seconds may be selectable at different ratios according to the effect mode or display result of the cut-in notice effect. For example, when the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is the first mode, the ratio of the initial value of "3" in the timer effect is 80%, and the ratio of the initial value of "5" is 20%. When the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is the second mode, the ratio of the initial value of "3" in the timer effect is 20%, and the ratio of the initial value of "5" is 80%. can be In addition, when the display result is a loss, the percentage of the initial value of "3" in the timer effect is 80%, and the percentage of the initial value of "5" is 20%. Alternatively, in the timer effect, the ratio of "3" as the initial value may be 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value may be 80%.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the music ready-to-win effect was always executed when the count display effect was executed. There may be cases where the Music Reach presentation is not executed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the timer effect is always executed when the cut-in notice effect is executed. The timer effect may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the cut-in notice effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed. There may be cases where the advance notice effect is not executed.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the count display effect on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 by an image that simulates a 7-segment display. Alternatively, an actual 7-segment display may be provided in place of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the 7-segment display may be controlled to emit light to display (light) the numerical value of the count display effect. good.

(5) In the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 performs the count display effect, while the timer effect is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 35TM200. While the effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the timer effect may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Also, both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

(6) In addition, the effect control CPU120, in the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled in the time saving state (time saving number of times) and the remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in the probability changing state (ST (special time) number of times) , the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, etc., can be displayed. During the period when the information (numerical value) regarding the game state is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the count display effect is executed more than the period when the information (numerical value) regarding the game state is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. You may make it so that the ratio which is carried out becomes low. According to such a configuration, the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 restricts the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the counting display effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state, and gives priority to the latter, which is more important for the player. can be notified by

(7) In the above embodiment, in the timer effect, the remaining time until the cut-in notice effect is executed has been decremented and updated, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is decremented and updated. For example, the remaining time until the movable accessories such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operate may be subtracted and updated. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the count display effect, an example of adding and updating the playback time of the music, which is a numerical value related to the execution status of the effect, was shown, but not limited to this, for example, the first logo panel 35TM410 and The elapsed time after the movable accessory such as the second logo panel 35TM420 moves to the performance position may be added and updated.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot game state is to be controlled, a timer effect that performs a countdown operation that gradually decreases the displayed numerical value is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect, an update effect that performs an update operation for updating the display mode of the display body (object displayed on the screen) may be executed. Specifically, an addition operation that gradually expands the display area of the display (or gradually increases the number of displays), or a stepwise reduction of the display area of the display (or It is also possible to execute an update effect that performs a subtraction operation (decrease the number step by step).

As an example, the display area of the meter displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 or the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 may be expanded step by step. When the mode is set to 100%, the display area of the meter is gradually increased and updated from 0% (initial value) to 10%, 20%, and so on, and when it reaches 100%, a suggestive effect is given. is executed, and when the update stops before reaching 100% (for example, 80%), the suggestive effect is not executed (the execution ratio of the suggestive effect is low).

(9) Further, when a plurality of types of suggestive effects are provided, an update effect corresponding to each type of suggestive effect may be executed. For example, as the first suggestion effect, a first cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately after establishment of the ready-to-win state is provided, and as the second suggestion effect, a second cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped is provided. is provided, the first update effect is executed to update the numerical value or meter indicating the possibility (expectation) of execution of the first cut-in notice effect, and the second cut-in notice effect is executed. A second update effect may be executed to perform an action of updating a numerical value or meter indicating the possibility (expectation) of the game.

In this case, the first update effect and the second update effect may be simultaneously executed in parallel. For example, the possibility (expectation) indicated by the first update effect reaches 100% at the timing immediately after the reach state is established (on the other hand, at this point, the possibility (expectation) indicated by the second update effect is still 20% ), the first cut-in notice effect is executed in response to this, the first update effect is terminated in accordance with the execution of the first cut-in notice effect (the displayed numerical value or meter is erased), After that, the possibility (expectation) indicated by the second update effect reaches 100% at the timing just before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and accordingly, the second cut-in notice effect is executed, and the second cut. The second update effect may end (the displayed numerical value or meter may be erased) in accordance with the execution of the in-notice effect.

(10) In the above embodiment, the numerical value (seconds) or the display color of the display (meter) related to the execution status of the suggestive effect, or the numerical value ( seconds) or the display color of the display (meter) may be determined at different rates according to the display results. For example, when the display result is a big win, the display color is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the display result is a loss, and when the display result is a loss, the display color is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the display result is a big win. The display color may be determined to be blue in proportion. In addition, when the display result is a big hit, multiple display bodies to be displayed are determined at a higher rate than when the display result is a loss (multiple types of count display effects and update effects to be executed are determined. ), when the display result is a loss, one display is determined at a higher rate than when the display result is a big hit (one type of count display effect or update effect to be executed is selected). determined).

(11) In the above-described embodiment, an example of displaying the playback time (number of playback seconds) of a song as an effect related to the execution status of the Music Reach effect has been shown. It is also possible to display the ratio of the reproduction period up to the present time (the period from the start of the music to the current time) to the reproduction period (the period from the beginning to the end of the music). For example, if the playback period of the entire song is 60 seconds, the playback ratio is gradually updated to 10%, 20%, . . . The reproduction ratio may reach 100% at the timing when the music is reproduced to the end (timing when 60 seconds have passed from the start of reproduction of the music). It should be noted that the playback time (number of playback seconds) or the playback ratio of the song may be displayed using a display other than the numerical value (for example, the above-described meter).

(12) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), the count display effect is continued until the final stage of the determined Music Reach effect is completed. Alternatively, the count display effect may be ended before the final stage of the determined Music Ready-to-Win effect ends. For example, when the final stage of the determined Music Reach production is the second stage and the count display production is started from the first stage (initial value 1), the count display production is ended only at the first stage (final end with a value of 15). Also, when the final stage of the determined Music Ready-to-Wear effect is the third stage and the count display effect is to be started from the first stage (initial value 1), the count display effect is ended only at the first stage (final It may end at the value 15), or the count display effect may end at the second stage (end at the final value 30). In addition, when the predetermined last stage of the music ready-to-win presentation is the third stage and the count display presentation is started from the second stage (initial value 16), the count display presentation is ended only at the second stage ( end with a final value of 30). Even in such a form, the execution ratio of the count display effect is the highest when the music reach effect is in the third stage, the second highest in the second stage, and the second highest in the first stage. Make it lowest at some point.

(example of slot machine)
In the above-described embodiment, as a gaming machine capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the jackpot game state, and capable of executing a count display effect related to the execution status of the suggestive effect and a timer effect. , the pachinko game machine 1 has been exemplified, but the game machine having such an effect configuration is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1, and may be a slot machine.

Further, as described above, the slot machine also includes a main liquid crystal display as a first image display device and a sub-liquid crystal display as a second image display device. A first logo panel and a second logo panel, which are decorations having

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, the music ready-to-win effect and the cut-in notice effect can be executed as the suggestive effect, but in the slot machine, the reel lock effect can be executed as the suggestive effect. Reel lock effect means that when the start lever is operated, the reels are not driven by normal control (for example, a method of rotating in the forward direction), but the reels are driven by special control (for example, a method of rotating in the reverse direction and/or a method of vibrating). It is a production that makes For example, the reel lock effect is composed of three stages of effects from the first stage to the third stage. In the first stage of the reel lock effect, the reels are vibrated at a low speed, After the first step, the reels are vibrated at medium speed, and in the third step of the reel lock performance, the reels are vibrated at high speed after the first step and the second step.

In the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub-control section may execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display during the period during which the reel lock effect is being executed. Here, while the sub-control section is executing the first stage of the reel lock effect, the first logo panel and the second logo panel are located at the origin position where they overlap the sub-liquid crystal display device in the front-back direction when viewed from the front. The visibility of the count display effect on the sub-liquid crystal display is degraded. On the other hand, during the period when the second stage and the third stage of the reel lock effect are being executed, the first logo panel and the second logo panel are in the effect positions that do not overlap the sub liquid crystal display device in front and back when viewed from the front. The visibility of the count display effect on the sub-liquid crystal display has been improved. According to such a configuration, when the reel lock effect is in the first stage, it is more difficult to recognize the count display effect than when the reel lock effect is in the second and third stages, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Further, in the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub-control section may change the ratio of execution of the count display effect on the sub-liquid crystal display according to the stage of the reel lock effect (for example, (Similar to the relationship between the stage of the music reach effect and the execution start timing of the count display effect shown in FIG. 13-17(G)). Furthermore, depending on whether or not the count display effect is executed, the execution ratio of the timer effect may be changed (for example, whether or not the count display effect is executed and cut-in shown in FIG. 13-17 (H) Similar to the relationship with the execution ratio of the advance notice effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the count display effect and the timer effect in the slot machine related to each other, thereby enhancing the interest.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 01TM]
Next, a game machine having the characteristic portion 01TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-24. In the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, the image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. A movable body for effect is provided at a position on the back side of the board 2 and on the front side of the image display device 5 (position between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 in the front-rear direction). Also good.

The movable body 01TM050 shown in FIG. 14-5 has a rotatably provided rotating disk and a motor for rotating the rotating disk, and tilts sideways (Fig. 14-5 (8 ) and (10)) and the upright standing position (position shown in FIG. 14-5(9)). The movable body 01TM050 configured in this manner is positioned at the tilted position when the rotating disk is in the initial driving state. Then, when the rotating disk is rotated clockwise in front view by the motor, it rotates about 90 degrees clockwise in front view around the rotation shaft, and moves to the standing position. Also, by driving the motor in reverse, it moves from the upright position to the tilted position. A rendering in which these motions are executed is referred to as a movable body motion rendering.

When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 14-1 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of variation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is specified as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 14-1.

In the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode based on the cut-in notice effect determination table (see FIG. 14-2 (F)). (Step S01TM1010). In the cut-in notice effect, a predetermined cut-in image is displayed with a higher priority than the decorative pattern during variable display (the display layer is higher than the decorative pattern and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). This is the preview effect to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-2(F), in the cut-in notice effect determination table, determination values for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode are assigned according to the display result. 30, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), 60% of the time, the cut-in notice effect is not executed; % of the cut-in notice effect of the first mode (characters of "CHANCE?"), and 10% of the decision is made to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (characters of "CHANCE!!"). Decide to perform the performance. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect of the first mode (characters of "CHANCE ?") at a rate of 20%, and the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (characters of "CHANCE !!") at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the cut-in announcement effect.

In this way, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the ratio of winning a big hit is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, and the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (characters "CHANCE!!") is executed, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than when the cut-in announcement effect of the first mode (characters of "CHANCE?") is executed. Therefore, the player will be interested in whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be executed, and will also be interested in the effect mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution ratio and execution mode of the cut-in notice effect are determined based on the display result specified by the display result specifying command. The execution ratio and execution mode of the cut-in announcement effect may be determined based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. For example, the cut-in notice performance may be executed only when a variation pattern with reach is designated, or the cut-in notice performance may be executed only when a variation pattern with pseudo-run is designated.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of active display based on the final display mode determination table for active display (see FIG. 14-2(A)) (step S01TM1020). Here, the active display is, as described above, a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern (special pattern) being executed. can be displayed in the area. In addition, the pending display is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (special symbols) that have not been executed, and the pending display corresponding to the first pending memory is the lower left part of the effect screen (active from the player's point of view). The display is possible in the first reserved display area provided on the left side of the display area), and the reserved display corresponding to the second reserved memory is provided in the lower right part of the effect screen (the right side of the active display area as viewed from the player). can be displayed in the second reserved display area. The final display mode of the active display is the final display mode of the active display during the variable display of the corresponding decoration pattern (special pattern).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5, which will be described later, the active display and the pending display can be displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbols is being performed, and can be displayed according to the variable pattern. It can also be displayed when a corresponding super reach effect (for example, a battle effect, which will be described later) is being executed.

FIG. 14-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 14-2(A), in this embodiment, any one of the normal mode, the blue mode, and the red mode can be determined as the final display mode of the active display. A judgment value is assigned to each aspect.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), if the display result is "missing" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), based on the variation pattern specifying command The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed by 90% is the normal mode (white circular display), and the 8% is the blue mode (blue circular display). As a result, it becomes a red mode (red circle display) at a rate of 2%. In addition, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the variation display of the decorative pattern executed based on the variation pattern specification command The final display mode of the corresponding active display is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 5%, the blue mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 30%, and the red mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 65%. red circle display).

In this way, when the final display mode of the active display is the red mode, the percentage of the big hits is the highest, and when the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, the percentage of the big wins is the second. , and when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode, the probability of winning the jackpot is the lowest. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-2(A), regarding the display mode of the active display, the expectation of a big win increases in the order of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern regarding the display mode of active display based on the change pattern determination table for active display (see FIGS. 14-2(B) and (C)) (step S01TM1030).

FIGS. 14-2B and 14-2C are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of active display change patterns. As shown in FIGS. 14-2B and 14-2C, in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed from the display mode during the active shift to the final display mode (the display mode determined in step S01TM1020). A plurality of change patterns are provided as the change pattern to be changed. Here, the display mode at the time of the active shift means that when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started (or started), the corresponding display (round object) corresponding to the variable display is displayed as the first reserved display. This is the display mode of the active display when shifted from the area or the second reserved display area to the active display area (that is, the initial display mode of the active display).

As a change pattern of the active display, a change pattern 101 in which the active display at the time of the active shift is the normal mode, the active display does not change thereafter and the final display mode remains the normal mode, and the active display at the time of the active shift is the normal mode. , and a change pattern 102 in which the active display changes thereafter and the final display mode becomes the blue mode, and the active display during the active shift is the blue mode, and thereafter the active display does not change and the final display mode remains the blue mode. a change pattern 103 in which the active display during the active shift is the normal mode, and then the active display changes and the final display mode becomes the red mode; and the active display during the active shift is the blue mode. , the change pattern 105 in which the active display changes thereafter and the final display mode becomes the red mode, and the active display during the active shift is the red mode, and thereafter the active display does not change and the final display mode remains in the red mode. There are change patterns 106 and .

In the present embodiment, the pending display is a white round object, which does not change to another form (for example, a blue round shape or a red round shape) at the stage of the pending display. Then, at the timing when the white round object displayed as the suspended display in the suspended display area is shifted to the active display area along with the start of the variable display corresponding to the suspended display, (1) the object (2) when the display mode of the object changes from a white circular shape (variation patterns 101, 102, 104) to a blue circular shape (variation patterns 103, 105); There is a case where the display mode of the object changes to a red round shape (change pattern 106).

As shown in FIG. 14-2(B), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the active display change pattern is , (1) when the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 is used at a rate of 100%, and (2) the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020. is the blue aspect, the change pattern 102 occurs at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 occurs at a rate of 70%; , the variation pattern 104 occurs at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 105 occurs at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 106 occurs at a rate of 70%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-2(C), when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the start winning ( (1) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode, the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the new first reserved memory) is 100%. (2) If the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the blue mode, then the changing pattern 102 occurs at a rate of 70%, the changing pattern 103 occurs at a rate of 30%, and ( 3) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the red mode, the change pattern 104 occurs at a rate of 80%, the change pattern 105 occurs at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern occurs at a rate of 5%. 106.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2(B) and (C), regarding the change patterns of the active display, when the final display mode is the blue mode, a big hit is expected in the order of change pattern 103<change pattern 102. When the degree is high and the final display mode is the red mode, the expectation of a big win increases in the order of variation pattern 104 < variation pattern 103 < variation pattern 102 . In this way, the variation pattern in which the display mode changes from the active display during the active shift has a higher percentage of winning big than the variation pattern in which the display mode does not change from the active display during the active shift. In addition, when the width of change from the active shift is large (when the normal mode is used during the active shift and the final display mode is the red mode), when the width of the change from the active shift is small (when the blue mode is displayed during the active shift) When the final display mode is the red mode), the percentage of winning is higher.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change suggestive effect is executed and the type of effect in the case of executing the change suggestive effect, based on the change suggestive effect determination table (see FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E)). (step S01TM1040), and the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation is terminated. The change-suggesting effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display will change, and is an effect that has an effect on the active display. The change-suggestion effect includes a first change-suggestion effect and a second change-suggestion effect, which will be described below.

In the first change suggesting effect, the movable body 01TM050 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position while the active display 01TM001 is displayed in the center of the screen, as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5 to be described later. make it work. As a result, the active display 01TM001 displayed in the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 in the upright position overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, the first change suggesting effect is an effect in which the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001, and an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (execution of the change effect). there is Also, when the movable body 01TM050 is in the standing position, a flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001 (around the area overlapping the movable body 01TM050 in the front-rear direction in the screen). That is, the first change-suggesting production is a production in which the flame effect acts on the active display 01TM001, and is a production that suggests that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 will change (execution of the changing production). .

In the second change suggesting effect, as shown in (13) to (16) of FIG. 14-5 to be described later, a character appears from the right side of the screen, and the character performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 01TM001. After the image is displayed, an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 01TM001 is displayed. That is, the second change-suggesting effect is an effect in which the ball thrown by the character acts on the active display 01TM001, and an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (execution of the change effect). It's becoming

In this way, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of effects as the effects acting on the active display 01TM001, it is possible to further enhance interest in changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001.

FIGS. 14-2(D) and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 14-2(D) and (E), in this embodiment, in accordance with the change pattern determined in step S01TM1030, whether or not the change suggestion effect is executed, and whether the change suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to decide which of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect is to be executed when executing, and a judgment value is assigned to each decision item.

As shown in FIG. 14-2(D), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), (1) in step S01TM1030 When the determined active display change pattern is the change pattern 101 (normal → normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion rendering at a rate of 5%, and the first change suggestion at a rate of 95%. It is decided not to execute any of the effect and the second change suggesting effect. (2) If the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal→blue), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and 95 %, it decides to execute the second change suggesting effect. (3) If the active display change pattern determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (from blue to blue), it is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. %, it is determined that neither the first change suggesting effect nor the second change suggesting effect is executed. (4) If the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal→red), it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 10%, and 90 %, it decides to execute the second change suggesting effect. (5) If the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue→red), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 15%, and 85 %, it decides to execute the second change suggesting effect. (6) If the active display change pattern determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (from red to red), any of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect will be displayed at a rate of 100%. It decides not to perform the production either.

As shown in FIG. 14-2(E), when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), (1) in step S01TM1030 When the determined change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 101 (normal → normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion rendering at a rate of 80%, and the first change suggestion at a rate of 20%. It is decided not to execute any of the effect and the second change suggesting effect. Further, (2) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal→blue), it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 70%. %, it decides to execute the second change suggesting effect. (3) If the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (from blue to blue), it is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 60%. %, it is determined that neither the first change suggesting effect nor the second change suggesting effect is executed. Further, (4) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal→red), it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 90%. %, it decides to execute the second change suggesting effect. (5) If the active display change pattern determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue→red), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%. %, it decides to execute the second change suggesting effect. (6) If the active display change pattern determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (from red to red), any of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect will be displayed at a rate of 100%. It decides not to perform the production either.

As described above, the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes has a higher expectation of a big hit than the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-2(D) and (E), with regard to the change patterns (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes, if the display result is "off", , the ratio of selecting the second change suggesting performance over the first change suggesting performance is higher, and the ratio of selecting the first change suggesting performance over the second change suggesting performance when the display result is a ``jackpot''. is high. Therefore, when the first change suggesting performance is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed, the expectation of big win is higher than when the second change suggesting performance is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. In this way, the ratio of the big hits differs between when the first change-suggesting performance is executed and when the second change-suggesting performance is executed. can let

In addition, regarding the change patterns (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes from the time of the active shift, it is possible to decide to execute the first change suggesting effect, and the second change suggesting effect is executed. In particular, the change patterns (101, 103, and 106) in which the display mode of the active display does not change from the time of the active shift are not decided to execute the first change suggestion effect, It is possible to decide to execute the second change suggestion effect. That is, the display mode of the active display always changes when the first change suggesting performance is executed, but the display mode of the active display sometimes does not change when the second change suggesting performance is executed. In this way, when the first change suggesting effect is executed and when the second change suggesting effect is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is different, so which effect is executed. can be of interest.

(Specific examples of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-3, 14-4, and 14-5. FIG. 14-3 is a time chart showing execution timing of each effect when the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed, and FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5 are the first change suggesting effect. Alternatively, it is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the second change suggesting effect is executed.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "big hit" and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command is "super reach big hit". Then, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed, and a battle production in which a friend character and an enemy character battle is executed as a super ready-to-win production. Then, the occurrence of a big win is reported by executing a victory effect in which the ally character finally wins.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in announcement effect of the second mode ("CHANCE!!") in step S01TM1010, and changes the final display mode of the active display to the red mode in step S01TM1020. In step S01TM1030, it is determined that the change pattern of the active display is change pattern 104 (normal→red). 14-5 (8) to (12) show an example of the case where it is decided to execute the first change suggesting effect in step S01TM1040. Examples of determined cases are shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17).

First, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (1), the effect control CPU 120, in a state where the number of first reserved memories is 2, displays the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small symbols (the variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 14-3). running In addition, the active display 01TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 01TM003, and two suspended displays 01TM002 (white round display) in the normal mode are displayed in the suspended display area 01TM004. It is

In this embodiment, a small pattern is a pattern that is smaller than the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and indicates whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the decorative pattern. called. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the decoration symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the decoration symbols. From the left, the areas where the small symbols are variably displayed and stopped are designated as a small symbol display area 5l, a small symbol display area 5c, and a small symbol display area 5r.

As described above, the variable display of the effect symbols executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols includes the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the small symbols. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative symbols and variable display of the small symbols based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbols is started. is started at the same timing, and when the variable display of the special symbols is completed (when the special symbols are fixed and stopped), the decoration is based on the receipt of the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. The variable display of the pattern and the variable display of the small pattern are terminated at the same timing (the decorative pattern and the small pattern are fixed and stopped at the same timing).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (2), continues the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 14-3), an operation prompting display 01TM031 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. The operation prompting display 01TM031 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B. It has become. The first operation-promoting display displayed here is a normal-mode operation-promoting display corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small symbols is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (3), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the push button 31B being operated while the operation prompting display 01TM031 is being displayed (T3 shown in FIG. 14-3). ), the cut-in announcement effect of the second mode is executed, and the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE!!”) is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (4), the timing (FIG. 14- 3), the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE!!”) is erased, and the cut-in announcement effect of the second mode is ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4(5), the effect control CPU 120 puts "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the ready-to-reach state should be established in the variation pattern. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters "READY!!" At this time, the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r continue to variably display the small symbols. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decoration pattern is stopped, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

Then, after the ready-to-win state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect according to the variation pattern of super ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (6). Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (timing T6 in FIG. 14-3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4(7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 01TM031A during execution of the battle effect (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 14-3). The second operation-promoting display displayed here is a special mode of operation-promoting display corresponding to the change-suggestion effect, and is composed of an image simulating the push button 31B enveloped in flames and an image simulating the push button 31B. A downward arrow displayed upward is included, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. The special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A is a display mode that has a higher priority than images related to decorative patterns and battle effects (a mode in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front of other effect images). Is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 determines in step S01TM1040 described above in response to the push button 31B being operated when the special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A is displayed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-3). Either the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed. If it is decided to execute the first change suggesting effect, proceed to Fig. 14-5 (8), and if it is decided to execute the second change suggesting effect, Fig. 14-5 Proceed to (13).

(Example of executing the first change suggesting effect)
When the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first change suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing of T8), the first change suggestion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed with the start of the first change suggesting effect. The blackout effect is a effect in which the visibility of a predetermined image is lowered by displaying a darkened image 01TM150 as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 to make it difficult to see. In the present embodiment, the decoration pattern and the ready-to-win effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) become invisible due to the execution of the blackout effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), by executing the blackout effect, the decoration pattern which is one of the production patterns becomes difficult to see, but the small pattern which is the other production pattern is Remains visible. That is, while the visibility of the decoration symbol "7" stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decoration symbol variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the small symbols are displayed. The visibility of the small symbols that are variably displayed in the area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r is not lowered.

As shown in FIG. 14-4, when the blackout effect is not executed, the decoration pattern is displayed larger than the small pattern, and is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the center of the screen. It is possible to make the visibility of the decoration pattern higher than the visibility of the small pattern, but in the difficult-to-see state where the blackout effect is executed, the visibility of the small pattern is higher than the visibility of the decoration pattern. Become. As a result, it is possible for the player to appropriately understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern) is continued while enhancing the performance effect by changing the visibility of the image related to the decorative pattern and the battle production. is.

In the present embodiment, the darkened image 01TM150 covering the entire display screen is displayed in order to reduce the visibility of the predetermined image. A predetermined image with a low priority (an image whose display layer is lower and which can be seen behind the darkened image 01TM150 when viewed from the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, when the layer transmittance of the darkened image 01TM150 is 0%). ), and the predetermined image having a lower display priority than the darkened image 01TM150 is slightly visible although it is difficult to see (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 01TM150 is not 0%). You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example of displaying the covering image (darkened image 01TM150) that covers the entire display screen is shown, but the covering image that covers only a part of the display screen (for example, only the central portion) is displayed. By doing so, the visibility of only a partial area of the display screen may be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the dark image 01TM150 is displayed to make the predetermined image difficult to see. Thus, the predetermined image may be made invisible, or the predetermined image may be made invisible by irregularly changing the aspect ratio of the predetermined image. In addition, a character or the like is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern (an image that has a lower display priority than the decorative pattern, a display layer that is lower than the decorative pattern, and is visible to the player behind the decorative pattern). In this case, the visibility of the characters and the like as the background image is also lowered by displaying the cover image (such as the darkening image 01TM150).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-5(8) and the like, the suspended display and the active display can be visually recognized even in a difficult-to-recognize state. (So-called interface image) is also visible, but it is not limited to such a form, and in a difficult-to-recognize state, a corresponding display that changes the display mode (a corresponding display that is the target of a change effect, and in this example is an active display) The visibility of the corresponding display other than the display 01TM001) (holding display 01TM002 in this example) may be reduced, and the visibility of the square image (so-called interface image) indicating the active display area 01TM003 is also reduced. You can let them do it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), the effect control CPU 120, while continuing the difficult-to-recognize state, displays the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display) displayed in the active display area 01TM003. is moved above the active display area 01TM003 to the center of the screen, and the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display) is enlarged and displayed. As a result, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) targeted for the first change suggesting effect is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (9), the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body motion effect to move the movable body 01TM050 from the tilted position to the upright position while maintaining the invisible state (FIG. 14). T9A to T9B shown in -3), an effect presentation is executed in which a flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed superimposed around the enlarged active display 01TM001 on the darkened image 01TM150. Since the flame effect image 01TM160 is an image having a higher display priority (higher display layer) than the darkened image 01TM150, it appears to the player that it is displayed in front of the darkened image 01TM150.

Here, since the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 in the upright position overlap in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 temporarily decreases. (Timing of T9B shown in FIG. 14-3). Then, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 to the normal mode (white circle display) to a red mode (red round display).

Further, since the flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001, the flame effect image 01TM160 can be visually recognized even when the movable body 01TM050 is in the upright position, as shown in FIG. 14-5(9). be. As a result, a visual effect is produced as if the movable body 01TM050 in the upright position is covered with flames. In this way, by displaying the flame effect image 01TM160 at a position corresponding to the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 changed the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white circular display) to the red mode (red circular display), as shown in FIG. 14-5 (10). In response, the movable body 01TM050 in the upright position is returned to the tilted position (T10A to T10B shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the movable body action rendering is completed, and the visibility of the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen is improved again. At this time, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is changed to a red mode (red circular display) different from the display mode (normal mode (white circular display)) before execution of the movable body motion effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red mode active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen to restore it to its original size, and moves it down to the active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is lowered to return to the visibility before the execution of the first change suggestion effect and the blackout effect. As a result, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 changed from the normal mode to the red mode. Then, by ending the display of the darkened image 01TM150, the difficult-to-recognize state is released, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the image relating to the decoration pattern and the battle effect) is recovered (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the first change-suggesting effect is terminated, and the change-suggesting effect executed corresponding to the first change-suggesting effect and the blackout effect executed corresponding to the first change-suggesting effect are ended. Become.

As shown in FIG. 14-5 (11), the recovery of the visibility makes it easier to see the predetermined images (decorative symbols and images relating to the battle effect), and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, during the period in which the blackout effect is being executed (the period of T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3, the period of (8) to (10) shown in FIG. 14-4), the effect control CPU 120 changes The display control of the battle production corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed. running continuously.

Then, when the blackout effect ends, the battle effect becomes visible from the portion corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing. It is possible to see the battle production. Even after the blackout effect is finished, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area 5r of the image display device 5 continue to variably display the small patterns.

14-5 (12) (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3). (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of numbers ("777" in this example) that constitutes the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is stopped. display. Then, a victory effect is executed in which the ally character 01TM100 wins over the enemy character 01TM110, and the characters "Victory!!"

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-3. The combination of decorative symbols ("777") currently displayed is fixed and stopped, and the combination of small patterns ("777") stopped and displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are fixed and stopped. As a result, the variable display of decorative symbols and the variable display of small symbols corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

As described above, when the first change suggesting effect is executed, the images related to the decorative symbols and the super ready-to-win effect, which have been easily visible on the image display device 5 until now, become difficult to view due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the active display 01TM001 targeted for the change effect is moved to the center of the screen and displayed enlarged, thereby improving the visibility of the active display 01TM001 targeted for the change effect. In this state, it is suggested that the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 and the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is changed by executing the movable body motion presentation that moves the movable body 01TM050 from the tilted position to the standing position. do. Then, a change effect is executed to change the display mode of the active display 01TM001 while the movable body 01TM050 is in the standing position.

In this way, the first change suggesting effect accompanied by the movable body motion effect acting on the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) to be changed effect is performed by making the predetermined image (the decorative pattern and the image related to the super ready-to-win effect) in an invisible state. By being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the object of the change effect, and to improve the interest of the first change suggesting effect and the change effect.

In addition, before executing the change effect, by making the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) to be the target of the change effect higher than the predetermined image (image related to the decoration pattern and the super reach effect), the change effect By drawing the player's attention to the target corresponding display (active display 01TM001), it is possible to improve the interest of the change presentation.

Note that, in this embodiment, the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position and the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) targeted for the change effect overlap in the front-rear direction by executing the movable body motion effect. The visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) targeted for the change effect is once lowered before the change effect is executed. In this way, by temporarily lowering the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is suggested to change before the corresponding display changes, the change is made unexpected and more interesting. can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-2(D) and (E), when the first change suggesting effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes. When the suggestive effect is executed, there are times when the display mode of the active display does not change. Here, the blackout effect is always executed when the first change suggestive effect is executed, whereas the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, when an effect that acts on the active display 01TM001 is executed after making the predetermined image (decorative pattern and image related to the super ready-to-win effect) difficult to see, the active display 01TM001 is operated without making the predetermined image difficult to see. As compared with the case where the effect is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes is higher. Therefore, the player will be interested in the visibility of the predetermined image when the effect acting on the active display 01TM001 is executed, and the interest in the change-suggesting effect can be further enhanced.

(Example of executing the second change suggesting effect)
When the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second change suggesting effect, the second change suggesting effect is executed at the timing when the push button 31B is operated (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-3). Execute. In this embodiment, unlike the case of the first change suggesting effect, the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggesting effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-5 (13), in the second change suggestion effect, the character A appears in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, in the image display device 5, since the blackout effect is not executed, the visibility of the predetermined image (decorative pattern and image related to the battle effect) is not lowered, and the battle effect can be easily seen. Therefore, the player can see the middle part of the battle presentation. At this time, the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r continue to variably display the small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (14), in the second change suggestion effect, a effect image is displayed in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 01TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode. (timing of T9A shown in FIG. 14-3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (15), in the second change suggestion effect, a effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 01TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode is displayed. is displayed (timing of T10A shown in FIG. 14-3). At this time, in the active display area 01TM003, an effect image (active display 01TM001G) different from the displayed active display 01TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode is displayed. This effect image is an image that reminds us that the active display 01TM001 has exploded.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 hides the effect image (active display 01TM001G) displayed in the active display area 01TM003, as shown in FIG. The display 01TM001 is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the second change suggesting effect ends, and the change suggesting effect executed corresponding to the second change suggesting effect ends.

In this way, by executing the second change suggestion effect, the ball thrown by the character A acts on the active display 01TM001, and a change effect is executed in which the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode. will be Then, even after the second change suggestion effect is completed, the battle effect can be continued and visually recognized, and the player can see the battle effect that is the continuation of the middle part of the battle effect ((13) to (15) in FIG. 14-5). You can continue to see the final part of the presentation (Fig. 14-5 (16)). Even after the end of the second change suggesting effect, the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5 continue to variably display the small symbols.

14-5 (17) (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3). (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of numbers ("777" in this example) that constitutes the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is stopped. display. Then, a victory effect is executed in which the ally character 01TM100 wins over the enemy character 01TM110, and the characters "Victory!!"

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-3. The combination of decorative symbols ("777") currently displayed is fixed and stopped, and the combination of small patterns ("777") stopped and displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are fixed and stopped. As a result, the variable display of decorative symbols and the variable display of small symbols corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

It should be noted that the second change suggesting effect described above is the second change suggesting effect of the success mode that can be executed when the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes. In the second change suggesting effect of this success mode, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is changed to the effect image (active display 01TM001G), triggered by the display of the effect image (active display 01TM001G) in the active display area 01TM003. changes from the previous display mode. On the other hand, the second change suggesting rendering of the failure mode is executed when the display mode of the active display 01TM001 does not change, and as shown in FIG. Although the effect image showing the action of throwing the ball toward the active display 01TM001 is displayed, after that, the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is not displayed in the active display area 01TM003, and as a result, it is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. The display mode of the active display 01TM001 that is present does not change.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect as a super ready-to-win effect in response to the fact that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command is the super ready-to-win variation pattern. During the variable display period of decorative patterns (and small patterns) based on the variation pattern of super reach, the start timing and end timing of the battle production corresponding to the variation pattern are predetermined, and the execution period of the battle production is other It is constant regardless of the execution status of the effects (for example, the first change suggesting effect, the second change suggesting effect, etc.). Therefore, in the variable display of decorative symbols (and small symbols) based on the variation pattern, the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of other effects (for example, the first change suggesting effect, the second change suggesting effect, etc.) overlap. If it is, the visibility of the battle production may be lowered by other productions.

In this example, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, during the period in which the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of the blackout effect overlap (the period indicated by T8 to T11 in FIG. 14-3), It becomes difficult to see the battle effect (periods shown in (8) to (10) in FIG. 14-5). Since this period corresponds to the period during which the middle part of the battle presentation is executed, the player cannot see the middle part of the battle presentation. However, it is possible to see the final part of the battle effect that is executed after the execution period of the blackout effect ends. On the other hand, when the second change suggesting effect is executed, the blackout effect is not executed, and the execution period of the battle effect does not overlap with the execution period of the blackout effect. It is possible to see through the middle part and the end part.

As described above, the execution period of the first change suggestive effect and the second change suggestive effect (the period of T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3) are both shorter than the execution period of the battle effect, and the first change suggestive effect and the second change suggestive effect All of the second change suggesting effects are started after the start of the battle effect, and all of them end before the end of the battle effect (before execution of the victory effect). As a result, regardless of the execution status of the other effects (the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect), the player can at least view the beginning part of the battle effect, the final part of the battle effect, and the notification part of the display result ( It is possible to see the victory presentation or the defeat presentation). That is, even if the effect control CPU 120 does not adjust the execution period of the battle effect or the start timing or the end timing of the battle effect according to the execution status of the other effect, the game can be notified that the battle effect has started at least by the beginning part of the battle effect. It is possible to allow the player to grasp the final part and the notification part of the display result (victory effect or defeat effect), which are important parts in the battle effect.

Further, in this embodiment, as effects for prompting the operation of the push button 31B, a normal mode operation prompting display 01TM031 (see FIG. 14-4(2)) is displayed, and a special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A ( 14-4 (7)) can be executed. The normal mode operation prompting display 01TM031 is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display, and when the push button 31B is operated while the normal mode operation prompting display 01TM031 is being displayed, the first mode ("CHANCE??") is displayed. ”) or the cut-in announcement effect of the second mode (“CHANCE!!”) is executed. On the other hand, the special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A is displayed after the ready-to-win state is established (during execution of the super ready-to-win effect), and when the push button 31B is operated while the special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A is being displayed. , the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed.

In this way, the operation prompting display is performed, and as the operation effects executed when the push button 31B is operated in response to the operation prompting display, the cut-in notice effect, the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect are performed. A performance exists. Here, when either the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, both the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect are executed. The probability of winning a big hit is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is executed without the cut-in. As a result, when the player operates the push button 31B, the player is interested in which operation suggesting effect (first change suggesting effect or second change suggesting effect) or cut-in notice effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve interest in the operation presentation.

Further, as described above, when the first change suggesting effect is executed, the display mode of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) to be changed effect is displayed more than when the second change suggesting effect is executed. The rate of change is high, and the rate of big hits is high. Therefore, when the player operates the push button 31B in response to the display of the operation prompting display 01TM031A of the special mode, which of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect will be executed. will pay attention to.

Note that the operation effects are not limited to the effects shown in the above embodiments. For example, it may be a zone production that changes to a background image showing a lightning strike heading toward the corresponding display from above the corresponding display), and a large number of characters (characters of the same type or characters of multiple types) form a group. A group announcement effect that traverses the entire screen including the area where the corresponding display (active display, pending display) is displayed may be used.

(Modification)
In the above embodiment, in the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect, the effect acting on the active display 01TM001 (the first change suggestion effect: the effect in which the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 and the flame effect is active display Effect acting on 01TM001, second change-suggesting effect: Effect that the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 01TM001. An effect of changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001 may be executed without executing the effect. For example, after making the visibility of the active display 01TM001 higher than normal, as in the third change suggesting effect shown below, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is performed without any effect acting on the active display 01TM001. may be changed.

(Third change suggestion production)
A specific example of such a third change suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-6 and 14-7. FIG. 14-6 is a time chart showing execution timing of each effect when executing the third change suggesting effect, and FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image to be displayed;

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "big hit" and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command is "super reach big hit". Then, a variable display of decoration patterns is executed, and a battle production in which a friend character and an enemy character battle is executed as a super ready-to-win production. Then, the occurrence of a big win is reported by executing a victory effect in which the ally character finally wins.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode ("CHANCE!!") in step S01TM1010, and changes the final display mode of the active display to the red mode in step S01TM1020. In step S01TM1030, it is determined that the change pattern of the active display is change pattern 104 (normal→red). Below, an example in which it is decided to execute the third change suggestion effect in step S01TM1040 will be described.

When the third change suggesting effect is executed, in the period of T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 14-6, as in the case where the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect are executed, (1) The production control shown in FIG. 14-4 (7) (the same production control as the period T1-T7 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 31B while the operation prompting display 01TM031A of the special mode is being displayed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-6), the aforementioned step S01TM1040. to execute the third change suggesting effect determined in .

When the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the third change suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing of T8), the third change suggesting effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed with the start of the third change suggesting effect. That is, by displaying the darkening image 01TM150 as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the visibility of the predetermined image is lowered to make it difficult to see. In the present embodiment, the decoration pattern and the ready-to-win effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) become invisible due to the execution of the blackout effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (18), the effect control CPU 120, while continuing the difficult-to-recognize state, displays the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display) displayed in the active display area 01TM003. is moved above the active display area 01TM003 to the center of the screen, and the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white round display) is enlarged and displayed. This improves the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) targeted for the third change suggesting effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white round display) to the red mode (red round display), as shown in FIG. 14-7 (19) ( timing of T9 shown in FIG. 14-8).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red mode active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen to restore it to its original size, and moves it down to the active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is lowered to return to the visibility before execution of the third change suggestion effect and the blackout effect. As a result, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 changed from the normal mode to the red mode. Then, by ending the display of the darkened image 01TM150, the difficult-to-recognize state is released, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the image relating to the decoration pattern and the battle effect) is recovered (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 14-6). As a result, the third change-suggesting effect is terminated, and the change-suggesting effect executed corresponding to the third change-suggesting effect and the blackout effect executed corresponding to the third change-suggesting effect are ended. Become.

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (20), the recovery of the visibility makes it easier to see the predetermined images (decorative symbols and images relating to the battle effect), and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, during the period when the blackout effect is being executed (the period of T8 to T10 shown in FIG. 14-6, the period of (18) to (19) shown in FIG. 14-7), the effect control CPU 120 changes The display control of the battle presentation corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed, and during this period, the display control regarding the middle portion of the battle presentation (the portion shown in (13) to (15) in FIG. 14-5 described above) is performed. running continuously.

Then, when the blackout effect ends, the battle effect becomes visible from the portion corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing. It is possible to see the battle production. Even after the blackout effect is finished, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area 5r of the image display device 5 continue to variably display the small patterns.

14-7 (21) (at the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-6). ("777" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of numbers ("777" in this example) constituting the decorative patterns stopped and displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is stopped. display. Then, a victory effect is executed in which the ally character 01TM100 wins over the enemy character 01TM110, and the characters "Victory!!"

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-6. The combination of decorative symbols ("777") currently displayed is fixed and stopped, and the combination of small patterns ("777") stopped and displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are fixed and stopped. As a result, the variable display of decorative symbols and the variable display of small symbols corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

As described above, when the third change-suggestion effect is executed, the images related to the decorative symbols and the super ready-to-win effect, which have been easily visible on the image display device 5, become difficult to see due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the active display 01TM001, which is the target of the change effect, moves to the center of the screen and is enlarged and displayed, so that the visibility of the active display 01TM001, which is the target of the change effect, is improved. will change.

That is, before execution of the third change suggestion effect, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) targeted for the change effect is lower than the visibility of the predetermined image (image relating to the super ready-to-win effect), but the visibility of the third change suggestion effect In the production, by making the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) targeted for the change production higher than the visibility of the predetermined image (image related to the super reach production), the corresponding display (active display) targeted for the change production 01TM001) can be made to attract the player's attention and interest in the change presentation can be improved.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect are executed as the effects related to the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. However, it is not limited to such a form, and similar to the first change suggesting effect, the second change suggesting effect, and the third change suggesting effect as the look-ahead forewarning effect related to the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not been executed. may be executed. That is, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the change pattern of the pending display and the type of change suggestive effect are determined, and the variable display (target change) based on the starting winning is executed multiple times. Of these, the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, or the third change suggestion effect may be executable for the pending display corresponding to the change display (target change) based on the start winning.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which the number of times the display mode of the corresponding display (active display) corresponding to one variable display changed was once. A change pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display or the suspended display changes multiple times. For example, when the number of pending memories becomes 2 due to the start winning, the second hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the normal mode, and then with the first hold display shift (hold 2 → hold 1 ), the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect for the first pending display corresponding to the starting prize is executed, the first pending display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then , With the second hold display shift (hold 1 → hold 0), the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect for the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is executed, The active display may change from blue to red.

In this way, it may be possible to perform a plurality of change suggesting presentations for the corresponding display (suspended display or active display) corresponding to one variable display. For example, a second change suggestion effect is executed in response to the first change effect (change from normal mode to blue mode), and a second change suggestion effect is executed in response to the second change effect (change from blue mode to red mode). 1 You may perform change suggestion production|presentation. Also, for the corresponding display (suspended display or active display) corresponding to one variable display, first, as the first change suggesting effect, the second change suggesting effect of the failure mode is executed, and the display mode of the corresponding corresponding display is changed to normal. The first change suggestion effect may be executed as the second change suggestion effect without changing the mode, and the display mode of the corresponding display may be changed from the normal mode to the red mode.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the blackout effect is executed in accordance with the execution of the change suggestive effect (the first change suggestive effect, the third change suggestive effect), and the decoration pattern and the ready-to-win effect image (image related to the battle effect) are executed. ) becomes difficult to see, but the visibility of both the corresponding display that is the target of the change suggesting effect (e.g. active display) and the corresponding display that is not the target of the change suggesting effect (e.g. pending display) is also reduced. Although an example of not performing the change suggestion effect is shown, the visibility of the corresponding display (for example, the active display 01TM001) targeted for the change suggestion effect does not decrease when the blackout effect is executed. The visibility of the corresponding display (for example, the pending display 01TM002) that is not the target of the display may be lowered to make it difficult to see.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the blackout effect is always executed (at a rate of 100%) when the first change suggesting effect is executed. The blackout effect may not be executed even when the change suggesting effect is executed. For example, when executing the first change suggestion effect, if the display result is a loss, the blackout effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and if the display result is a big win, the blackout effect is performed at a rate of 80%. You can also run it with Further, even when the blackout effect is executed, the first change suggestion effect may not be executed.

(5) Further, a plurality of modes may be provided as modes of the blackout effect. For example, even in an invisible state, the degree of visibility is relatively low, and the display priority is lower than the darkened image through the darkened image (the player seems to be displayed in the back). A blackout effect of the first mode in which a darkened image with a ratio of 50% is superimposed and displayed, and the degree of visibility is relatively high even in the difficult-to-recognize state, and the display priority is lower than the darkened image through the darkened image (game A blackout effect of the second mode may be provided in which a darkened image having a layer transmittance of 0% is superimposed and displayed so that the image appears to be displayed in the back of the display layer. Then, when the display result is a big hit, the blackout effect of the second mode with a high degree of visibility difficulty may be executed at a higher rate than when the display result is a loss. Further, when the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) changes, the blackout effect of the second mode with a higher degree of visibility difficulty is executed at a higher rate than when the display mode of the corresponding display does not change. You can do so.

(6) In the above embodiment, the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect, and the visibility of the predetermined image (decorative pattern and ready-to-reach effect image (including images related to battle effect)) is improved. Although an example of lowering is shown, the visibility of the predetermined image is improved by executing an effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image when the first change suggesting effect is started. You can do it. For example, before the first change suggestion effect is executed, the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) targeted for the first change suggestion effect. The predetermined image is displayed in an enlarged manner (visibility is further improved) when the change-suggestion effect is executed, and the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display targeted for the first change-suggestion effect. The state is maintained, and in that state, the movable body action effect is executed (the first change suggestive effect is terminated), and the display mode of the corresponding display targeted for the first change suggestive effect is changed. can be

In addition, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the blackout effect is executed to temporarily lower the visibility of the predetermined image, and then the effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed so that the predetermined image is visually recognized. In accordance with the execution of the first change suggestive effect, the effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed to temporarily improve the visibility of the predetermined image, and then the blackout effect is executed. Therefore, the visibility of the predetermined image may be lowered.

(Example of pachinko machine that executes variable fall judgment)
As a pachinko game machine, in a state where the game state is controlled to a high probability state, a probability variable fall determination is executed for whether or not to shift the game state to a low probability state, and the game state is based on the result of the probability variable fall determination. There is a pachinko machine that shifts to a low probability state. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-4, it is possible to apply a configuration in which the jackpot probability differs according to the set value, to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes such variable probability fall determination. be. Below, the jackpot probability differs according to the setting value that has been set, will be described pachinko gaming machine that executes probability variable fall determination.

In such a pachinko game machine, when a starting prize (winning to the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port) occurs, a random number for probability variable fall determination is extracted, and in a high probability state special based on the starting prize When the variable display of the pattern is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high probability state based on the random number for the probability variation fall judgment (presence or absence of the so-called probability variation fall), and the high probability state is determined based on the determination result I am trying to terminate it. Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects the winning in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening in the switch process shown in step S21 of FIG. Whether to end the high probability state based on the random number for the probability variation fall determination when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning prize is started in the probability state (in the special symbol normal processing shown in step S110 in FIG. 5) is executed, and based on the determination result, the high-probability state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-probability state.

In this probability variable fall judgment, it is determined to be either "no probability variable fall" or "with probability variable fall" by the judgment using the random number for the probability variable fall judgment. The state is continued, and the high-probability state ends based on the determination that "there is a probability variable fall". The CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a variable probability fall determination result specifying command indicating the presence or absence of the variable probability fall determination in the variable probability fall determination.

FIG. 14-8 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 14-8(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 determines the setting value (1 to 6 ) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table to execute the big hit determination.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1, which is a random number for special figure display result determination, is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 in non-probability variation time (low probability time), if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, When the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability is lower (1/300 ) to win the jackpot. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 in non-probability variation time (low probability time), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first has a higher probability (1/290) than when the set value is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/290) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 in non-probability variation time (low probability time), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first has a higher probability (1/280) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 in non-probability variation time (low probability time), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first has a higher probability (1/270) than when the set values are "1", "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/270) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 in non-probability variation time (low probability time), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first has a higher probability (1/260) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3" and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/260) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 in non-probability variation time (low probability time), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first has a higher probability (1/250) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", "4" and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at the time when the variable display is started in the low probability state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 14-8 (A) to ( F), when matching any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big wins, it is determined that the special symbols will be big wins (big wins A to F). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-8(A) to 14-8(F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

Next, after the display result becomes "big win", the game is controlled to the big win game state (big win), and after the big win game state, the game is controlled to the high probability and high base state. CPU103, the display result in the state of being controlled to the high probability high base state, the display result determination table (FIGS. 14-9 (A) to (F)) at the time of probability variation (high probability) to be described later Based on decide.

FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the high probability state. As shown in FIGS. 14-9(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 determines the setting value (1 to 6 (either of the above) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table, and the big hit determination is executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-9 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of probability variation (at high probability), if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first When one special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability is lower than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" (1/60). It is designed to win the jackpot. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/60) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of probability variation (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first , the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/58) than when the set value is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/58) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of probability variation (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first , with a higher probability (1/56) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/56) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of probability variation (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first , with a higher probability (1/54) than when the set values are "1", "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/54) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of probability variation (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first , a higher probability (1/52) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/52) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of probability variation (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first , a higher probability (1/50) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", "4" and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high-accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. F), if any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 14-9(A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a big hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-8 and FIG. The determination of the big hit may be performed using a common table for the case of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display regardless of the variation special symbol designating buffer. .

In this embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state, it is controlled to a high probability high base state. Then, in the probability variable fall judgment that is executed when the variable display of the special symbol is started in the high probability high base state, if it is determined that "no probability variable fall" is determined, the high probability high base state continues, and the "probability variable If it is determined that there is a fall, it will shift to a low-probability state (low-probability-high base state or low-probability-low base state). The random number for the probability variable fall judgment is a random number extracted at the time of the start winning (at the timing when the first start opening switch 22A or the second start opening switch 22B is turned on), and in the high probability high base state, the start winning prize When the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to is started, the probability variable fall determination is executed based on the random number for the probability variable fall determination corresponding to the start winning prize.

FIG. 14-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the variable probability fall determination table. The probability variable fall determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the probability variable fall determination value to be compared with the random number for the probability variable fall determination is set. The probability variable fall determination table is a table referred to in the high probability state, and is referred to determine "with variable probability fall" or "without variable probability fall" based on the random number for determining the probability variable fall.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, in the variable probability drop determination, the variable probability drop is won with a probability of 1/80. That is, with a probability of 1/80, it is determined that there is a "variable fall", and with a probability of 79/80, it is determined that there is no "variable fall".

That is, when the CPU 103 is about to start the variable display in the high probability state, the random value for the probability variable fall determination is any probability variable fall determination value corresponding to "with probability variable fall" shown in FIG. 14-10 , it decides to end the high-probability state.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the starting winning (winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) occurs, a random number for probability variable fall determination is extracted, and in the high probability state, the starting winning When the variable display of the special pattern based on is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high probability state based on the random number for the probability variation fall judgment (presence or absence of the so-called probability variation fall), and based on the determination result, the high probability I'm trying to end the state. That is, at the timing when the variable display is about to start in the high probability state, if it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination, the high probability state is shifted to the low probability state. Therefore, since the determination probability variable fall determination is performed before the big hit determination, it prevents the big hits from occurring too much in succession (prevents the so-called overrunning).

Here, regarding the above-described big hit determination, as shown in FIGS. Therefore, the display result determination table is referred to, but regarding the variable probability fall determination, the common variable probability fall determination table (FIGS. 14-10) is referred to regardless of the currently set value. That is, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special symbols in the high probability state (in the special symbol normal processing shown in step S110 of FIG. 5), the display result corresponding to the set value is set for the big hit determination. A determination table is selected and executed based on the selected display result determination table, but the variable probability fall determination is performed based on the common variable probability fall determination table regardless of the set values. As a result, the rate of ending the high-probability state becomes a common rate (1/80 in this example) regardless of the set value.

By doing so, it becomes possible to suppress the amount of information (the number of tables) required for executing the variable probability fall determination, and it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage capacity of the ROM 101 . In the high probability state, the probability of variable fall is constant regardless of the set value, but as shown in Figure 14-9, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of hitting the jackpot. The probability of being determined to be a "big hit" in the big hit determination before it is determined is also increased. As a result, it becomes easier for big hits to occur in succession (so-called consecutive wins tend to occur).

Next, the game flow in the pachinko game machine that executes the probability variation fall determination will be described. In the example of the game flow shown below, when a big hit occurs, it is controlled to a high probability high base state after the jackpot game state ends, and when the fluctuation display is started in the high probability high base state, the probability variable fall judgment is executed . Here, until the 100th variation display is started without the display result of the variation display executed in the high-probability-high base state becoming a "jackpot", (1) corresponding to the 100th variation display If it is determined that there is a "probable variable fall" in any of the executed probability variable fall judgments, the fluctuation display corresponding to the probability variable fall judgment (any of the 1st to 100th fluctuation display) will be low from the start. After being controlled to the high-probability base state and maintained in the low-probability-high base state until the 100th fluctuation display is completed, it is controlled to the low-probability-low base state.

On the other hand, (2) if it is not determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in any of the probability variable fall determinations performed in response to the 100th variable display, at least the 100th variable display is completed. It is maintained in a high base state, and when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall judgment executed in response to the 101st or later variable display, the low probability from the start of the variable display corresponding to the probability variable fall judgment Controlled to a low base state.

Fig. 14-11 (A) is when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall judgment within 100 rotations after being controlled to the high probability high base state after the jackpot game state (corresponds to the above (1) case) is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow, and FIG. 14-11 (B) is a probability variable fall determination after 101 rotations after being controlled to a high probability high base state after the jackpot game state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the case of determination (corresponding to (2) above); In this way, according to the number of display fluctuations after being controlled to the high probability high base state when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall judgment executed in the high probability high base state, the game flow is It is different, and the variation pattern table referred to is also different.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of performance modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the performance control CPU 120 can control the performance mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of performance modes. Specifically, in the normal state (low probability low base state), it is possible to control the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, high base state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state) Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, 14-19 and 14-20, which will be described later, it is possible to control the battle RUSH mode in which the friendly character 01TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen as the background image of the decoration pattern. ing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, 14-19 and 14-20, in the battle RUSH mode, the characters "battle RUSH" and "remaining x times" (x = 0 to 100) are displayed in the upper left part of the screen. , or ?) is displayed, the number of remaining variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is suggested. Here, "100 remaining times" is displayed in the first variation display executed after the big win game state, and thereafter, "99 times remaining", "98 remaining times", and "98 times remaining" are displayed each time the variation display is performed without occurrence of a big win. times”, “remaining 97 times”, etc., the suggested number of remaining variable display times is decremented and updated by one. The number of remaining variable display times suggested in this way is the minimum number of variable display times that can be executed without the occurrence of a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state) (so-called remaining guaranteed time reduction number of times). It can also be said.

Then, when the 100th variation display is executed without the occurrence of a big win after the shift to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big win game state), "remaining 0 times" is displayed (Fig. 14-16). (10) and Figures 14-19 (3)). When the 100th variable display is executed, if it is in a low probability high base state (any probability variable fall judgment executed in response to the previous variable display including the 100th variable display " If it is determined that there is a variable fall"), the battle RUSH mode (high base state) ends with this 100th variation display (see Figure 14-17 (14)), and from the next variation display Shift to normal mode (low probability low base state).

On the other hand, after shifting to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state), when the 100th variation display is performed without the occurrence of a big win, the 100th variation display is performed. When the definite height base state is maintained (when it is not determined that there is a definite variable fall in any of the definite variable fall determinations performed in response to the fluctuation display up to that point, including the 100th variable display) , the battle RUSH mode continues, and in the variable display after the 101st time, the characters "remaining ? times" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen (see FIG. 14-19 (7)). This is because when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall judgment executed in response to the 101st or later variable display, the game state shifts to the low probability low base state in the variable display. , This is because the minimum number of variable display times that can be executed without a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state) (so-called remaining time saving number of times guaranteed) is uncertain. Then, when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination executed in response to the 101st or later variable display, the RUSH mode ends with this variable display, and the normal mode from the next variable display transition to

(When the probability variation falls within 100 fluctuations after transitioning to the high probability base state)
As shown in FIG. 14-11 (A), the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the variable display is started when the production mode is controlled to the normal mode, and the variable When the display result of the display becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to the big win game state, and after the big win game state is finished, the game state is controlled to the high-probability/high base state, and the performance mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability variable fall determination when starting the variable display in a state in which the game state is controlled to the high probability high base state.

Here, the CPU 103, in the high-probability-high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high-probability-high base state), the probability variable fall Based on the judgment that "no variable fall" is determined, and the display result is determined to be "lost", the high probability high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (A) A variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table. In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the ready-to-win mode and the display result is lost, and the "normal reach-lost" variation pattern is the variable display mode of the decorative pattern. and a variation pattern of ``super reach loss (battle draw)'' in which the variation display of the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win mode and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. It is In the example of FIG. 14-12 (A), at a rate of 90%, it is determined to be a "non-reach out" variation pattern, at a rate of 8%, it is determined to be a "normal reach out" variation pattern, and at a rate of 2%, " It is determined to be a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw)".

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability variable fall judgment Based on the determination that "no variable fall" is determined and the display result is determined to be "big hit", the variation for the variable fall non-election at the time of the high probability base shown in FIG. 14-12 (B) A variation pattern is determined based on the pattern determination table. In this example, a variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" in which the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is the ready-to-win mode, and a battle production in which the friendly character wins over the enemy character with the variable display mode of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win mode are executed. A "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" variation pattern is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12(B), the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 95%.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command designating "no probability variable fall" together with a reserved memory count subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed from now on is within the 100th variable display after the shift to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state). , to continue the battle RUSH mode.

On the other hand, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability fluctuation fall determination Based on the determination that "there is a probability variable fall" and the display result is determined to be "lost", the variation based on the variation pattern determination table for the probability variable fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (C). determine the pattern. In this example, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the current set value is changed depending on the battle effect in which the battle between the friend character and the enemy character ends in a draw, and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established. There is provided a variation pattern of “loss of super reach (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect” in which a first setting suggestion effect suggesting is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12(C), the variation pattern of "loss of super reach (battle tie) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability variable fall judgment Based on the determination that "there is a variable fall" and that the display result is "big hit", the variation is based on the variation pattern determination table for the big hit for the variable fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (D). determine the pattern. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the mode of variable display of decorative symbols becomes a reach mode and a battle effect is executed in which a friend character wins over an enemy character. In the example of FIG. 14-12(D), the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "with a probability variable fall" together with a reserved memory number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed from now on is within the 100th variable display after the shift to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state). , to continue the battle RUSH mode.

The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability-high base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the fact that "there is a probability-variable fall" is determined in the probability-variable fall determination.

In the low-probability-high-base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is within the 99th variation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after shifting to the high-base state), the CPU 103 sets the display result as "loss". Based on the determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation variation pattern determination table at the time of the low probability height base shown in FIG. 14-12 (E). In this example, there is a variation pattern of "non-ready-to-lose" in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not in the ready-to-win mode and the display result is lost, and a "normal reach-to-lose" variation pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the ready-to-win mode. and a variation pattern of ``super reach loss (battle draw)'' in which a battle effect is executed in which the aspect of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win aspect and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. It is In the example of Figure 14-12 (E), 95% of the time it is determined to be a "non-reach" variation pattern, a 3% rate is determined to be a "normal reach out" variation pattern, and a 2% rate of " It is determined to be a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw)".

In addition, in the low-probability-high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big-hit game state (after transition to the high-base state), the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit". ”, the variation pattern is determined based on the big hit variation pattern determination table at the time of low probability height base shown in FIG. 14-12 (F). In this example, a variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" in which the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is the ready-to-win mode, and a battle production in which the friendly character wins over the enemy character with the variable display mode of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win mode are executed. A variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12(F), the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 98%.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed from now on is within the 100th variable display after the shift to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state). , to continue the battle RUSH mode.

As described above, the CPU 103 maintains the high base state (high probability high base state or low Fixed height base state) is continued. Here, when starting the 100th variation display, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table dedicated to the 100th variation display.

In the low-probability-high base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is the 100th variation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after shifting to the high-base state), the CPU 103 determines the display result as "loss". Based on what has been done, the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th deviation variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(G). In this example, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the current set value is suggested by the battle effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character, and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established. 1. A setting suggesting effect and a display mode of a battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect ends (at the timing after the ally character is notified that the enemy character has been defeated). There is provided a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestive effect" in which two setting suggestive effects are executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (G), the variation pattern of "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current set value based on the determination that "there is a variable probability fall" in the probability variable fall determination. Even if you move from a high-probability state to a low-probability state, if a high setting is suggested in the setting suggestion effect, you can give the player a plus element and a compensation element to continue the game, set in relation to the probability variation fall judgment Interest can be improved in terms of executing the suggestive production.

In addition, in the low-probability-high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the 100th variation display after the end of the big-hit game state (after shifting to the high-base state), the CPU 103 sets the display result to "big hit". Based on the determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th-only jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (H). In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the mode of variable display of decorative symbols becomes a reach mode and a battle effect is executed in which a friend character wins over an enemy character. In the example of FIG. 14-12(H), the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 100%.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed from now on is within the 100th variable display after the shift to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state). , to continue the battle RUSH mode.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability fluctuation fall determination Based on the determination that "there is a probability variable fall" and the display result is determined to be "missed", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 14-12 (G). decide.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability fluctuation fall determination Based on the fact that it is determined that there is a "variable fall" and that the display result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th dedicated jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (H). decide.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "with a probability variable fall" together with a reserved memory number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed from now on is within the 100th variable display after the shift to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state). , to continue the battle RUSH mode.

The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability-high base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the fact that "there is a probability-variable fall" is determined in the probability-variable fall determination.

Then, the CPU 103 terminates the low-probability-high-base state when the 100th variation display is completed after the jackpot game state is ended (after controlling to the high-base state). As a result, the next variation display (the 101st time after the end of the jackpot game state) is executed in the normal state (low-probability-low base state). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the battle RUSH mode in response to completion of the 100th variation display after shifting to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot game state is completed). As a result, the next variation display (the 101st time after the end of the jackpot game state) is executed in the normal mode.

(In case of falling after 101 fluctuation after high probability high base state transition)
As shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), after the big hit game state is controlled to the high-probability-high base state, before the 100th fluctuation display is executed without the occurrence of the next big hit, the probability variable fall If it is not determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the determination, game control and effect control are performed by the method shown below.

CPU103, in the high probability high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the 100th variation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability variation fall determination is "probability variation Based on the fact that it is determined that there is no fall" and that the display result is determined to be "missed", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th failure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-13 (I). . In this example, there is provided a variation pattern of "super reach failure (battle draw)" in which the mode of variable display of decorative symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode, and a battle effect is executed in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. . In the example of FIG. 14-13 (I), the variation pattern of "Super reach lost (battle draw)" is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after shifting to the high probability high base state), in the probability variable fall determination Based on the fact that it is determined that there is no probability variation fall and that the display result is determined to be a "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-13 (J). decide. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode and a battle effect is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (J), the variation pattern of super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command designating "no probability variable fall" together with a reserved memory count subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed from now on is within the 100th variable display after the shift to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state). , to continue the battle RUSH mode.

CPU103, in the high probability high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the 101st or later variation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after transition to the high probability high base state), in the probability variation fall judgment " Based on the fact that it is determined that there is no probability variable fall and that the display result is determined to be "missed", the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the 101st and subsequent times shown in FIG. 14-13 (K). decide. In this example, there is provided a variation pattern of "non-reach failure" in which the variation display mode of the decoration pattern does not become the reach mode and the display result is lost. In the example of FIGS. 14-13(K), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out of reach" at a rate of 100%.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the 101st or later fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability variable fall determination Based on the fact that it is determined that "no variable fall" and that the display result is "big hit", the variation is based on the big hit variation pattern determination table for the 101st time or later shown in FIG. 14-13 (L) determine the pattern. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the mode of variable display of decorative symbols becomes a reach mode and a battle effect is executed in which a friend character wins over an enemy character. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (L), the variation pattern of super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "no probability variable fall" together with a reserved memory number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120, which has received one set of commands, determines that the variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed from now on is the variable display after the 101st time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state). The battle RUSH mode is continued even after the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, based on the reception of the probability variable fall determination result designation command designating "no fall".

CPU103, in the high probability high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the 101st or later variation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after transition to the high probability high base state), in the probability variation fall judgment " Based on the determination that there is a probability variable fall" and the display result is determined to be "lost", the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the probability variable fall winning shown in FIG. 14-13 (M). decide. In this example, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the current set value is suggested by the battle effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character, and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established. 1 setting suggestive effect, and 2nd setting suggesting the current set value by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect ends (timing when it is notified that the ally character has been defeated by the enemy character). A variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestive effect" is provided in which the suggestive effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (M), the variation pattern of "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the 101st or later fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability variable fall determination Based on the determination that "there is a probability variable fall" and that the display result is "big hit", the variation is based on the big hit variation pattern determination table for the probability variable fall winning shown in FIG. 14-13 (N). determine the pattern. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the mode of variable display of decorative symbols becomes a reach mode and a battle effect is executed in which a friend character wins over an enemy character. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (N), the fluctuation pattern of super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability-low base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the fact that "there is a probability-variable fall" is determined in the probability-variable fall determination.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "with a probability variable fall" together with a reserved memory number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120, which has received one set of commands, determines that the variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed from now on is the 101st and subsequent variable display after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state), and " Based on the reception of the probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "with probability variable fall", the battle RUSH mode is terminated with the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

That is, when the next variable display is started, the game state is the normal state (low probability/low base state) and the effect mode is the normal mode.

In this way, in the high-probability-high base state, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), when the display result is determined to be "missing", super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 2% On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-12(B), when the display result is determined to be a "big win", super ready-to-win (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 95%. That is, the ratio of execution of super ready-to-win (battle performance) when controlled to the big win game state is higher than the ratio of execution of super ready-to-win (battle performance) when not controlled to the big win game state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (C) and (D), and FIGS. 14-13 (M) and (N), when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination, 100 While super reach (battle production) is executed at a rate of %, as shown in FIGS. , Super Reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 2% when the display result is "lost" and at a rate of 95% when the display result is "big hit". That is, the rate at which super reach (battle effect) is executed when the probability variable fall judgment is determined to be "with probability variable fall" is super reach (battle effect ) is executed at a higher rate.

Therefore, when the super reach (battle production) is executed, the player can recognize that the rate of becoming an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is high, and the rate of occurrence of the probability variable fall that is disadvantageous to the player High is also recognizable. In this way, the execution of super reach (battle effect) suggests both advantageous and disadvantageous events for the player. Interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if the event that triggered the execution of the super reach (battle effect) was the occurrence of the probability variable fall, the first setting suggestion effect during the execution of the variable display that was the target of the probability variable fall determination is executed, and the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are executed during the execution of the variable display that ends the high base state, so that the player can grasp the settings of the gaming machine that is currently playing the game. Or, since it is possible to guess, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the occurrence of the variable probability fall.

(Setting suggestion production)
As described above, from the end of the jackpot game state to the execution of the 99th variation display, it is determined that the display result determination is "missing", and the probability variation fall determination is determined as "with probability variation fall". Based on this, as the variation pattern of the variation display corresponding to the probability variation fall judgment, the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion performance" accompanied by the battle production and the first setting suggestion production that will be a draw is selected. (See Figure 14-12(C)). The performance control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion performance on the basis of receiving a variation pattern designation command designating a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion performance".

In addition, as described above, when the 100th variation display is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the 100th variation display including the 100th variation display is determined by the probability variation fall determination. When the 100th variable display is performed based on the determination of "yes", on the condition that the display result determination is determined to be "missed", a battle effect that results in defeat, and the first A variation pattern of “loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect” accompanied by a setting suggestion effect and a second setting suggestion effect is selected. The effect control CPU 120 performs the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command designating the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle tie) + setting suggestion effect". Execute.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect executed in the 100th variation display after the variable display determined as "with variable probability fall" in the probability variable fall determination or the end of the big hit game state is shown in FIG. 14 to be described later. As shown in -16 (6), etc., the currently set value is suggested by the mode of characters displayed when the ready-to-reach state is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (A), the number of fluctuation display times when it is determined that there is a probability variable fall in the probability variable fall judgment is (1) high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode) If it is 50 times or less after being controlled to , the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect is determined to be "Reach !!" If the number of times is 51 or more, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect is determined to be "REACH".

Here, in (1), if the current set value is any one of 1 to 3 when displaying the characters "Reach!!", the characters "Reach!!" are displayed in a blue mode. If the current set value is any one of 4 to 6, the letters "Reach!!" are displayed in red. Therefore, if the characters "Reach!!" are in a blue aspect, it suggests that the setting value is one of "1", "2", and "3", and the characters "Reach!!" If is in the red color, it would imply that the setpoint is one of "4", "5", and "6". That is, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33% (1/3) in the case of the blue mode "Reach!!", and the setting suggestion effect is in the case of the red mode "Reach!!" is 33% (1/3).

In addition, in (2), when the characters "REACH" are displayed, if the current setting value is any of 1 to 4, the characters "REACH" are displayed in blue, and the current setting is displayed. If the value is anywhere from 3 to 6, the letters "REACH" are displayed in red. Therefore, if the letters "REACH" are in blue, it suggests that the setting value is one of "1", "2", "3", and "4", and the letters "REACH" is in the red aspect, it suggests that the set value is one of '3', '4', '5' and '6'. That is, in the case of "REACH" in the blue mode, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 25% (1/4), and in the case of "REACH" in the red mode, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 25% (1/4). 25% (1/4). Note that the display mode of the letters "REACH" when the set value is "3" or "4" is assigned to the blue mode or the red mode at a rate of 50%.

In addition, the second setting suggestion effect executed in the 100th variation display after the end of the jackpot game state is, as shown in FIGS. The currently set value is suggested by the display mode (background, number of stars) of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the enemy character is notified of the defeat. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (B), the number of variable display times when it is determined that there is a probability variable fall in the probability variable fall determination is (1) high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode) If it is 30 times or less after being controlled to, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined as "full moon background", and (2) after being controlled to a high-precision high base state (battle RUSH mode) If it is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined as "half moon background", and (3) 61 times after being controlled to the high-precision high base state (battle RUSH mode) In the case above, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "crescent moon background". The number of stars displayed in the second setting suggesting effect suggests the set value, and 1 to 6 stars are displayed in the upper part of the image display device 5 .

Here, in (1), when the "full moon background" is displayed, if the current set value is "p (p=1 to 6)", p stars are displayed. Therefore, when the number of stars is 1, it suggests that the setting value is "1", and when the number of stars is 2, it suggests that the setting value is "2". , if the number of stars is 3, the setting value is implied to be "3", and if the number of stars is 4, the setting value is implied to be "4". , if the number of stars is 5, the setting value is implied to be "5", and if the number of stars is 6, the setting value is implied to be "6". there is That is, when the "full moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 100%.

In addition, in (2), when the "half moon background" is displayed, if the current set value is "q (q=1 to 6)", q-1 or q stars are displayed. Let Therefore, if the number of stars is 1, the setting value is suggested to be "2" or "1", and if the number of stars is 2, the setting value is suggested to be "3" or "2". ”, and if the number of stars is 3, it suggests that the setting value is “4” or “3”, and if the number of stars is 4, the setting If the value is '5' or '4' and the number of stars is 5, it suggests that the setting value is '6' or '5', and the number of stars is 6, it suggests that the set value is '1' or '6'. That is, when the "half-moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 50%.

In addition, in (3), when the "crescent moon background" is displayed, if the current setting value is "r (r=1 to 6)", r-1, r, or r+1 Show stars. Therefore, if the number of stars is 1, it suggests that the setting value is "2", "1", or "6", and if the number of stars is 2, the setting value is " 3", "2", or "1", and if the number of stars is 3, it suggests that the setting value is "4", "3", or "2" , and if the number of stars is 4, it suggests that the setting value is "5", "4", or "3", and if the number of stars is 5, the setting value suggests '6', '5', or '4', and if the number of stars is 6, the set value should be '1', '6', or '5' It suggests. That is, when the "crescent moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33%.

In this embodiment, when the actual set value is 1, there are cases where q−1=0 in (2) above, and r−1=0 in (3) above. If the number of stars to be displayed is set to 0 in these cases, it contradicts the set value range (1 to 6). Therefore, when q−1=0 in (2) and when r−1=0 in (3), the number of stars to be displayed is six. Also, in this embodiment, when the actual set value is 6, r+1=7 in the above (3) may occur. If the number of stars to be displayed in this case is set to 7, it contradicts the set value range (1 to 6). Therefore, when r+1=7 in (3), the number of stars actually displayed is one.

In the first setting suggesting effect, the reliability of the setting suggesting effect increases in the order of "REACH"<"Reach!!". That is, [when the number of times of variation display determined as "with probability variation fall" in probability variation fall determination is 51 times or more after being controlled to high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)] First setting to be executed Rather than suggestive production, [if the number of variable display times determined as "with probability variation fall" in probability variation fall judgment is 50 times or less after being controlled to high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)] The 1-setting suggestion effect has a higher reliability of the suggested setting value. In this way, the first setting suggestion with different reliability depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation display after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)) when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall judgment Since the performance can be executed, it is possible to associate the timing of the variable probability fall with the reliability of the first setting suggestion performance, and the interest of the first setting suggestion performance can be improved.

Similarly, in the second setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of crescent moon background<half moon background<full moon background. That is, [when the number of times of variation display determined as "with probability variation fall" in probability variation fall determination is 61 times or more after being controlled to high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)] second setting executed Rather than suggestive production, [when the number of times of fluctuation display determined as "with probability variation fall" in probability variation fall judgment is 31 times or more and 60 times or less after being controlled to high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)] The second setting suggestion effect to be executed has a higher reliability of the suggested setting value, and furthermore, the number of times of fluctuation display determined as “with probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall judgment is high 30 times or less after being controlled to the base state (battle RUSH mode)], the reliability of the suggested setting value is higher. In this way, the second setting suggestion with different reliability depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation display after being controlled to the high probability base state (battle RUSH mode)) when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall in the probability variation fall judgment Since the performance can be executed, it is possible to associate the timing of the variable probability fall with the reliability of the second setting suggestion performance, and the interest of the second setting suggestion performance can be improved.

Here, the reliability of the first setting suggestion effect is 25% or 33%, while the reliability of the second setting suggestion effect is 33%, 50% or 100%. Therefore, the highest reliability of 33% in the first setting suggestion effect and the lowest reliability of 33% in the second setting suggestion effect match, and the second setting suggestion effect is higher than the first setting suggestion effect. Reliability will be high. The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects that can be executed in one variation display based on the common variation pattern, and in this case, the timing after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. , the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, when the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed within one fluctuation display, the highly reliable second setting suggestion effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect. By doing so, the player's interest in the setting suggestion effect can be maintained.

In the present embodiment, when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect is always executed at an earlier timing. First, even when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Also, the second setting suggestion effect may be executed before the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Example of production in the case of a variable fall within 100 rotations)
Next, after the jackpot game state is finished, it is controlled to the high-probability-high base state (battle RUSH mode), and then the probability-variable fall judgment within 100 rotations is determined as "there is a probability-variable fall". 15, FIGS. 14-16, and 14-17. FIG. 14-15 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, and FIGS. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to the 2-setting suggestion effect;

In the example shown below, it is assumed that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "6". Incidentally, the CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the setting value by transmitting a command designating the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 . The setting value notified by this command is the setting value at power-on if it is not controlled to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed at power-on, and if it is controlled to the setting change mode at power-on This is the set value at the end of the setting change mode.

First, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (1), assumes that the 19th variation display is being executed after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of decorative patterns (T1 shown in FIGS. The variable display started at the timing of Also, in the active display area 01TM003, an active display 01TM001 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM100 in the central part of the image display device 5 and displays "Battle RUSH" is displayed. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 19th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Under the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "81 times left" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 (2), in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed (Fig. At the timing of T2 shown in 14-15), it is assumed that a new starting winning to the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory count has become one. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second pending display 01TM005 in the second pending display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second pending storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 while the second reserved memory number is 1. The decorative pattern "4" is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative pattern "6" is fixed and stopped in the pattern display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped (timing T3 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 20th variable display after controlling to the high-probability-high base state based on the fact that the second reservation storage number is 1, it is determined that "there is a probability-variable fall" in the probability-variable fall determination. Based on the determination and determination of the display result as "loss", the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle tie) + setting suggestion effect" is determined. Then, the CPU 103 includes a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" and a probability variation fall determination result specification command that specifies "with probability variation fall". A command is transmitted to CPU120 for production|presentation control. Then, the game state is shifted to the low probability high base state at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern specification command designating "super reach loss (battle tie) + setting suggesting effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the friend character and the enemy character are changed. and a first setting suggestion performance suggesting the current set value by the display mode of characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established. Then, based on the number of variable display times after being controlled to the high-probability-high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), the aspect of the first setting suggestion effect is determined.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a high probability high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) within 50 times (20 times in this example) in the probability variation fall determination "There is a probability variation fall" Based on the determination, the characters to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 20th variable display determined as “with variable probability fall” are determined to be “Reach!!”, and the set value is “6 is set to , it is assumed that it is decided to make the characters of ``Reach!!'' red. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (4), based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5, the pattern display area 5C, and In the pattern display area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0, and also erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second pending display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 20th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Under the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "80 times left" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 (5), in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed (Fig. At the timing of T5 shown in 14-15), it is assumed that the second reserved memory number becomes 1 due to the occurrence of a new start winning to the winning ball device 6B. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second pending display 01TM005 in the second pending display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second pending storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (6), the effect control CPU 120 puts "4" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. The ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern. Then, at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established, the first setting suggesting effect is executed to display the letters "reach!!"

When the ready-to-win state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the characters of "ready-to-win!!" are displayed in a red mode, so that the player understands the possibility of falling with the variable display. In addition, there is a possibility that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 that is currently playing is in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested setting value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual setting value. (reliability is high). In this way, although the player feels regrettable by executing the effect suggesting that the probability variable fall has occurred in the variable display where the probability variable fall has occurred, there is a possibility that the set value is high (4 to 6). Therefore, the decline in motivation to play is suppressed. In addition, since the number of remaining variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the player will play with a desire to generate a big win with the remaining number of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (7), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect, which is the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach (FIG. 14-16). 15). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(8), the effect control CPU 120 displays "Draw" on the upper part of the image display device 5 while the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5. ” is displayed (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 14-15). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the battle effect, and at the same time, the decorative pattern "4" is displayed in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern "5" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "5" is displayed in the pattern display area 5R. The symbol "4" is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped (timing T9 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 21st variable display after controlling to the high base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off". It is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of "non-reach loss". Then, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a set of commands including a variation pattern specifying command specifying the variation pattern "non-reach out". This 21st variation display is performed in the low probability high base state.

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (9), based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5, the pattern display area 5C, and In the pattern display area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (timing of T10 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0, and also erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second pending display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 21st variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Below the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "79 times left" are displayed.

After that, it is assumed that the display result is continuously "off" until the 99th variable display is executed after the control to the high base state. The game state during this period is a low certainty high base state.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 3, determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 100th variable display after controlling to the high base state. Therefore, it is assumed that the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined as the variation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a set of commands including a variation pattern specifying command specifying the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect". This 100th variation display is performed in the low probability base state.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern designation command designating "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern changes to the reach mode, and the friend character becomes the enemy character. A first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current set value by the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established, and a timing at which the battle effect ends It recognizes that the second setting suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value should be executed by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the fact that the game has been completed is notified. Then, based on the number of variable displays after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), the mode of the first setting suggestion effect and the mode of the second setting suggestion effect are determined.

At this time, with regard to the first setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion executed in response to the variable display (the 20th variable display after being controlled to the high-probability-high base state) that was determined to be "with variable probability fall" It is determined in the same manner as the presentation.

The effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a high probability high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) within 30 times (20 times in this example) in the probability variable fall determination. Based on this, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th variable display in the high base state, it is decided to set the background to be "full moon background" and the set value is set to "6". Based on this, it is assumed that the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 6. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. In the pattern display area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second reserved storage number becomes 2, and also erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The first second suspended display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second suspended displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the variable display currently being executed is the 100th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Under the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "0 times left" are displayed. Since it may be the last variable display executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode), the player will pay attention to the effect executed in the variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (11), the effect control CPU 120 puts "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the ready-to-win state should be established in the variation pattern. The ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern of . Then, at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established, the first setting suggesting effect is executed to display the letters "reach!!"

When the ready-to-win state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the characters "reach!!" In addition, it is understood that there is a possibility that the variable display performed at a relatively early stage (1 to 50 rotations) among the variable displays so far has caused a definite variable fall. In addition, there is a possibility that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 that is currently playing is in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested setting value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual setting value. (reliability is high). In this way, by making it possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect a plurality of times with different execution timings, it is assumed that the first setting suggestion effect is being executed when the variable display with the probability variable fall is being executed. Even if the performance is overlooked, the first setting suggestion performance that is executed again can be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (12), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect, which is the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach (FIG. 14- 15 timing of T13). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and a message "If defeated, end RUSH , RUSH continuation if draw" is displayed. That is, when a battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends at this time (100th fluctuation display), and there is a battle effect in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When executed, the effect is to show the player that the high base state will continue from the next time onward (variation display after the 101st time).

For the player, at this point, although the variable tumble has already been suggested, it has not been notified, and thus the player is not convinced of the tumble. Therefore, it is not clear whether the high base state (low probability high base state) ends with this or the high base state (high probability high base state) continues. In such a situation, by suggesting that the high base state (high probability high base state) will continue, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variable pattern of "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", as shown in FIG. A battle effect of losing to 01TM110 is executed (timing of T14 shown in FIGS. 14-15). At the timing when the ally character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and the decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C. The decoration pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is "missing" and that the high base state ends at the 100th variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (14), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 14-15). As described above, the production control CPU 120 is controlled to a high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) based on the fact that it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination within 30 times. Therefore, it is decided to set the background to "full moon background" and to set the number of stars to be displayed to 6 based on the fact that the set value is set to "6". Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image with a “full moon background” and the number of stars “6” as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 for notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

The player recognizes that the battle RUSH mode (high base state) has ended by looking at the battle RUSH end image 01TM300. Then, since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is a "full moon background" and the number of stars displayed is 6, it was executed in a high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the variable display. Among the fluctuation displays so far, the fluctuation display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations) grasps that the variable fall has occurred. Also, the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 currently playing is 6, and the suggested set value (6) is the actual set value (reliability is 100%). grasp.

In this way, in the variable display where the high base state (battle RUSH mode) ends, the player is disappointed by being notified that the probability has already fallen and the low probability state, but the suggested setting Since the value is high (6), the decline in motivation to play is suppressed. Although the high-base state (battle RUSH mode) has ended, the player can expect the next big win with a high probability, so the player continues to play with a desire to generate a big win.

Next, the CPU 103 terminates the low-probability-high base state based on the completion of the 100th fluctuation display after the jackpot game state is ended (after controlling to the high-base state), and the low-probability-low base state. (normal state) (timing of T16 shown in FIGS. 14-15). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the second setting suggestion effect, and at the same time, displays the decorative pattern "2" in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern "3" in the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area. At 5R, the decorative symbol "2" is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

As described above, the CPU 103 controls the high-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and based on the determination that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination, the variation corresponding to the probability variable fall determination At the timing when the display is started, the game state is shifted to the low probability high base state. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. ”, the battle RUSH mode continues until the 100th variation display ends. In this way, in the high-probability-high base state and the low-probability-high base state, by being controlled to a common production mode, the player can not only the background image of the decoration pattern and the reach production image (image related to the battle production) It becomes difficult to determine whether or not there has been a definite fall. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play after the variable probability fall, and increase interest in the setting suggesting effect.

(Example of production in the case of a variable fall after 101 rotations)
Next, after the jackpot game state is over, it is controlled to the high-probability-high base state (battle RUSH mode). 18, FIGS. 14-19, and 14-20. FIG. 14-18 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, and FIGS. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to the 2-setting suggestion effect; In addition, in the example shown below, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 shall be set to "2".

First, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (1), assumes that the 99th variable display is executed after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of decorative patterns (T1 shown in FIGS. The variable display started at the timing of The active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 01TM006 displays three second reserved displays 01TM005.

Here, the production control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM100 in the central part of the image display device 5 and displays "Battle RUSH" is displayed. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 99th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Under the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "1 time remaining" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 while the second reserved memory number is 3. The decorative pattern "5" is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative pattern "2" is fixed and stopped in the pattern display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped (timing T2 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "missing" when executing the 100th variable display after controlling to the high-probability-high base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 3. Based on, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw)". That is, based on the fact that it is not determined that there is a "probability variable fall" by the 100th variation display, the variation pattern without setting suggestion effect is determined. Then, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle draw)". This 100th variation display is performed in the high-probability-high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-19 (3), the effect control CPU 120 controls the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. In the area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (timing T3 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second reserved storage number becomes 2, and also erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The first second suspended display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second suspended displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Furthermore, in correspondence with the fact that the variable display currently being executed is the 100th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Under the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "0 times left" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(4), the effect control CPU 120 puts "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. The ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern of . Then, at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established, the characters "REACH" are displayed in blue on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, the effect control CPU 120, in the reach effect in the variable pattern without setting suggestion effect, after controlling to the battle RUSH mode (after being controlled to the high probability high base state) based on the number of times of variable display, Either "REACH!!" or "REACH" is determined as the characters to be displayed. Specifically, if it is 50 times or less after controlling to the battle RUSH mode, the characters to be displayed are determined as "Reach !!", and if it is 51 times or more after controlling to the battle RUSH mode determines the characters to be displayed to be "REACH".

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color (mode) of the characters to be displayed based on the display result in the ready-to-win effect in the variable pattern not accompanied by the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, when the display result is "loss", the blue mode is determined at a higher rate than when the display result is "big hit", and when the display result is "big hit", the display result is determined. A higher percentage of the decisions are made in the red mode than in the case of "missing". Therefore, in the battle RUSH mode, it is difficult for the player to perceive whether or not there is a variable fall by simply looking at the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (5), the effect control CPU 120 starts the battle effect, which is the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of super reach (timing T5 shown in FIG. 14-18). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and a message "If defeated, end RUSH , RUSH continuation if draw" is displayed. That is, when a battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends at this time (100th fluctuation display), and there is a battle effect in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When executed, the effect is to show the player that the high base state will continue from the next time onward (variation display after the 101st time).

In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variable pattern of "loss of super reach (battle draw)", as shown in FIG. A battle effect ending with is executed (timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 14-18). At the timing when the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are tied, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol. The decoration pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the display area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is "missing" and that the high base state will continue from the next time onwards (variation display after the 101st time).

Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 101st variable display after controlling to the high-probability-high base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 2. Based on, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be a “non-reach out-of-reach” variation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a set of commands including a variation pattern specifying command specifying the variation pattern "non-reach out". This 101st variation display is executed in the high-probability-high base state.

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (7), based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5, the pattern display area 5C, and In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of decorative symbols is started (timing T8 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second reserved storage number becomes 1, and also erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The first second suspended display 01TM005 that has been held is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second suspended displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed is the 101st variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode). In the upper left part (below "Battle RUSH"), the characters "Remaining? Times" are displayed. Since the period during which the characters "remaining?" will pay attention to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (8), in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed (Fig. At the timing of T9 shown in 14-18), it is assumed that a new starting winning to the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory count has become two. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second pending display 01TM005 in the second pending display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second pending storage number has increased.

After that, it is assumed that the display result is continuously "off" until the 123rd variable display is executed after the control to the high base state. The game state during this period is a high-probability-high base state.

Next, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 is executing the 124th variable display after being controlled to the high-probability-high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of decorative patterns (T10 shown in FIGS. The variable display started at the timing of Also, in the active display area 01TM003, an active display 01TM001 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (9), in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed (Fig. At the timing of T11 shown in 14-18), it is assumed that a new starting winning to the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number has become one. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second pending display 01TM005 in the second pending display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second pending storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (10), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 while the second reserved memory number is 1. The decorative pattern "1" is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative pattern "2" is fixed and stopped in the pattern display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped (timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 125th variable display after controlling to the high-probability-high base state based on the fact that the second reservation storage number is 1, the probability-variable fall determination indicates that "there is a probability variable fall". Based on the determination and determination of the display result as "loss", the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined. Then, the CPU 103 includes a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" and a probability variation fall determination result specification command that specifies "with probability variation fall". A command is transmitted to CPU120 for production|presentation control. Then, the game state is shifted to the low-probability-low base state at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern designation command designating "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern changes to the reach mode, and the friend character becomes the enemy character. , the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value by the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established, and the timing at which the battle effect ends (when the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character) A second setting suggesting effect suggesting the current set value is recognized by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing at which the player is informed of the fact that the game has been completed. Then, based on the number of variable displays after being controlled to the high-probability-high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), the aspect of the first setting suggestion effect and the aspect of the second setting suggestion effect are determined.

The production control CPU 120 is controlled to a high probability high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) 61 times (125 times in this example) after 61 times (125 times in this example). Based on this, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th variable display determined as "with variable probability fall" is determined to be "REACH", and the setting value is set to "2". It is assumed that it is decided to make the characters of "Reach!!" In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that "there is a probability variable fall" after 51 times (125 times in this example) after being controlled to the high probability high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on that, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th fluctuation display in the high base state, it is decided to set the background to be "crescent moon background", and the setting value is set to "2". Therefore, it is decided that the number of stars to be displayed should be 3.

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. In the pattern display area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0, and also erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second pending display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 125th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Below the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "Remaining? Times" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (12), in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed (Fig. At the timing of T14 shown in 14-18), it is assumed that a new starting winning to the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number has become one. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second pending display 01TM005 in the second pending display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second pending storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (13), the effect control CPU 120 puts "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. The ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern of . Then, at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established, the first setting suggesting effect is executed to display the letters "REACH" in blue on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T15 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect, which is the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach (FIG. 14-20). timing of T16 shown in 18). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and a message "If defeated, end RUSH , a big hit if you win!" is displayed. That is, when a battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends at this time (125th fluctuation display), and a battle effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed. It is an effect that shows the player that it is controlled to a big hit game state.

For the player, although the probability variable fall is already suggested by the first setting suggestion effect at this time, the player is not convinced of the probability variable fall because it is not notified. Therefore, it is not clear whether the high base state (high probability high base state) ends with this or the high base state (high probability high base state) continues. In such a situation, by suggesting that the high base state (high probability high base state) will continue, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, by suggesting that the display result will be a "big win", the player can have a sense of anticipation.

In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variable pattern of "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", as shown in FIG. A battle effect of losing to 01TM110 is executed (timing of T17 shown in FIGS. 14-18). At the timing when the ally character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and the decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C. The decoration pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is "missing" and that the high base state has ended at the 125th variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (16), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing of T18 shown in FIG. 14-18). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) 61 times or later probability variable fall determination "There is a probability variable fall" Based on the fact that , the background is determined to be "crescent moon background", and the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 3 based on the fact that the set value is set to "2". Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image with a “crescent moon background” and the number of stars “3” as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 for notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, the CPU 103 continues to control to the low probability low base state (normal state) based on the completion of the 125th variation display after the end of the big hit game state (after controlling to the high base state). (timing of T19 shown in FIGS. 14-18). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the second setting suggestion effect, and at the same time, displays the decorative pattern "2" in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern "3" in the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area. At 5R, the decorative symbol "2" is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

As described above, the CPU 103 controls the high-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot game state, and then determines that "there is a probability variable fall" in the 101st or later probability variable fall determination. The game state is shifted to a low probability low base state at the timing when the variable display corresponding to is started. After the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot game state, the probability variation fall determination result designation corresponding to the 101st and subsequent variation display. Continue the battle RUSH mode until it is specified by the command that there is a variable fall, and execute the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect with the variable display specified as "there is a variable fall" and the battle RUSH mode. terminate. In this way, the setting suggesting effect is executed by making it possible to execute the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect in the variable display that triggers the game state to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state. By diversifying the timing, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine in which the variable probability fall determination is executed.

As described above, in the state where the battle RUSH mode corresponding to the high base state is controlled, when the battle effect is executed in the 100th time or in the 100th or later change display, (1) the friend character becomes the enemy character. (2) If the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw, the display result becomes "lost" but in a high base state (battle RUSH mode). (3) If the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, the display result becomes "miss" and the high base state (battle RUSH mode) ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the battle effect that is executed in response to the 100th and 101st fluctuation displays after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode.

(Modified example in the case of falling within 100 fluctuations after high probability high base state transition)
In the above example, if it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" within 100 times after shifting to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode), the variable display determined as "there is a probability variable fall" Only the 1st setting suggesting performance is executed and the 2nd setting suggesting performance is not executed, and both the 1st setting suggesting performance and the 2nd setting suggesting performance are executed at the 100th variable display when the high base state ends. Not limited to such a form, both the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect may be executed in the variable display determined as "with variable probability fall".

Also, in the above-described example, when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" within 100 times after shifting to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode), the fluctuation display determined as "there is a probability variable fall" , but the battle RUSH mode is continued for the production mode. Not limited to such a form, when it is determined that there is a "probability variable fall" within 100 times after shifting to a high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode), the production mode becomes a low probability high base state You may make it change to another production mode which can grasp what is happening.

In the example shown below, when it is determined that there is a "probability variable fall" within 99 times after moving to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode), the variable display determined as "there is a probability variable fall" The 1st setting suggesting performance and the 2nd setting suggesting performance are executed, and from the next variable display to the 100th variable display, the chance time is controlled so that the low probability base state can be grasped. FIG. 14-21 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow when it is determined that "there is a variable probability fall" in the probability variable fall judgment within 99 times after being controlled to the high probability high base state.

In addition, in the example of FIGS. 14-21, a plurality of production modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the production control CPU 120 can control the production mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of production modes. is. Specifically, in the normal state (low probability low base state), it is possible to control the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and in the high probability high base state, as described above, the background of the decorative pattern It is possible to control the battle RUSH mode in which the ally character 01TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen as an image, and in the low-probability-high base state, as shown in FIGS. , the cloud is displayed at the top of the screen and the teammate character 01TM100 is displayed at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 14-21 (C), the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the variable display is started when the production mode is controlled to the normal mode, and the variable When the display result of the display becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to the big win game state, and after the big win game state is finished, the game state is controlled to the high probability and high base state, and the performance mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability variable fall determination when starting the variable display in a state in which the game state is controlled to the high probability high base state.

Here, the CPU 103, in the high-probability-high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high-probability-high base state), the probability variable fall Based on the judgment that "no variable fall" is determined, and the display result is determined to be "lost", the high probability high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (A) A variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability fluctuation fall determination Based on the fact that it is determined that there is no probability variable fall, and that the display result is determined to be a “jackpot”, the variation for the probability variable fall non-winning at the time of the high probability base shown in FIG. 14-12 (B) A variation pattern is determined based on the pattern determination table.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "no probability variable fall" together with a reserved memory number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. Effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that it has not received a probability variable fall determination result designation command that specifies "with probability variable fall" after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the end of the jackpot game state). Continue battle RUSH mode.

On the other hand, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability fluctuation fall determination , and based on the fact that the display result is determined to be "loss", the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 14-12 (G). . In this example, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the current set value is suggested by the battle effect in which the friend character is defeated by the enemy character, and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established. 1 setting suggestive effect, and 2nd setting suggesting the current set value by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect ends (timing when it is notified that the friend character has been defeated by the enemy character). A variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestive effect" is provided in which the suggestive effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (G), the variation pattern of "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, the CPU 103, in the high probability high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high probability high base state), the probability fluctuation fall determination Based on the determination that "there is a probability variable fall" and the display result is determined to be a "jackpot", the variation is based on the variation pattern determination table for the probability variable fall winning jackpot shown in FIG. 14-12 (D). determine the pattern.

The CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "with a probability variable fall" together with a reserved storage number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on receiving a probability variable fall determination result designation command that specifies "with probability variable fall" while controlling the battle RUSH mode. , and shift to the chance time from the next variable display.

The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability-high base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the fact that "variable probability fall" is determined in the probability-variable fall determination.

In the low-probability-high base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is within the 100th variation display after the end of the jackpot game state (after transition to the high base state), the CPU 103 sets the display result as "loss". Based on the determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation variation pattern determination table at the time of the low probability height base shown in FIG. 14-12 (E).

In addition, in the low-probability-high base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is within the 100th variation display after the end of the big-hit game state (after transition to the high-base state), the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit". ”, the variation pattern is determined based on the big hit variation pattern determination table at the time of low probability height base shown in FIG. 14-12 (F).

Then, the CPU 103 terminates the low-probability-high-base state when the 100th variation display is completed after the jackpot game state is ended (after controlling to the high-base state). As a result, the next variation display (the 101st time after the end of the jackpot game state) is executed in the normal state (low-probability-low base state). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the chance time when the 100th variation display is completed after shifting to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot game state is completed). As a result, the next variation display (the 101st time after the end of the jackpot game state) is executed in the normal mode.

FIG. 14-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, and FIGS. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a rendering image related to the 2-setting suggestion rendering; In the example shown below, it is assumed that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "6".

First, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (1), assumes that the 19th variation display is being executed after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of decorative patterns (T1 shown in FIGS. The variable display started at the timing of Also, in the active display area 01TM003, an active display 01TM001 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed.

Here, the production control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM100 in the central part of the image display device 5 and displays "Battle RUSH" is displayed. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 19th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Under the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "81 times left" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (2), in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed (Fig. At the timing of T2 shown in 14-22), it is assumed that a new starting winning to the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number has become one. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second pending display 01TM005 in the second pending display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second pending storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 while the second reserved memory number is 1. The decorative pattern "4" is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative pattern "6" is fixed and stopped in the pattern display area 5R. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped (timing T3 shown in FIG. 14-22).

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 20th variable display after controlling to the high-probability-high base state based on the fact that the second reservation storage number is 1, it is determined that "there is a probability-variable fall" in the probability-variable fall determination. Based on the determination and determination of the display result as "loss", the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined. Then, the CPU 103 includes a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" and a probability variation fall determination result specification command that specifies "with probability variation fall". A command is transmitted to CPU120 for production|presentation control. Then, the game state is shifted to the low probability high base state at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern designation command designating "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern changes to the reach mode, and the friend character becomes the enemy character. , the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value by the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established, and the timing at which the battle effect ends (when the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character) A second setting suggesting effect suggesting the current set value is recognized by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing at which the player is informed of the fact that the game has been completed. Then, based on the number of variable displays after being controlled to the high-probability-high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), the aspect of the first setting suggestion effect and the aspect of the second setting suggestion effect are determined.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a high probability high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) within 50 times (20 times in this example) in the probability variation fall determination "There is a probability variation fall" Based on the determination, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 20th variable display determined as “with variable probability fall” is determined to be “reach !!”, and the set value is “6 is set to , it is assumed that it is decided to make the characters of ``Reach!!'' red. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a high probability high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) within 30 times (20 times in this example) in the probability variation fall determination. Based on that, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th fluctuation display in the high base state, it is decided to set the background to be "full moon background" and the setting value is set to "6". Therefore, it is decided that the number of stars to be displayed should be 6. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. In the pattern display area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 14-22).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which receives a set of commands including a probability variable fall determination result designation command specifying "with variable probability fall", performs the variable display after the next time (after the 21st time) in a low probability high base state. Based on this, it is decided that the battle RUSH mode will end with the variable display that is executed this time (20th time), and that the transition to the chance time will be made in the variable display of the next time (21st time and later).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0, and also erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second pending display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 20th variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Under the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "80 times left" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (5), in the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed (Fig. At the timing of T5 shown in 14-22), it is assumed that a new starting winning to the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number has become one. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the second reserved storage number has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second pending display 01TM005 in the second pending display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second pending storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (6), the effect control CPU 120 puts "4" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the ready-to-win state should be established in the variation pattern. The ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern of . Then, at the timing when the ready-to-reach state is established, the first setting suggesting effect is executed to display the characters "reach!!"

When the ready-to-win state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the characters of "ready-to-win!!" are displayed in a red mode, so that the player understands the possibility of falling with the variable display. In addition, there is a possibility that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 that is currently playing is in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested setting value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual setting value. (reliability is high). In this way, although the player feels regrettable by executing the effect suggesting that the probability variable fall has occurred in the variable display where the probability variable fall has occurred, there is a possibility that the set value is high (4 to 6). Therefore, the decline in motivation to play is suppressed. In addition, since the number of remaining variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the player will play with a desire to generate a big win with the remaining number of times.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (7), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect, which is the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach (see FIG. 14-22 timing of T7 shown). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and a message "If defeated, end RUSH , if it is a draw, continue RUSH, if it is a win, a big hit!!” is displayed. That is, when a battle effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, the high-precision/high base state ends at this time (19th variable display), and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When the production is executed, the high-accuracy-high base state continues from the next time onward (variation display after the 20th time), and when the battle production in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed, the display result is "big hit". ” is shown to the player.

For the player, at this point, although the variable tumble has already been suggested, it has not been notified, and thus the player is not convinced of the tumble. Therefore, it is not clear whether the high probability high base state ends with this or whether the high probability high base state continues. In such a situation, by suggesting that the high-probability/high-base state will continue, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variable pattern of "loss of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", as shown in FIG. A battle effect of losing to 01TM110 is executed (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-22). At the timing when the ally character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and the decorative symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5C. The decoration pattern "4" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is "missing" and that the high-probability state ends at the 20th variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (8), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 14-22). As described above, the production control CPU 120 is controlled to a high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) based on the fact that it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination within 30 times. Therefore, it is decided to set the background to "full moon background" and to set the number of stars to be displayed to 6 based on the fact that the set value is set to "6". Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image with a “full moon background” and the number of stars “6” as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 for notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

The player understands that the battle RUSH mode (high probability high base state) has ended by seeing the battle RUSH end image 01TM300. Then, since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is a "full moon background" and the number of stars displayed is 6, it was executed in a high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the variable display. Among the fluctuation displays so far, the fluctuation display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations) grasps that the variable fall has occurred. Also, the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 currently playing is 6, and the suggested set value (6) is the actual set value (reliability is 100%). grasp.

In this way, in the variable display where the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode) ends, the player is disappointed by being notified that the probability variation has already fallen and is in a low probability state, but it is suggested Since the set value is high (6), the decrease in motivation to play is suppressed. Although the high probability/high base state (battle RUSH mode) has ended, the player can expect the next big win with a high probability, and thus continues to play with a desire to generate a big win.

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 21st variable display after controlling to the high base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off". It is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of "non-reach loss". Then, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a set of commands including a variation pattern specifying command specifying the variation pattern "non-reach out". This 21st variation display is performed in the low probability high base state.

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. In the pattern display area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 changes the chance time image 01TM400 related to the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 of the "full moon background" displayed in the second setting suggestion effect in response to controlling the effect mode to the chance time. In addition to displaying it as a background image, the teammate character 01TM100 is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5, and the characters "chance time" are displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. FIG. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 21st variable display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode), so that the upper left part of the image display device 5 (" Below the "Battle RUSH"), the characters "79 times left" are displayed.

After that, it is assumed that the display result is continuously "off" until the 99th variable display is executed after the control to the high base state. The game state during this period is a low certainty high base state.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 4, determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 100th variable display after controlling to the high base state. It is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of "non-reach loss". Then, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a set of commands including a variation pattern specifying command specifying the variation pattern "non-reach out". This 100th variation display is performed in the low probability base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-24 (11), the effect control CPU 120 controls the pattern display area 5L, the pattern display area 5C, and the pattern display of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. In the area 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (variable display started at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-22).

Next, the CPU 103 terminates the low-probability-high base state based on the completion of the 100th fluctuation display after the jackpot game state is ended (after controlling to the high-base state), and the low-probability-low base state. (normal state) (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-22). 14-24 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "chance time end" in the center of the image display device 5, and also displays the character "end of chance time" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5. The decoration symbol "2", the decoration symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decoration symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5R are determined and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

As described above, the CPU 103 controls the high-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and based on the determination that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall determination, the variation corresponding to the probability variable fall determination At the timing when the display is started, the game state is shifted to the low probability high base state. Then, the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. If so, the battle RUSH mode is ended with the current variable display, and the chance time is controlled from the next variable display to the end of the 100th variable display. In this way, the high-probability-high base state and the low-probability-high base state are controlled in different performance modes, so that the player can easily grasp that the probability variation falls.

In this way, if the probability variation falls within 99 times after being controlled to the high probability high base state, the player is in a high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode) in order to shift from the next fluctuation display to the chance time It is possible to recognize how many times the variable display has caused the definite variable fall after being controlled. The lower the number of variable display times when the probability variation falls (the faster the probability variation fall in the battle RUSH mode), the shorter the period of the high probability state and the longer the period of the low probability state, so the player may lose the desire to play. , the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are executed as the effect associated with the variable display that has fallen down. For the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the earlier the timing at which it was determined that there was a "probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall judgment, the higher the number of variable display times after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode) is smaller), the reliability of the setting suggestion is higher, so it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

It should be noted that, in the above embodiment, during the period being controlled in the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), as described above corresponding display (active display, pending display) change suggestive effect acting After executing (first change suggesting effect, second change suggesting effect, third change suggesting effect), it is possible to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the corresponding display. Here, when the change suggestive effect is executed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be varied depending on whether the probability variation is falling (whether the low probability high base state). Further, when the change suggesting effect is executed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be varied according to the set value.

For example, in the case of a high probability high base state, the execution ratio of the change production when the change suggestion production is executed is 90%, whereas in the case of the low probability high base state, the change suggestion production is executed. The execution ratio of the change performance at the time of 50% (when the set value is 1 to 3) or 10% (when the set value is 4 to 6). That is, in the high probability high base state, the display mode of the corresponding display is likely to change when the change suggestion effect is executed, but in the low probability high base state, the display mode of the corresponding display when the change suggestion effect is executed is difficult to change. Also, in the low probability high base state, when the change suggestion effect is executed, if the setting value is low (when the setting value is 1 to 3), the display mode of the corresponding display is relatively easy to change, but the setting When the value is high (when the set value is 4 to 6), it is relatively difficult to change the display mode of the correspondence display. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the low-probability-high base state in which the percentage of big wins is low is controlled, even if the change suggestion effect is executed, the change effect is difficult to be executed, so that the corresponding display is changed recklessly. To improve motivation to continue a game because it is possible to suggest high setting by making it difficult to execute the change suggesting performance even if the change suggesting performance is executed, while suppressing the expectation without letting the game continue. can be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting-suggestion effect may differ according to the set value. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the set value is low (1 to 3). can be Conversely, when the set value is low (1 to 3), setting suggestions are made at a higher rate than when the set value is high (4 to 6). You may make it perform production|presentation.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball operating handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing specific control according to a set value and capable of receiving a signal output from a gaming device,
A game control means for performing variable display of special identification information and controlling the progress of the game;
special display means controlled by the game control means and capable of displaying variable display results of special identification information using a plurality of light emitting elements;
an imparting means capable of imparting a game value based on a signal output from the gaming device;
setting permission state control means capable of controlling a setting permission state for permitting setting of the setting value;
setting confirmation state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value;
A gaming value can be given based on a signal output from the gaming device when being controlled to the setting permission state,
A game value can be given based on a signal output from the gaming device when the setting confirmation state is controlled;
without performing variable display of the special identification information when being controlled to the setting permission state;
not performing variable display of the special identification information when being controlled to the setting confirmation state;
The mode of the plurality of light-emitting elements of the special display means when being controlled to the setting permission state is a mode different from the mode showing the variable display result of the special identification information, and all of them are in a mode of emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images